light armored vehicle -25 gunnery and … - light... · light armored vehicle -25 gunnery and...

229
MCWP 3-14.1 LIGHT ARMORED VEHICLE -25 GUNNERY AND EMPLOYMENT U.S. Marine Corps PCN 143 000034 00

Upload: vukhue

Post on 13-Mar-2018

258 views

Category:

Documents


15 download

TRANSCRIPT

MCWP 3-14.1

LIGHT ARMORED VEHICLE -25 GUNNERY AND EMPLOYMENT

U.S. Marine Corps

PCN 143 000034 00

DEPARTMENT OF THE NAVYHeadquarters United States Marine Corps

Washington, D.C. 20380-1775

19 December 1997FOREWORD

Marine Corps Warfighting Publication (MCWP) 3-14.1, Light Armored Vehicle-25Gunnery and Employment, describes how the crew and section of the light armoredvehicle-25 (LAV-25) conducts gunnery training for combat. MCWP 3-14.1 alsoprovides the tactics, techniques, and procedures for use in engaging and destroyingenemy targets with the LAV-25 weapons systems.

The target audience for this publication is LAV-25 crew members, vehiclecommanders, unit master gunners, S-3 officers, and commanders of light armoredreconnaissance units. MCWP 3-14.1 outlines a standardized way to train MarineLAV-25 gunners through the use of gunnery tables.

MCWP 3-14.1 supersedes FMFM 6-32, Light Armored Vehicle GunneryEmployment, dated 28 August 1992.

Reviewed and approved this date.

BY DIRECTION OF THE COMMANDANT OF THE MARINE CORPS

J. E. RHODES Lieutenant General, U.S. Marine Corps

Commanding GeneralMarine Corps Combat Development Command

DISTRIBUTION: 143 000034 00

To Our Readers

Changes: Readers of this publication are encouraged to submit suggestions andchanges that will improve it. Recommendations may be sent directly to CommandingGeneral, Doctrine Division (C 42), Marine Corps Combat Development Command,3300 Russell Road, Suite 318A, Quantico, VA 22134-5021 or by fax to 703-784-2917(DSN 278-2917) or by E-mail to smb@doctrine div@mccdc. Recommendationsshould include the following information:

Location of changePublication number and titleCurrent page numberParagraph number (if applicable)Line numberFigure or table number (if applicable)

Nature of changeAdd, deleteProposed new text, preferably double-spaced and typewritten

Justification and/or source of change

Additional copies: A printed copy of this publication may be obtained from MarineCorps Logistics Base, Albany, GA 31704-5001, by following the instructions inMCBul 5600, Marine Corps Doctrinal Publications Status. An electronic copy maybe obtained from the Doctrine Division, MCCDC, world wide web home page which isfound at the following universal reference locator:http://ismo-www1.quantico.usmc.mil/docdiv.

Unless otherwise stated, whenever the masculine or feminine gender is used, both men and women are included.

Page

Chapter 1. Weapons Systems and Capabilities

1001 M242 25mm Automatic Gun 1-11002 M240 Series 7.62mm Machine Guns 1-61003 M257 Smoke Grenade Launcher 1-7

Chapter 2. Target Acquisition Process

2001 Observation 2-12002 Detection 2-52003 Location 2-82004 Identification 2-92005 Classification 2-92006 Confirmation 2-112007 Engagement ` 2-11

Chapter 3. Fire Commands and Engagement Techniques

3001 Elements of a Fire Command 3-13002 Fire Command Terms 3-23003 Crew Duties in Response to the Fire Command 3-43004 Choice of Method of Engagement 3-53005 25mm Point Target Engagement Techniques 3-113006 25mm Area Target Engagement 3-123007 Coaxially and Pintle-Mounted 7.62mm Machine Gun Engagement 3-133008 M257 Smoke Grenade Launcher Engagement 3-163009 Multiple and Simultaneous Target Engagements 3-173010 Observation of Fires 3-193011 Direct Fire Adjustment 3-203012 Target Leading 3-213013 Engagement Termination 3-22

iii

Light Armored Vehicle-25 Gunnery and Employment

Table of Contents

Chapter 4. Fire Control and Distribution

4001 Standing Operating Procedures 4-14002 Fire Control and Distribution Measures 4-24003 Fire Distribution Patterns 4-54004 Section Fire Planning 4-64005 Section Fire Control 4-84006 Section Fire Commands 4-8

Chapter 5. LAV-25 Unit Gunnery Training Programs

5001 Developing LAV-25 Gunnery Programs 5-15002 Training Analysis and Planning 5-15003 Training Planning Tips 5-25004 Prerequisites to Gunnery Training 5-35005 Continuation of Gunnery Training 5-4

Chapter 6. LAV-25 Gunnery Skills Test

6001 Types of LGSTs 6-16002 Standards 6-16003 Site Planning and Preparation 6-2

Chapter 7. Training Devices

7001 LAV-25 Turret Trainer 7-17002 Precision Gunnery System 7-27003 M240 as a Subcaliber Device 7-27004 LAV-25 Subcaliber Training Device 7-2

Chapter 8. LAV-25 Crew Evaluator Training

8001 Prerequisites 8-18002 Certification 8-1

Chapter 9. Preliminary Gunnery Training Exercises

9001 Weapons Manipulation Training 9-19002 Target Acquisition Training 9-29003 Range Determination Training 9-39004 Passive and Thermal Sight Employment 9-39005 Smoke Employment 9-49006 Pintle-Mount Machine Gun Employment 9-4

iv

MCWP 3-14.1

Chapter 10. Live Fire Ranges

10001 Establishing an LAV-25 Live Fire Range 10-110002 Range and Training Area Reconnaissance 10-410003 Range and Training Area Personnel, Equipment, and Layout 10-410004 Range Operations 10-12

Chapter 11. Scaled Ranges

11001 Uses 11-111002 Small-Scale (1/60 or 1/30, Stationary LAV-25) 11-211003 Small-Scale (1/10), Moving LAV-25 11-411004 Half-Scale 11-411005 Target Types 11-511006 Small-Scale Target Mechanisms 11-5

Appendices

A Cleaning, Inspecting, and Storing Ammunition A-1B Range Determination B-1C Air Defense C-1D LAV-25 Gunnery Skills Test Recommended Performance Checklists D-1E Basic Gunnery Tables E-1F Sustainment Gunnery Tables F-1G Intermediate Gunnery Tables G-1H Advanced Gunnery Tables H-1I Ammunition Forecasting and Allocating I-1J Immediate and Remedial Actions J-1K Weapons Conditions K-1L Advanced Gunnery Performance Checklists L-1M Point Calculation Worksheets M-1N Glossary N-1O References and Related Publications O-1

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment

v (reverseblank)

MCWP 3-14.1

Through its combination of lethal weaponssystems, mobility, speed, and agility over roughand varied terrain, the light armored vehicle(LAV) gives its crew the means to survive as aneffective fighting element.

The LAV-25 is a lightly armored, eight-wheeled,amphibious vehicle. It is equipped with astabilized 25mm cannon, a pintle-mounted7.62mm machine gun, and a coaxially mounted7.62mm machine gun capable of engagingmechanized targets and personnel.

The LAV-25 also uses the LAV-25 Day/NightSight to provide enhanced night/battlefield smokefighting and thermal imaging/target acquisition.This fire control sighting system is capable ofattaining a high percentage of first round,destructive target hits.

Manned and operated by a driver, a gunner, and avehicle commander, the LAV-25 (fig. 1-1) iscapable of carrying four infantry scouts in the

rear. A competent crew can bring accurate,high-volume firepower to bear against the enemy.

1001. M242 25mm Automatic Gun

The main armament of the LAV-25 is a 25mm,fully automatic, externally powered Bushmasterchain gun. (See fig. 1-2.) The M242 isturret-mounted with a 360-degree field ofmovement. The M242 is used to destroy lightlyarmored vehicles (BMPs, BRDMs, BTRs, etc.)and some aerial targets, such as helicopters andslow-flying aircraft. It is also used to suppressenemy positions such as troops in the open, indug-in positions, or in built-up areas. SeeTechnical Manual (TM) 08594A-10/1B, LAV-25Turret, for detailed operator information.

a. DescriptionThe dual-feed weapon system allows the crew toselect and load two types of available serviceammunition. The weapon system is externally

Chapter 1Weapons Systems and Capabilities

DRIVER

SCOUTSCOMMANDER

VEHICLE

GUNNER

Figure 1-1. LAV-25.

powered by a 1.5 horsepower direct current (DC)motor; this allows selection of three rates of fire.

Single shot (as fast as the commander or gunnercan squeeze the trigger).Low rate (100 rounds per minute, plus or minus25 rounds/minute).High rate (200 rounds per minute, plus or minus25 rounds/minute).

b. Ammunition There are five basic types of rounds used with the25mm gun. Each has its own uniquecharacteristics and serves to fill a specificrequirement for training and combat. Table 1-1(page 1-6) presents each type of round, itscapabilities, and uses. Appendix A providesdetails on proper procedures for cleaning,inspecting, and storing ammunition.

(1) M791 Armor-Piercing Discarding SabotWith Tracer (APDS-T). The M791 APDS-Tcartridge (see fig. 1-3) penetrates lightly armoredvehicles. Examples of lightly armored vehicles areBMPs, BMDs, BTRs, BRDMs, ZSUs, andself-propelled artillery.

The APDS-T is a fixed-type, percussion-primedround. It consists of a sabot-encapsulatedprojectile body crimped to a steel cartridge case.The projectile body consists of a solid tungstenalloy penetrator, pressed-on aluminum windshield,pressed-in tracer pellets, molded discarding-typenylon sabot, pressed-on polyethylene nose cap,and staked aluminum base.

Gases produced by the burning propellantdischarge the projectile from the gun at 1,345meters per second (plus or minus 20 meters persecond) and ignite the tracer. Setback, centrifugalforce, and air pressure cause the sabot to separateon leaving the gun barrel. The discarding sabotleaves the barrel at about a 34-degree angle alongthe gun-target line (17 degrees off each side) for100 meters. The tungsten penetrator (core) isspin-stabilized and penetrates the target solely bykinetic energy.

1-2 MCWP 3-14.1

Figure 1-2. M242 25mm Automatic Gun.

WARNING

25MM DISCARDED SABOT PETALSMAY CAUSE DEATH OR SERIOUSINJURY TO UNPROTECTED MARINESLOCATED WITHIN THE WEAPON’SDANGER ZONE THAT EXTENDS FROMTHE MUZZLE AT AN ANGLE OF 34DEGREES ALONG THE LINE OF FIRE

Figure 1-3. M791 Armor-Piercing Discarding

BLACK SABOT

CASE, CARTRIDGE

Projectile:

Color: Black with white markings

Muzzle velocity: 1,345 meters per second

Penetrator (core)-Tungsten alloy Sabot-Nylon, aluminum base Nose cap-Polyethylene

The maximum effective range is 1,700 meters.This is based on the following factors:

Tracer burnout is 1,700 meters. It is difficult toaccurately detect rounds beyond this range.However, in some environments, the ability toobserve and adjust rounds extends well beyondtracer burnout since the impact of the rounds canbe observed.Beyond 2,200 meters, the accuracy of theAPDS-T decreases sharply.As range increases, the APDS-T penetrationdecreases against BMP-1 and BMP-2, especiallywhen these vehicles are equipped with appliquéarmor. While some targets can be successfullyengaged from the flank beyond 1,700 meters, thecombined problems of “sensing” (observingimpact), round expenditure, and longerengagement times demand that the vehiclecommander make a careful estimate of thesituation before engaging targets beyond 1,700meters.

(2) M919 Armor-Piercing, Fin-StabilizedDiscarding Sabot With Tracer (APFSDS-T).The M919 APFSDS-T cartridge (fig. 1-4)penetrates lightly armored vehicles.

APFSDS-T is a fixed-type, percussion-primedround consisting of a sabot-encapsulated

projectile body crimped to a steel cartridge case.The projectile body consists of a depleted uraniumpenetrator, pressed-on aluminum windscreen,screw-on fins with pressed-in tracer pellets,segmented discarding-type nylon sabot, andpressed-on polyethylene nose cap.

Gases produced by the burning propellantdischarge the projectile from the gun at 1,420meters per second (plus or minus 20 meters persecond) and ignite the tracer. Setback, centrifugalforce, and air pressure cause the sabot to discardon leaving the gun barrel. The discarding sabotleaves the barrel at a 17-degree angle on bothsides of the gun-target line for 100 meters (totalof 34 degrees). The tungsten penetrator with adepleted uranium core is fin-stabilized and

penetrates the target solely by kinetic energy.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 1-3

WARNING

25MM DISCARDED SABOT PETALSMAY CAUSE DEATH OR SERIOUSINJURY TO UNPROTECTED MARINESLOCATED WITHIN THE WEAPON’SDANGER ZONE THAT EXTENDS FROMTHE MUZZLE AT AN ANGLE OF 34DEGREES ALONG THE LINE OF FIRE

PRIMERPROPELLANT

TRACER

SABOT W INDSCREEN

FLASH TUBE FIN OBTURATOR

DU PENETRATOR

NYLON NOSECAP

Projectile:

M uzzle Velocity: 1,420 m eters per second

Penetrator core Depleted uranium (DU) Sabot-Nylon Nose cap, nylon Polyethylene

Figure 1-4. M919 Armor-Piercing, Fin-Stabilized Discarding Sabot With Tracer (APFSDS-T).

The maximum effective range is 1,700 meters.This round has increased penetration capabilitiesas well as tracer burn time, which allowsengagement of targets at greater ranges.

Note: Current LAV-25 sights may notcompensate for the flatter trajectory of theM-919. Also, the Marine Corps has not procuredthis round at time of publication because of costand environmental issues. However, the round isavailable through the U.S. Army system, ifneeded.

(3) M792, High Explosive Incendiary WithTracer (HEI-T). The M792 HEI-T cartridge (seefig. 1-5) is used to destroy lightly armoredvehicles and helicopters (armored and unarmored)and to suppress antitank guided missile (ATGM)positions, crew-served weapons, dismountedinfantry, and likely enemy positions past coaxial7.62mm machine gun range out to a distance of3,000 meters.

The HEI-T cartridge is a fixed-type,percussion-primed round. The cartridge consistsof a high explosive incendiary (HEI)-filled,one-piece projectile body crimped to a steelcartridge case. The projectile body consists of ahollow steel body, M758 fuse, 32 grams of anHEI-mix, and pressed-in tracer.

Gases produced by the burning propellantdischarge the projectile from the gun at 1,100meters per second (plus or minus 20 meters persecond). On impact, the fuse (M758) functionsand the HEI filler detonates, dispersing theincendiary mixture in a 5-meter radius. If theprojectile has not impacted at about 3,000 meters,the mechanical fuse will self-detonate the round.

The maximum effective range for HEI-T is 1,600meters. This is based on the following factors:

The round is designed to self-detonate at 3,000meters.Tracer burnout is 2,000 meters, but the round canbe adjusted beyond this range by observing theimpact of the rounds.Though accuracy severely decreases beyond1,600 meters, the 5-meter bursting radius and rateof fire make it possible to achieve effect on bothpoint and area targets out to 3,000 meters.However, the ballistic daysight organic to theLAV-25 only allows ranging for HEI-Tammunition, using the stadia lines in the reticle,out to 2,200 meters. Therefore, accurate sightingand ranging using that sight is limited to targetsout to this distance. Beyond that, impacts can beobserved using the sight, but there is no reticlepattern available for accurate adjustments. Thethermal sight picture, using narrow field of view,terminates at the bottom of the reticle pattern,which is 2,200 meters for high explosive (HE).Therefore, using the thermal sight, targets cannotbe acquired, nor can impacts be observed, past2,200 meters.

(4) M910 Target Practice Discarding SabotWith Tracer (TPDS-T). The M910 TPDS-Tcartridge (fig. 1-6) allows units to practice sabotengagements on limited distance ranges. TPDS-Tis ballistically matched to the APDS-T, butinstead of the 14,572 meter maximum range forAPDS-T, the maximum range is 8,000 meters.

The TPDS-T is a fixed-type, percussion-primedround. It consists of an encapsulated projectilebody crimped to a steel cartridge case. Theprojectile body is steel, where the APDS-T istungsten alloy. It has a pressed-on aluminum

1-4 MCWP 3-14.1

YELLOW TO ORANGE

GOLD TIPPROJECTILE

CASE, CARTRIDGE

Projectile:

Color: Yellow to Orange projectile with Gold Tip

Muzzle velocity: 1,700 meters per second

High explosive incendiary (HEI)- filled, One piece

Figure 1-5. M792 High-Explosive Incendiary

windshield, pressed-in tracer pellets, moldeddiscarding-type nylon sabot, staked aluminumbase, and pressed-on polyethylene nose cap.Gases produced by the burning propellantdischarge the projectile from the gun at 1,540meters per second (plus or minus 20 meters persecond) and ignite the tracer. Setback, centrifugalforce, and air pressure cause the sabot to discardon leaving the gun barrel. The discarding sabotmay cause death or injury along a 34-degree anglealong the gun-target line for 100 meters. The steelprojectile body is spin-stabilized and penetratesthe target solely by kinetic energy.

The TPDS-T cartridge is ballistically matched tothe APDS-T with a slight increase in muzzlevelocity (about 100 meters per second). The highmass flow tracer decreases the base drag,allowing the spin-stabilized core to match thetrajectory of the armor-piercing round to a rangeof 2,000 meters. Upon tracer burnout, thelightweight core loses velocity rapidly andeventually tumbles when its velocity goes belowthe speed of sound.

Tracer burnout is 2,000 meters. However, sincethe round is used to simulate APDS-T, it shouldonly be used out to 1,700 meters to match themaximum effective range of that round.

(5) M793 Target Practice With Tracer (TP-T).The M793 TP-T cartridge (fig. 1-7) is a

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 1-5

Projectile:

M uzzle velocity: 1,345 m eters per second

m arkingswhite with Black Color:

Penetrator (core)-Steel Sabot-Nylon, alum inum base Nose cap-Polyethylene

PELLET,BOOSTER

CORE,SUBPROJECTILE

PRIMER,M -115

PROPELLANT

BASE

PROJECTILE ASSEMBLY

CASE, CARTRIDGE

CAP, PROTECTIVE

TRACER

Figure 1-6. M910 Target Practice Discarding Sabot With Tracer (TPDS-T).

WARNING

25MM DISCARDED SABOT PETALSMAY CAUSE DEATH OR SERIOUSINJURY TO UNPROTECTED MARINESLOCATED WITHIN THE WEAPON’SDANGER ZONE THAT EXTENDS FROMTHE MUZZLE AT AN ANGLE OF 34DEGREES ALONG THE LINE OF FIRE

BLUE

Muzzle velocity: 1,100 meters per second

markingswhite with Blue Color:

practice Inert Projectile:

CASE, CARTRIDGE WHITE MARKINGPROJECTILE

Figure 1-7. M793 Target Practice With Tracer

fixed-type, percussion-primed training round thatis used in place of the HEI-T round.The TP-T cartridge is ballistically matched to theM792 HEI-T round. All other characteristics arethe same as the HEI-T.Tracer burnout is 2,000 meters. However,accuracy is greatly reduced if engaging pointtargets. The maximum effective range is 1,600meters. Training with the round beyond tracerburnout should be done only to simulate HEI-Tarea engagements and only as long as the impactof the round is visible.

Note: Effective range of ammunition is based onthe ability to adjust the round onto target. Theeffective range does not imply that the round’spenetration or killing ability is impaired beyondthe effective range.

1002. M240 Series 7.62mm Machine Guns

The secondary weapons systems of the LAV-25consist of two 7.62mm machine guns. One M240

series machine gun is coaxially mounted in theLAV-25 turret with the M242 25mm weapon.The other weapon is a pintle-mounted M240E17.62mm machine gun that is located on top of theturret outside the vehicle commander’s hatch.These weapons provide flexibility to the crew inengaging targets with weapons other than themain gun and also in engaging multiple targetssimultaneously.

a. M240 7.62mm Coaxially Mounted MachineGunThis machine gun is used to engage dismountedinfantry, crew-served weapons, ATGM teams,and unarmored vehicles. (See fig. 1-8.)

(1) Description. This weapon is a belt-fed,gas-operated, fully automatic 7.62mm machinegun with a maximum effective range of 900meters (tracer burnout). It is coaxially mountedon the right side of the M242 25mm main gun.

1-6 MCWP 3-14.1

Table 1-1. Ammunition Data.

M791APDS-T

M919*APFSDS-T

M792HEI-T

M910TPDS-T

M793TP-T

DODAC A974 NA A975 A940 A975Muzzle velocity 1345 MPS 1420 MPS* 1100 MPS 1540 MPS 1100 MPS

Time of flight1000 meters1500 meters2000 meters2500 meters

seconds0.81.21.72.2

seconds0.8*1.2*1.7*2.2*

seconds1.22.23.65.3

seconds0.761.261.882.72

seconds1.22.23.65.3

Cartridge weight 458 grams 450 grams 501 grams 415 grams 501 grams

Projectile weight 105 grams 110 grams 185 grams 94 grams 185 grams

Tracer burn time 1.4 seconds classified 3.5 seconds 1.88 seconds 3.5 seconds

Bursting radiusArming distance

NA NA 5 meters 0-100 meters

NA NA

Maximum effective range 1700 meters 1700 meters 1600 meters 1700 meters 1600 meters

Tracer burn range 1700 meters 1700+ meters* 2000 meters 1700 meters 2000 meters

*These specifications are pending final testing. See note on page 1-4.

(2) Ammunition. The preferred ammunition forthis weapon is a ratio of four ball rounds to onetracer round (DODAC A131). There are othervariations of 7.62mm ammunition available;however, the four ball rounds to one tracer roundratio mix allows the commander and gunner touse the tracer-on-target method of adjusting fireto achieve target kill. See TM 9-1005-313-10,Operator’s Manual for Machine Gun, 7.62mmM240, M240C, M240E1 for more operator infor-mation.

b. M240E1 7.62mm Pintle-Mounted MachineGunA M240E1 7.62mm machine gun is mounted ontop of the turret in front of the vehiclecommander’s position. It is used to engagedismounted infantry, crew-served weapons,

ATGM teams, and unarmored vehicles. (See fig.1-9.)

(1) Description. This weapon is also anair-cooled, belt-fed, gas-operated automaticweapon. The M240E1 is able to provide a heavy,controlled volume of accurate, long-range firethat is beyond the capabilities of individual smallarms. For more detailed information onemployment, see MCWP 3-15.1, Machine Gunsand Machine Gun Gunnery.

(2) Ammunition. The M240E1 machine gunuses 7.62mm North Atlantic Treaty Organization(NATO) cartridge ammunition issued indisintegrating metallic split-linked belts. Like thecoaxially mounted machine gun, the

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 1-7

Figure 1-9. M240E1 7.62mm Pintle-Mounted Machine Gun.

Figure 1-8. M240 7.62mm Coaxially Mounted Machine Gun.

pintle-mounted M240E1 normally uses the fourball rounds to one tracer round ratio mix.

1003. M257 Smoke Grenade Launcher

There are two 4-tube electrically fired smokegrenade launchers on the LAV-25. One launcheris located on each side of the 25mm gun. Whenactivated, grenades conceal the vehicle byproviding smoke cover that blocks visualobservation.a. DescriptionEach launcher fires four smoke grenades. Theycan be fired either on the right side, left side, orboth sides at once. Upon activation, the smokegrenade creates enough smoke to screen the

LAV-25 within 3 seconds. The vehiclecommander or gunner fires the launchers frominside the turret.

1-8 MCWP 3-14.1

Figure 1-10. L8A1/A3 Smoke Grenade.

METAL HEAD

RUBBER CASE

b. Ammunition L8A1/A3 red phosphorus smoke grenades arefilled with a red phosphorus and butyl rubber mix.(See fig. 1-10.) The burst is in the direction theturret is pointed. The bursting radius is a170-degree fan, 10 meters high and 20 to 50meters to the front. The smoke cloud lasts from 1to 3 minutes, depending on wind speed and otherweather conditions. See TM 08594A-10/1B formore operator information.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 1-9

On future battlefields, the tempo will be such thatan LAV-25 crew must be prepared to move andto rapidly acquire and engage multiple targets.Platoons may be operating within irregular battlelines over extended distances. Threat targets maybe intermixed with friendly and neutral or civilianvehicles. The LAV-25’s speed and mobility, cou-pled with battle drills, increase the likelihood ofopposing and allied forces becoming intermingledduring combat operations.

Survival in these situations depends on the crew’sability to effectively search for, detect, locate,identify, classify, confirm, and rapidly engagethreat targets. LAV-25 crews must take advan-tage of the tactical situation and engage first.Speed and accuracy of an engagement depend onthe degree of crew proficiency in target acquisi-tion techniques and gunnery procedures.

This chapter describes the target acquisition proc-ess, including night sight acquisition, and themethods for acquiring and classifying targets. Italso describes the acquisition report and relatestarget acquisition confirmation to conduct of fire.

Target acquisition is the timely detection, loca-tion, and identification of targets in enough detailto accurately attack by either direct fire or sup-porting weapons. The target acquisition process isa series of progressive and interdependent steps(or actions). The steps in the target acquisitionprocess are observation, detection, location, iden-tification, classification, and confirmation. (Seefig. 2-1.) The process leads to engagement of thetarget, covered in chapter 3 of this manual. Thetarget acquisition process is heavily dependent onactive observation, called “crew search” for theLAV-25, the results of which feed the processthroughout. Crew members must observe the bat-tlefield continuously whether in the offense or

defense and whether the vehicle is stationary ormoving. Effective target acquisition for anLAV-25 crew requires the combined efforts ofeach crew member. The target acquisition processcan take minutes or just seconds to get to thecommand of execution.

2001. Observation

Observation, accomplished on the LAV-25 bycrew search, is the act of carefully and continu-ously surveying the battle area for indications oftargets. Observation is vital. Crew members useboth the unaided eye and the vehicle optics to

Chapter 2

Target Acquisition Process

OBSERVATION

CREW SEARCH

DETECTION

LOCATION

IDENTIFICATION

CLASSIFICATION

ENGAGE DECISION WEAPON/AMMUNITION

METHOD OF ENGAGEMENT

FIRE COMMAND

CONFIRMATION

EXECUTION

FOE

FOE

FRIEND

FRIEND

ACQUISITION REPORT

NO

YES

Figure 2-1. Target Acquisition Process.

search or scan predetermined sectors to acquire(detect, locate, and identify) targets.

a. Planning Considerations

(1) Assign Sectors of Observation. The vehi-cle commander assigns specific sectors of obser-vation to each crew member for targetacquisition. The vehicle commander normally has360-degree responsibility, including that for over-head observation. Every other crew member is as-signed a specific sector of observation, includingcrew members riding in the rear of the vehicle, toensure all around coverage of the battlefield.When the crew operates as a section or a platoon,each LAV-25’s all around coverage will createoverlapping fields of observation.

(2) Consider Observation Limitations. Duringoperations in which the vehicle is buttoned-up, thevehicle commander’s and gunner’s ability to ob-serve and acquire targets are reduced by at least50 percent. Their observation responsibilities mustbe adjusted to compensate for the reduction. Ifthe LAV-25 is operating in a nuclear, biological,and chemical (NBC) environment, acquisition isfurther hampered due to wearing the protectivemask.

(3) Use Dismounted Observer(s). When anLAV-25 is halted in a hide position, an observer,equipped with sufficient binoculars or optics andcommunications, should dismount and locate for-ward of the vehicle position. Depending on the

mission or the vehicle’s assigned area(s) of re-sponsibility, more than one observer may be re-quired to provide sufficient coverage.

(4) Conduct Observation Continuously. Tobe effective, crew members scan their areas of ob-servation continuously to detect targets or possi-ble target locations. Intermittent observationincreases the opportunity for enemy vehicles toapproach undetected. b. Ground Search Techniques andMethods There are three ground search techniques that en-able crew members to quickly locate targets: therapid scan, slow (50-meter) scan, and detailedsearch. All three techniques may be used by allcrew members using the unaided eye, binoculars,or vehicle optics during both favorable and limitedvisibility. These techniques may be modified atnight by using the off-center vision method.

(1) Rapid Scan. The rapid scan method quicklydetects obvious signs of enemy activity. (See fig.2-2.) It is usually the first method used by the ob-server, whether the LAV-25 is stationary or mov-ing. The vehicle commander may use binoculars,night vision devices, or the unaided eye; the gun-ner may use the M36 sight or the unity view win-dow. The observer—

Starts in the center of the sector and rapidlyscans from the nearest to farthest visiblepoint.

2-2 MCWP 3-14.1

3

1

USE UNAIDEDEYE OR OPTICS

TREE LINE

BRUSH

2

Figure 2-2. Rapid Scan Technique.

Orients left or right and conducts a rapidscan, viewing from near to far. This sweepmust overlap the center area of the previ-ously scanned sector.Scans the remaining side in the same manneronce one side of center is completed.

(2) Slow (50-Meter) Scan. If no obvious targetsare identified in the rapid scan, crew membersconduct a more deliberate scan of the terrain byusing internal optics or binoculars. (See fig. 2-3.)When in a defensive position or from a short halt,the vehicle commander or gunner—

Pauses at short intervals to give the eyestime to focus, searches a strip of the targetarea 50 meters deep from right to left.Searches a strip farther out from the left toright, overlapping the first area scanned.Stops and searches the immediate area thor-oughly when a suspicious area or possibletarget signature is detected, uses the detailedsearch technique.

(3) Detailed Search. If no targets are found us-ing the rapid or slow scan techniques and timepermits, crews should use the optics (day andnight) to make a careful, deliberate search of spe-cific areas in their assigned area. (See fig. 2-4.)This method is also used to search, in detail, smallareas or locations with likely or suspected ave-nues of approach. Concentrate on one specificarea or location and study that area intensely.Look for direct or indirect target signatures in a

clockwise manner around the focal point (terrainfeature) of the area. Some signature examplesare—

Dust created by movement of vehicles.Diesel smoke or exhaust.Track or tire marks.Light reflections (flash) from glass or metal.Angular objects that do not conform with thesurrounding area.Vegetation that appears out of place.Flash or smoke from a weapon or missile.Entrenchments or earthworks.

(4) Off-Center Vision Method. Day and nightscanning techniques (rapid, slow, and detailed)are similar with one exception. At night, usingdaylight optics or the unaided eye, do not look di-rectly at an object, but a few degrees off to theside of the target object. Move the eyes in short,

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 2-3

USE OPTICSBEST FROM HALT

50

METERS

50

METERS

50

METERS

Figure 2-3. Slow (50-Meter) Scan.

A POSSIBLE RPG LOCATION

B POSSIBLE ATGM TEAM LOCATION

C POSSIBLE ATGM AND

POSSIBLE LOCATION

TANK LOCATION

D OCCUPIED BY TANKS

B C A

D

Figure 2-4. Detailed Search Technique.

abrupt, irregular movements. At each likely targetarea, pause a few seconds to attempt to detect atarget or any movement. If an object is detectedas a possible target, use off-center vision to ob-serve it. While observing the object, use frequenteye movement to prevent object fadeout. Cuppingthe hands around the eyes will also decrease nightvision loss.

c. Air Search TechniquesThere are two air search techniques to detect aer-ial targets quickly: flat terrain scan and hilly ter-rain scan. Both of these techniques are based onthe slow (50-meter) scanning technique discussedpreviously. While using a ground search tech-nique, crew members should always search fromnear to far for possible targets. When using an airsearch technique, crew members should alwayssearch from far to near.

(1) Flat Terrain Scan (Air Search). In flat ter-rain, search the horizon by moving the eyes inshort movements from object to object. (See fig.2-5.) More detail is registered this way than witha continuous scan of the horizon.

(2) Hilly Terrain Scan (Air Search). In hillyterrain, search the sky beginning just below the

horizon and move upward. (See fig. 2-5.) Useprominent terrain features as points of referenceto ensure overlapping areas of search.

When using air search techniques, concentratejust below the tops of trees or vegetation to de-tect helicopters in hide positions.

Ground and air search techniques may be com-bined. This allows crew members to scan for tar-gets in the air and on the ground at the same time.Combinations used will depend on the area of op-erations and mission, enemy, terrain and weather,troops and support available, time available(METT-T). Air search at night is similar tosearching for ground targets at night.

Threat aircraft normally operate in pairs. If air-craft are acquired, a second pair of aircraft shouldbe expected, and possibly another pair after that.There may be a number of pairs of aircraftencountered.

d. Crew Search TipsThe following observation tips are based on les-sons learned. All of the optical devices on theLAV-25 may be used to acquire targets. Thesedevices include binoculars, night vision devices,

2-4 MCWP 3-14.1

Figure 2-5. Air Search Techniques.

M36 day sights, passive and thermal night sights,and the driver’s night vision viewer. The follow-ing tips will help crews increase their effectivenessin observing:

Initial scanning is done without optics, thenwith optics (such as binoculars or sights).Target search is continuous. Possible tar-get(s) missed in the first or second scan maybe seen on the third or fourth scan.The entire crew should look for likely targetsand target locations using proper scanningtechniques.While on the move, the gunner should usethe rapid scan technique. The gunner should dim the brightness of hisreticle, and the turret dome lights should beoff or in the filtered position. Marines shoulddo the same with the dome lights in the troopcompartment. This will aid in acquisition andlocation of targets during day or night opera-tions, and it will aid in detection avoidance.The observer should be aware that targets onthe edge of the peripheral fields of view areharder to detect and locate.Operations during NBC conditions limit thecrew’s ability to acquire and locate targets.Continuous scanning is required to make upfor narrowed fields of view while wearingprotective masks. Concentrate the search in areas where tar-gets are more likely to appear such as identi-fied avenues of approach, wood lines, andreverse slope firing positions.

2002. Detection

Target detection is the discovery of any targetsuch as personnel, vehicles, equipment, or objectsof potential military significance on the battle-field. Target detection occurs during crew searchas a direct result of observation. Usually, the tar-get emits indicators, or signatures, that help theobserver to detect it. The observer should beaware of unique battlefield signatures that will keythe observer to possible targets.

a. Target SignaturesTarget signatures are telltale indicators or cluesthat aid in detecting potential targets.

Most weapons and vehicles have identifiable sig-natures. These signatures may be the result of thedesign or the environment in which the equipmentis operating. For example, firing a vehicle’s mainweapon system could produce blast, flash, noise,smoke, and dust. The movement of a vehiclethrough a built-up area causes more noise than themovement of the same vehicle in an open field.Different types of aircraft have different signa-tures (for example, the signature of a hoveringhelicopter is not the same as that of a fixed-wingaircraft). Factors that affect target signatures arevisibility, temperature, and weather conditions.

Look for targets in areas where they are mostlikely to be employed. Tracked vehicle signaturesare most likely to be detected in open areas androlling terrain. Threat antitank positions are nor-mally sited to visually cover primary avenues ofapproach where tanks and armored personnel car-riers (APCs) travel. Look for helicopters behindwood lines, ridge lines, and significant folds in theterrain. Crews must be familiar with these as wellas other possibilities. Sight, hearing, and smell canall assist in detecting signatures that will lead totarget location and identification.

(1) Infantry Signatures

Fighting holes.Broken vegetation.Footprints.Signs of new or old fires.Noise.Trash.

(2) Tracked Vehicle Signatures

Vehicle tracks on the ground.Engine noise.Exhaust smoke.Dust clouds from movement.Weapon firing and/or smoke from weapon.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 2-5

Bright white flash at night.Prominent heat source.

(3) Antitank Weapons Signatures

Missile launch “swish” sound.Long, thin wires from fired ATGMs.Sharp crack of the ATGM being fired.Destroyed armored vehicle.

(4) Artillery Signatures

Loud, dull sound.Grayish-white smoke cloud.Bright orange flash and black smoke fromairburst.Rushing noise several seconds before im-pact.Same thermal infrared signatures for self-propelled artillery as tracked vehicles.Varied towed artillery signatures accordingto the towing vehicle.

(5) Aircraft Signatures

Glare of sun reflecting off aircraft canopies,wings, fuselages of fixed wing aircraft, andwindows and rotor blades of helicopters.Aircraft noise.Dust and movement of foliage from hoveringhelicopters.

(6) Obstacles and Mine Signatures

Loose or disturbed dirt in a regular pattern.Destroyed or disabled vehicle that appears tohave struck a mine.

b. ChallengesSome targets are more difficult to detect than oth-ers. Increased crew training, experience, andgreater concentration are needed to detect and lo-cate these difficult targets. Some examples ofthese more difficult targets and challenges are—

Peripheral targets.

Targets that are camouflaged or in shadows.Targets that can be heard but not seen.Targets positioned under less than ideal indi-rect fire illumination. If the illumination is infront of the target, the resulting shadow willappear darker than the target. If the illumina-tion is behind the target (and not in such aposition as to “wash out” the crew’s optics),the target should stand out distinctly fromthe background. Always keep one eye closedduring search by illumination, and never lookdirectly into the illumination source. This willhelp maintain night vision.Small, single targets such as a lone, dis-mounted ATGM or rocket-propelled gre-nade (RPG).Natural obstacles (weather and terrain).Weather can cause a wide variety of de-graded effects to both the observer andelectro-optic systems. Terrain can mask ob-servation and therefore detection.Manmade obstacles (smoke and battlefieldclutter) can also degrade the observer’s abil-ity to detect targets.Behavioral or physical deficiencies (fatigue,eye reaction to gun flashes, night blindness)of the observer also affect ability to detect.Targets viewed at night in front of fires(from burning vehicles, battlefield clutter)may be washed out by the brighter back-ground light.

c. Limitations of Passive SightWinters are generally characterized by more hoursof darkness. The enemy may make the most ofthis condition by moving forces in the dark. Theenemy may also dig in or continue the attack atnight. To acquire targets at night, the crew mustbe proficient in the use of both the thermal sightand the backup passive sight. Since viewingthrough passive sights at night will reduce nightvision, the gunner and vehicle commander shouldalternate turns on the sight every 10 to 15 min-utes. Changing over every 10 to 15 minutes mini-mizes loss to both and minimizes eye fatigue. Thepassive sight may be used in conjunction with thethermal sight when conducting ground searchtechniques. The user of the passive sight must

2-6 MCWP 3-14.1

remember that frequent adjustment of the imagefocusing ring will be required as viewing rangesincrease or decrease. Reticle illumination shouldbe adjusted to the lowest setting to allow theviewer to see clearly under all light conditions.

d. Use of the Thermal SightDuring the hours of darkness, the enemy can beexpected to move their forces, dig in, defend, orattack. During the day, the enemy can be ex-pected to cover movement by every means possi-ble, including camouflage and obscuration. Somecamouflaged targets are difficult to acquire withstandard day optics but can be easily detectedwith the thermal sight. For example, a vehicle in awood line may be seen as an irregular shape com-pared to the surrounding vegetation. A vehicle lo-cated behind a building with its engine runningmay give off a heat plume from the exhaust thatcan be detected through the thermal sight. The ve-hicle commander and gunner must be able to usethe thermal sight to acquire targets during goodand limited visibility. The DIM-36TH sight, in the thermal mode, oper-ates on the principle of sensing heat radiation ortemperature differences against the background.This temperature difference is displayed as anelectronic image. Any source of heat that varieswith its surroundings can be detected by the ther-mal sight. Acquiring and engaging targets withthermal sights during periods of reduced visibilityhelps ensure surprise in the initial rounds of theengagement, enabling the LAV-25s to use theirweapons and deny the enemy obvious targets ofmounted light sources. There are five primaryheat sources that are detected by the thermalsight.

(1) Solar Heat. Objects absorb heat from thesun at different rates depending on the material.The amount of heat absorbed by an object and thelength of time the object can retain and reflect theheat determines how long the reflected heat canbe seen using the thermal sight. Target signaturesvary if heated only by solar heat. As the sunbegins to set and objects cool, the objects’ formmay change.

(2) Fuel Combustion. The operation of a vehi-cle engine creates heat. Vehicles have a plume ofheat from the exhaust and other cues around theengine compartment. The location of the engineand the direction of the vented hot exhaust differsbetween vehicle types. As a result, many vehiclescreate one or more images when viewed througha thermal sight. Also, the signature produced by avehicle may vary with the duration of use.

(3) Friction. Moving parts of a vehicle causefriction that also is picked up as a heat source onthermal sights. These areas then appear as imagesin the sight: tracks, roadwheels, drive sprockets,wheel hubs, and support rollers are examples. Ve-hicles being driven through mud or snow arecooler and do not create as sharp an image. Vehi-cle tracks will leave an image for a short timefrom the friction of the vehicle driving over thesurface. Vehicle track-shrouding materials canhelp hide thermal cues of road wheels and trackshoes. The longer a vehicle has operated—gener-ating friction—the more intense the heated areasbecome. A vehicle looks much different after a12-kilometer road march than it does at rest in adefensive position.

(4) Thermal Reflections. Glossy, smooth sur-faces, such as the windshield of a vehicle, can re-flect radiated heat.

(5) Body Heat. Body heat is also detected bythe thermal sight, and the signature is affected bythe activity the body has undergone. The greaterthe activity, the greater the thermal signature.

Thermal imaging systems provide a definite ad-vantage over passive sight-equipped systems dur-ing night operations. At the time of publication,few threat vehicles have thermal imagery; theircommon night systems are active infrared sightingsystems. Night operations can be used to advan-tage since LAV-25 crews can maneuver and en-gage targets using their thermal sighting system.Conditions encountered during some daytime op-erations, such as periods of intense sunlight, fog,camouflage, or dust, may also be better accom-plished through use of thermal imagery.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 2-7

The capabilities of the DIM-36TH sight allow formanipulation of the electronic image for optimalviewing. Skilled manipulation of the POLARITY,RETICLE BRIGHTNESS, BRIGHTNESS, andCONTRAST controls can provide a clearer andmore distinct picture of target signatures. For ex-ample, a simple switch of image polarity may pro-vide the difference in clarity to make targetidentification possible, i.e., the difference betweenan APC or a tank. Crews should exper- iment tofind which polarity is personally better.

2003. Location

Target location is the establishment or determina-tion of where a potential target is physically lo-cated on the battlefield. Locating a target resultsfrom observation and detection during crewsearch.

A vehicle commander who locates a target maylay the gun and issue a fire command, which fixesthe location of the target for the gunner. This isthe default method for providing direction for thegunner. The vehicle commander may also an-nounce MY TURRET if necessary.

Once a target is located by a crew member orscout in the rear of the vehicle, the target’s loca-tion is communicated to all other personnel. Tar-get location methods used to announce a locatedtarget depend on the locator’s specific position inthe crew, unit standing operating procedures(SOP), and time available. The five most commontarget location methods are described below.

a. Clock MethodThe clock method is commonly used to get thevehicle commander or gunner’s eyes on target.Twelve o’clock is based on the direction of vehi-cle movement while traveling or hull orientation(front of vehicle) when stationary. Drivers andscouts usually use the clock method to locate tar-gets for the vehicle commander or gunner. (Ex-ample: BMP, NINE O’CLOCK.)b. Sector Method

The sector method is similar to the clock method;it is quick and easy to use. It is based on the di-rection of movement (if moving) or hull orienta-tion (if stationary) using the terms: center, left,right, and rear. Center sector is always to the di-rect front of the vehicle. (Example: THREEBMPs, LEFT REAR.)

c. Traverse MethodThe traverse method is also a relatively quickmethod, primarily used by the vehicle commanderto get the gunner on target. It is used when eitherthe vehicle commander’s handstation to traversethe turret is inoperable or it is more expedientthan actually traversing the gun to guide the gun-ner on the target. In this method, the vehicle com-mander issues directions to the gunner until thegunner is on the target. (Example: TRAVERSELEFT [OR RIGHT], STEADY, ON.)

d. Reference Point MethodThe reference point method is normally used inconjunction with the vehicle’s optics. The vehiclecommander uses binoculars to determine the milvalue and direction from a designated terrain fea-ture or known position used as a reference point.The vehicle commander then announces the milvalue and direction from the reference point to thegunner.

The gunner uses the mil reticle relationship fromthe reference point to traverse onto the target.The key to this location method is both the vehi-cle commander’s and gunner’s knowledge of themil sight relationship and the establishment of tar-get reference points (TRPs). (Example: ATGM,TRP ONE FOUR, RIGHT FIVE MILS.)

The quick reference point method is used byall personnel to hand over targets locatednear a TRP. (Example: TWO PCs, TRP ONEFOUR.)The precise reference point method is usedto locate targets accurately in relationship toa known reference point. (Example: TWOPCs, TRP ONE FOUR, LEFT TWO FIVEMILS.)

2-8 MCWP 3-14.1

e. Grid MethodThe grid method is the least desired technique be-cause of the length of time it takes to bring thegunner on target. The vehicle commander re-ceives the location of the target by map grid (usu-ally from an observation post). The vehiclecommander then uses the vehicle’s map to orientthe turret on target for the gunner.

2004. Identification

Target identification is the determination of af-filiation of the potential military target (friendly,hostile, neutral, noncombatant) and the recogni-tion of its particular type (such as a specific typeof vehicle).

At a minimum, this identification must determinethe target as friendly (one not to be engaged) orhostile (one which may be engaged). Crews mustknow what to shoot and what not to shoot. Cur-rently, the crew’s only method of positive vehicleidentification is through visual or electro-optical(E-O) means. As engagement ranges increase,camouflage techniques become more effective,battlefield obscuration increases, and visual identi-fication greatly decreases. Crews that can quicklyand accurately identify targets have the advantageof engaging first and destroying the enemy at theweapon system’s maximum engagement range.Crew sustainment training and evaluation on tar-get identification is a prerequisite and requirescontinuous training.

Target identification training is an essential part ofany weapon system proficiency training program.Vehicle commanders must continually train theircrews in target identification. See the unit S-2 of-ficer for more information on how to train foridentifying specific or additional vehicles, aircraft,and equipment likely to appear on the battlefield.Graphic training aids (GTAs) are available fortraining crews to identify specific vehicle types.Field Manual (FM) 1-402, Aviator’s RecognitionGuide, and aircraft recognition cards are helpfultools to train crews on aircraft identification.

Recognition is closely related to target ID. Nor-mally, the gunner will do this automatically oncehe recognizes a potential target. He can interpret

the cues that he is seeing. Thermal cues tell thegunner if a thermal hotspot is an APC, tank, orother type of vehicle assuming that the hottestspot is the engine or exhaust system.

Situational awareness is key. Through the use ofpassive or active means, the crew interrogates thesuspect threat target. Passive means includepainted chevrons, air panels, and thermal mark-ings or chemlites. Active measures include theBattlefield Combat ID System and radiocommunications.

2005. Classification

Target classification categorizes potential targetsby the level of danger that they represent. Classifi-cation also includes passing of information gainedduring the observation, detection, location, andclassification steps to the vehicle commander inthe form of a crew acquisition report.

To defeat multiple targets on the battlefield, thefirst engaged should be the most dangerous. Thisrequires a quick decision on which target is themost dangerous threat. All crew members mustknow the designated engagement priorities oftheir unit and be able to prioritize targets; how-ever, the vehicle commander is responsible forclassifying targets and deciding which to shootand when to shoot. Sometimes this determinationmay be made based on which target is closer tothe LAV-25. Methods for determining range totargets are covered in detail in appendix B. Thevehicle commander is responsible for decidingwhich method of engagement will be used basedon the target’s classification. This decision mustbe made rapidly so that all targets can be engagedefficiently and in an organized manner. Targetsare classified by the level of danger they repre-sent.

a. Classification Criteria

(1) Most Dangerous. When the crew observesa threat target with armor-defeating capabilitiesthat appears to be preparing to engage them, thetarget is classified as “most dangerous.” This typeof target is the greatest threat and must be

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 2-9

engaged immediately. When faced with multiplemost dangerous targets, the vehicle commandermust further classify the targets based on which ofthe most dangerous targets are the greatest imme-diate threat. Generally, if two or more targets areof equal threat, engage the closest one first. Whenengaging more than two most dangerous targetsfrom a stationary (hulldown) position, the crewshould plan to use an alternate firing posi- tion.

Smoke (indirect fire) may also be used to keep theenemy from observing the vehicle. Minimizing thenumber of rounds fired from any one position(primary, alternate) aids in confusing the enemy asto the LAV-25’s exact location and aids in avoid-ing detection caused by a firing signature. Gener-ally, the most dangerous targets pose thefollowing threats:

Tanks at ranges up to 2,000 meters are thegreatest threat to LAV-25s. Within thatrange, the tank has a greater kill probability.At ranges greater than 2,000 meters, aBRDM, BMP, or helicopter firing ATGM isthe most dangerous threat.Helicopters, tanks, and BMPs, within theireffective ranges, have greater kill probabilityagainst the LAV-25 than hand-held high ex-plosive antitank (HEAT) weapons (for ex-ample, RPGs) within their effective ranges.Stationary vehicles deliver fire more accu-rately (and are therefore more dangerous)than moving vehicles.

(2) Dangerous. When the crew sees a targetwith armor-defeating capabilities, but the target isnot preparing to engage them, the target can beclassified as “dangerous.” This type of targetshould be engaged after all “most dangerous” tar-gets have been destroyed, unless otherwise speci-fied by the priority of engagement. Multipledangerous targets are engaged in the same manneras most dangerous targets. Engage the targetwhich presents the greatest threat first. If the tar-gets are of equal threat, engage the closest onefirst.(3) Least Dangerous. A target that does nothave an armor-defeating weapon system is

classified as a “least dangerous” target. Engagethis type of target after all most dangerous anddangerous targets have been destroyed, unless ithas a higher priority of engagement.

b. Engagement PrioritiesUnit operations orders or standard operating pro-cedures (SOPs) will designate certain types of tar-gets as priority targets for destruction,irrespective of their antiarmor threat to the LAV.Engagement priorities can be established by—

Classifying special targets based on their im-pact on the total force. (Examples of thesespecial targets are command and control ve-hicles, engineer vehicles, reconnaissance ve-hicles, and artillery). Destroying these tar-gets breaks up the combined arms capabilityof the threat forces.Establishing a specific type of target priorityamong specific friendly vehicles. (Example:Friendly LAV-25s might classify threatBMPs and other infantry carriers as mostdangerous.)Establishing a specific type of target priorityamong specific elements in the unit. (Exam-ple: One platoon might prioritize enemyBMPs while another prioritizes ZSU-23-4s.)

c. Crew Acquisition ReportTargets detected by a crew member through thetarget acquisition process are reported to the ve-hicle commander immediately by way of a crewacquisition report. This target handover techniquepasses vital information about the target to the ve-hicle commander to then act on. The informationin the report is passed before the classificationstep of the target acquisition process concludes.An acquisition report consists of three elements. (1) Alert. An optional element, the alert tells thevehicle commander that the observer has sighted atarget and additional information about it will fol-low. The acquisition report is normally given in-ternally between Marines who can usually identifyeach other by voice recognition. Therefore, the

2-10 MCWP 3-14.1

alert may be omitted, and the description elementof the report then serves as the alert element also.

(2) Description. A short, concise description ofthe target is given. (Example: TWO BMPS.)

(3) Location. The location of the target ispassed using the methods provided in paragraph2003, page 2-8. (Example: 9 O’CLOCK.)

The vehicle commander can now move to observethe target as described in the report and takeaction.

2006. Confirmation

Confirmation of the target is the last step in thetarget acquisition process before actual engage-ment. Target confirmation is the rapid verificationof the initial identification and classification of thetarget as a hostile to be engaged. It is the lastverification that the target is indeed an enemy andis completed during the conduct of fire. Confirma-tion takes place after the vehicle commander hasissued all elements of the fire command except theexecution element, and as the gunner is complet-ing his precise lay on the target. Gunners also gothrough a confirmation step. While making the fi-nal precise lay, the gunner also assures that thetarget is hostile.

The vehicle commander (examining the targetthrough the DIM-36TH sight commander’s relayor the M36 sight, if necessary) evaluates the na-ture of the target based on the target’s appearanceand personal knowledge of the tactical situation.Situational awareness is key to avoiding fratricide.The vehicle commander who confirms that thetarget is hostile continues the engagement. Thevehicle commander who determines that the tar-get is friendly or neutral commands CEASE FIRE.If the nature of the target cannot be identified, thecommander continues to observe until positiveidentification is made.If the gunner also identifies the target as hostile,the gunner completes the final lay and engages thetarget on order. If the gunner identifies the target

as friendly or neutral, CONFIRMED FRIENDLYor CONFIRMED NEUTRAL is announced to thevehicle commander. If the gunner cannot posi-tively determine the nature of the target, the gun-ner announces CONFIRMATION DOUBTFUL.The vehicle commander then decides whether tocontinue or terminate the en- gagement.

It is vital that the vehicle commander maintainsituational awareness to assist in target identifica-tion. To do this, the vehicle commander mustkeep updated and informed on the tactical situa-tion (e.g., friendly element movements within orbetween battle positions, the forward passage oflines, status of the withdrawal of any coveringforce, or the movement of civilian vehicle trafficin the area).

The vehicle commander must take an active rolein maintaining situational awareness. The vehiclecommander must always be aware of his positionon the battlefield and monitor radio traffic to gaininformation on the movement/location of friendlyforces. Understanding the mission (task and in-tent) and the scheme of maneuver will aid the ve-hicle commander in making sense of the apparentchaos associated with high tempo operations.

2007. Engagement

Once the target has been acquired through thepreceding six steps and the vehicle commanderdecides to fire on it, engagement begins. Engage-ment is the directing and firing of vehicle weaponsonto the correct target to achieve the effect de-sired. LAV-25 crews must be proficient in notonly the techniques and procedures of target ac-quisition but also conduct of fire procedures tosuccessfully engage the enemy in combat. Oncecommitted to engagement, the vehicle commanderhas other decisions to make and pass on to thecrew in the form of fire commands. These sub-jects are covered in detail in chapter 3.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 2-11

(reverse blank)

This chapter covers two linked subjects: fire com-mands and engagement techniques. Fire com-mands are explained in detail to includeterminology, definitions, and various formats fortypes of fire commands that might be issued. En-gagement techniques provide a detailed descrip-tion of how each weapon system is used todestroy or suppress enemy targets. The goal ofthe LAV-25’s crew is to engage and destroy orsuppress various targets as quickly as possible.Also discussed are various additional uses for theemployment of weapons found on the LAV-25and kill indicators which allow the firer or ob-server to gauge the effectiveness of fires.

A fire command is a specific sequence of informa-tion given by a command authority (vehicle com-mander) that causes a crew to begin performing asequence of actions and provides detailed direc-tion to choose the ammunition type, aim theweapon, and engage the target. Each elementgiven by the commander requires a response froma crew member to ensure correct aiming and en-gagement. After the initial fire command, subse-quent fire commands using the same sequence ofinformation can be used to adjust the point ofimpact to ensure the desired target effect. (MCRP5-2A, Operational Terms and Graphics) Firecommands coordinate the crew’s efforts and re-duce confusion.

3001. Elements of a FireCommand

All fire commands are a derivative of the basicsix-element fire command described in FMFM6-5, Marine Rifle Squad. Fire commands normallyinclude only those elements needed to instruct thecrew to choose the correct ammunition, aim, and

fire the weapons. A fire command may contain asmany as six elements or as few as two. The sixelements of a LAV-25 fire command are alert,weapon/ammunition, description, direction, range,and execution.

a. AlertThe first element of a fire command alerts thecrew to an immediate engagement.

b. Weapon/AmmunitionThe second element of a fire command informsthe crew of the weapon and/or ammunition to beused.

c. DescriptionThe third element of a fire command identifies thetarget for the crew. If there are several similar tar-gets, the vehicle commander tells the crew whichtarget to engage first.

d. DirectionThe fourth element of a fire command is givenwhen the vehicle commander cannot lay theweapon for direction or elevation.

e. RangeThe fifth element of a fire command is used if thevehicle commander chooses the precision gunnerymethod. The gunner chokes the target in the sightreticle and announces the range to the target.

f. ExecutionOnce the crew responds to the first five elementsof the fire command, the vehicle commander givesthe execution element. Before the execution

Chapter 3

Fire Commands and Engagement Techniques

element, the vehicle commander reconfirms thetarget as hostile.

g. Omitted/Abbreviated Elements of aFire CommandAs a result of the speed at which the crew mayhave to engage targets in a battlefield environ-ment, the vehicle commander may decide to omitone or more elements of the fire command. Inthis instance, the vehicle commander must ensurethat the crew understands the command. Everyfire command must contain the description andexecution commands. All other elements are in-cluded as required to ensure acquisition of thetarget.3002. Fire Command Terms

Listed below are common terms used during allfire commands.

a. Alert Element TermsVarious terms are used in the alert to identify whowithin the crew is to conduct the engagement. Fornormal conditions, the term GUNNER is used.When firing the commander’s M240G machinegun, the vehicle commander announces the alertelement only. TWO FORTY alerts the crew thatthe vehicle commander will engage a target withhis weapon. The gunner must then be ready tohelp the vehicle commander observe the effects ofhis firing.

b. Weapon/Ammunition Element Terms

The following terms are used for selection ofweapon/ammunition:c. Description Element TermsMost targets can be described using the following

terms:

(1) Combination targets, such as a truck-mounted ATGM, can be identified by combining

terms, as in this case, ANTITANK TRUCK.

3-2 MCWP 3-14.1

TYPE OF TARGET ANNOUNCED ASInfantry fighting vehicle orarmored personnel carrier

PC*

Unarmored vehicle TRUCK

Helicopter CHOPPER

Fixed-wing aircraft PLANE

Personnel TROOPS

Antitank gun or missile ortowed artillery piece

ANTITANK

Any other target* Briefest termpossible

* The term PC may be used for most lightly armoredtargets, for example: self-propelled artillery, self-propelled antiaircraft systems, command and controlvehicles, and self-propelled ATGMs. More descrip-tive terms for these targets might be used by the crewto clarify the level of threat each represents, althoughthe briefest term possible should be used.

WEAPON/AMMUNITION ANNOUNCED AS

25mm HEI-T HE

25mm APDS-T, APFSD-T,TPDS-T

SABOT (pro-nounced SAY-BO)

25mm TP-T HE or SABOT (An-nounce the type ofammunition thatTP-T is simulating.)

M240 coax 7.62mm COAX

Pintle-mounted 7.62mmM240E1

TWO FORTY

ELEMENT REMARKS

Alert Optional

Weapon/Ammunition Optional

Description Required

Direction Optional

Range Optional

Execution Required

Example: TROOPS, FIRE

(2) The gunner announces IDENTIFIED oncethe target is identified.

(3) If there are multiple targets, the vehicle com-mander identifies the number of targets, for exam-ple: GUNNER, HE, THREE TRUCKS. Thecommander then designates which target to en-gage first (RIGHT TRUCK).

(4) If the target is moving, the vehicle com-mander may announce MOVING as part of the de-scription element.

d. Direction Element TermsThese terms are used to guide the gunner’s aiminto the target area.

(1) TRAVERSE. This method is used when oneor more targets are outside the gunner’s field ofview. The vehicle commander commands TRAV-ERSE RIGHT ( OR LEFT). The gunner traversesthe turret rapidly in the direction announced. Asthe weapon’s aim nears the target, the vehiclecommander commands STEADY, and the gunnerslows traversing. When the weapon is laid on thetarget, the vehicle commander announces ON, andthe gunner stops traversing. At this time, the tar-get should be in the gunner’s field of view. If thetarget is not in the field of view, the gunnersearches the target area until the target is identi-fied or the vehicle commander issues a subsequentdirection correction.

(2) SHIFT. This term is used when two or moretargets are visible at the same time to the gunnerthrough the sight. The vehicle commander com-mands SHIFT LEFT (OR RIGHT), PC. The gunnerimmediately shifts to the next target as com-manded and engages.

(3) Reference Point and Deflection. The ref-erence point must be one that the gunner can eas-ily recognize. The vehicle commander usesbinoculars to measure the deflection from the ref-erence point to the target and announces the nec-essary shift. For example, the command might beREFERENCE POINT, BRIDGE, RIGHT THREEZERO. The gunner lays the reticle of the sight on

the reference point, estimates 30 mils, traversesright 30 mils, and tries to identify the target.

e. Execution Element TermsThere are four terms used to execute the firecommand.

(1) FIRE. The command FIRE tells the gunnerto fire the gun immediately. It is assumed that thegunner will fire and adjust on his own, since thevehicle commander may or may not issue a subse-quent fire command.

(2) FIRE AND ADJUST. The command FIREAND ADJUST tells the gunner to fire immediately;the gunner will not receive a subsequent fire com-mand and must complete the engage- ment.

(3) AT MY COMMAND. The vehicle commanderwho wishes to delay firing commands AT MYCOMMAND, then commands FIRE when ready toengage.

(4) FROM MY POSITION. Normally, the gunnerengages all main gun targets. If the gunner is un-able to identify the desired target, the vehiclecommander engages the target by announcingFROM MY POSITION. The vehicle commanderinsures that the gunner has the correct sight pic-ture, makes a final lay, announces ON THE WAY,and fires. If the gunner announces IDENTIFIED,the vehicle commander can return control to thegunner or complete the engagement.

f. Common TermsAdditional common terms used in fire commandsare as follows:

(1) IDENTIFIED. The gunner uses this term toinform the vehicle commander that the target iswithin the field of view of the sight.

(2) CANNOT IDENTIFY. This term informs thevehicle commander that the gunner cannot findthe target. The vehicle commander must either re-lay the weapon or engage the target from hisstation.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 3-3

(3) ON THE WAY. This term informs all crewmembers that a weapon is being fired, alertingthem to observe the impact of the round.

(4) CEASE FIRE. This term terminates the en-gagement.

(5) TWO FORTY COMPLETE. This term termi-nates the commander’s weapon engagement.

g. Repeat TermsA crew member who fails to hear or understand apart of the fire command announces the element inquestion. For example, the gunner announcesAMMO. The vehicle commander repeats only thatelement.

h. Correction TermsTo correct an error in a fire command, the vehiclecommander commands CORRECTION and cor-rects the element in error and repeats all elementsfollowing the corrected element. (Example: GUN-NER, HE, TRUCK, ONE SIX HUNDRED. COR-RECTION, ONE EIGHT HUNDRED, FIRE.)

3003. Crew Duties in Responseto the Fire CommandIn response to each element of a fire command,the vehicle commander, the gunner, and the driverhave specific crew duties to perform. Crew dutiescommon to the LAV-25 are shown in Table 3-1.Even though commands for the driver are not

3-4 MCWP 3-14.1

FIRE COMMAND COMMANDER GUNNER DRIVERAlert: GUNNER

Weapon/Ammunition: HE

Description: TRUCK

Direction: RIGHT FRONT

Range: 1,000 METERS

Execution: FIRE

Lays weapon for direction.

Announces the appropriateweapon or ammunition.

Informs the gunner of thetype of target.

If needed, talks gunnerinto target area.

If needed, announcesrange to target.

Assumes position to senserounds and prepares togive subsequent firecommand.

Starts searching for tar-get as commander trav-erses turret.

Selects appropriateweapon or ammunition.Arms system.

Observes through thesight and tries to identifythe target. On seeingtarget says IDENTIFIED.

If issued, traverses theturret in search of target.On seeing target, says IDENTIFIED.

Determines range to thetarget using stadia rang-ing lines.

Uses correct sight pic-ture, announces ON THEWAY, and engages thetarget.

If moving and stabi-lized, continues mov-ing, attempts to orienthull toward target andgives the gunner asstable a platform aspossible.If moving and not sta-bilized, looks for hulldown position, orientshull toward target,stops on commandand attempts to senserounds. Also helpsidentify target ifstationary.

Table 3-1. Crew Duties in Response to Each Element of a Fire Command.

essential elements of the fire command, thedriver’s actions are very important during anengagement.

a. If an engagement is fired from a short halt,the vehicle commander commands DRIVER,STOP before giving the execution command.When the engagement is completed, the vehiclecommander commands DRIVER, MOVE OUT.Following the completed engagement, the vehiclecommander receives a crew report.

b. Once the vehicle commander has given con-trol of the turret to the gunner, the vehicle com-mander’s primary focus must be on observationover the engagement sector. The gunner shouldtake over the engagement and continue the en-gagement until the target is destroyed, sup-pressed, or the command CEASE FIRE is given.The vehicle commander assists only as necessary,giving subsequent commands to adjust onto orshift targets, organizing other targets, and plan-ning the vehicle’s next activity.

c. Whenever hull down positions are availableor are a tactical necessity, the vehicle commandercommands DRIVER, SEEK HULL DOWN and ini-tiates the fire command. The vehicle commandermust then direct the driver into the hull down po-sition while ensuring main gun clearance. Oncethe vehicle is in position and the gunner has identi-fied the target, the vehicle commander issues theexecution command to the gunner.

d. When the LAV-25 is in a turret-down, defen-sive position, the vehicle commander initiates the

fire command and commands DRIVER, UP/STOP.Upon destruction of the target, the vehicle com-mander terminates the engagement and movesback to the turret-down position by commandingCEASE FIRE, DRIVER, BACK/STOP. Considera-tion should be given to moving to an alternateposition.

e. If firing on the move, the driver attempts toprovide as stable a firing platform as possible.When the situation and terrain permit, the vehi-cle’s front slope should be oriented toward thetarget.

3004. Choice of Method ofEngagement

During target acquisition, the vehicle commandermust decide how to engage the target. There aretwo methods of engagement used, depending onthe situation—precision and battlesight. The char-acteristics and advantages of each are distinct.Precision engagements are characterized by ahighly accurate sensing burst followed by killingbursts. A battlesight engagement is characterizedby swift killing bursts fired in rapid succession. Asa general rule, if the commander decides that thetarget is classified as a most dangerous target andis within the required ammunition’s specified bat-tlesight range band, then battlesight gunnery isused. In all other situations where targets of lesserclassifications are involved, precision gunnery ishighly recommended. (See fig. 3-1.)

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 3-5

TARGET CLASSIFICATION

DANGEROUS

MOST DANGEROUS

LEAST DANGEROUS GUNNERY PRECISION

BATTLESIGHT GUNNERY INSIDE BATTLESIGHT

RANGE

OUTSIDE BATTLESIGHTRANGE

Figure 3-1. Determination of Method of Engagement.

a. Precision GunneryPrecision gunnery is the method of engagement inwhich a deliberate range to target is estimated andapplied, then corrections made to further engagethe target. Precision gunnery is recommended inall engagements with the exception of an engage-ment where the target is either classified a mostdangerous target or is outside battlesight range forthe required ammunition. When the target is clas-sified dangerous or least dangerous, or when thecrew has the advantage of surprise, precision gun-nery is recommended. The only exception to thisrule is when the crew is in a position where an ex-tended, reduced, or ballistic battlesight has beenestablished. In this case, the crew will mathemati-cally determine the aiming point based on targetappearance probability. These types of engage-ments are accurate enough to preclude the use ofprecision gunnery techniques. The advantage thatprecision gunnery has over battlesight gunnery isaccuracy. Time to engage is slower, but once theengagement has started, time to kill is as rapid andgenerally, less ammunition is used per engage-ment. Targets outside of battlesight ranges are de-stroyed more quickly and efficiently usingprecision gunnery. Precision gunnery can be usedfrom the halt or from the stabilized weapons plat-form. The best results come from precision gun-nery used on a halted LAV-25, which provides astable firing platform. However, stabilized preci-sion gunnery can still be used on the move, but itis more reliant on the efficiency of the crew.

The LAV ballistic sight reticle is designed so thatranging and aiming at targets are accomplished si-multaneously. The advantage to this system is thatthe gunner is not tasked to determine or indexrange prior to aiming at the target. Additionally,the vehicle commander is not required or encour-aged to give a range estimation in the fire com-mand, because the gunner can usually estimaterange with the sight faster and with far more accu-racy. This reduces the engagement time and, whenused properly, increases the probability of firstround impact on target. This is the ultimate goalof precision gunnery. Precision gunnery is basedon the following principle: The gunner properly

ranges the target using the sight reticle stadialines, fires a three-round burst and immediatelyadjusts the sight picture (using the burst on target[BOT] method, paragraph 3011), and then fires asubsequent three-round killing burst. The subse-quent bursts are repeated as necessary to destroythe target, but with proper sensing, the initial kill-ing burst should be sufficient to destroy or neu-tralize the target. The rate of fire for this type ofengagement is 200 rounds per minute. The goal ofprecision gunnery is to kill the target without ex-pending more than six rounds.

When the gunner engages multiple targets withinthe same range band (i.e., vehicles in column), it isnot necessary to re-range subsequent targets withthe ballistic sight reticle. For example, engagingtwo BMPs at 1,500 meters, the gunner wouldrange and fire at the first target, apply a subse-quent killing burst, and shift to the second target.The gunner would aim at this second target usingthe same reticle reference point (i.e., range), andapply a killing burst. The first burst on the secondtarget should hit it if the same point of aim thatdestroyed the first target was used on the secondtarget.

If a range or ammunition change is made betweentargets during a multiple target engagement, thegunner must re-range. It is also possible to have amultiple engagement that requires the use of bothprecision and battlesight engagement techniques.The gunner is directed on which method of en-gagement to use by the vehicle commander’s firecommand.

A precision fire command is used to execute theprecision gunnery method; that is, the gunner de-termines the range to the target and may announceit, if required, before engaging. The gunner mayalso receive the range from the vehicle com-mander if the vehicle commander is confident thatthe estimated range is accurate. This passing ofrange is optional. The following shows who com-pletes each element of a fire command for preci-sion gunnery under most circumstances:

3-6 MCWP 3-14.1

If issued a fire command composed of the aboveelements, the gunner is directed to use the preci-sion gunnery technique and continue firing untileither the command CEASE FIRE is given or thetarget is destroyed.

b. Battlesight GunneryBattlesight gunnery is the rapid engagement oftargets based on range estimations within certainunderstood battlesight range bands. Battlesightgunnery is the quickest method of engagement.Battlesight gunnery is used when the vehicle com-mander determines that the target is most danger-ous by classification and is within the appropriateammunition’s battlesight range band. This methodof engagement is based on the ballistic propertiesof the fired ammunition and its projected flightpath. The principle of battlesight gunnery is that

the selected ammunition will travel an establisheddistance without rising above the height of the tar-get. This principle allows the gunner to use aspecified aim point corresponding to the requiredbattlesight range band and to immediately fire andadjust 3-round bursts in rapid succession. Any tar-get within the range band will receive impactsfrom these bursts. A battlesight range band is de-fined as an area where the height of the round willnot pass above the height of the target throughoutits trajectory. (See fig. 3-2.)

Battlesight gunnery relies heavily on the vehiclecommander’s ability to quickly determine if thetarget is within the battlesight range band. Targetsengaged within the range band are rapidly en-gaged and destroyed, while targets outside of therange band are inefficiently engaged. Battle- sightgunnery expends more ammunition than precisiongunnery and is less accurate, but it is a superiormethod for engaging targets within the battlesightrange bands when time is the most critical factor.

In a battlesight fire command, the weapon/am-munition element is always announced as BAT-TLESIGHT, and the range element is always omit-ted. The term battlesight tells the gunner that thetarget is within battlesight range, and if an ammu-nition change is required due to type of target, thevehicle commander announces the ammunition aswell.

Because of the number of rounds fired in a burst,changing ammunition from what is preselected is

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 3-7

Figure 3-2. Battlesight Range Band.

ELEMENT COMMANDER GUNNER

Alert GUNNER

Weapon/Ammunition

HE

Description TRUCK

IDENTIFIED

Direction

Range 100 METERS(optional)

Execution FIRE

ON THE WAY

not a problem. Observations and adjustments arestill made from the final rounds, not the firstround.

There are three types of battlesight gunnery avail-able to use in various situations: Ballistic battle-sight and the two variations of modifiedbattlesight, which are extended battlesight and re-duced battlesight. It is important to understandtheir origin. Battlesight data is derived from FT25-A-2, Firing Tables for Cannon, M242. The in-formation within the firing table assumes that lineof sight is parallel with the point of aim and thatthe projectile travels over even ground. Obvi-ously, this is not always the case. The height ofthe weapons platform, elevation of the target, andcontour and elevation of the ground between thefiring vehicle and the target are never constant.With this in mind, the vehicle commander must re-alize that all of the above aspects will affect battle-sight gunnery range bands. Ideally, the vehicle isin defilade, or the point of aim is parallel with theline of sight. Any height disparity between firingvehicle and target will nullify the advantage of

battlesight gunnery. The line of sight must be par-allel to the ground to achieve the maximum ad-vantages of battlesight gunnery. Maximumordinate and angle of fall are the primary data util-ized to determine the following range bands.Knowledge of the firing table and its use are para-mount to understanding the derivation of theserange bands and techniques.

(1) Ballistic Battlesight. With a properly ze-roed weapon, using the battlesight circle in thesight reticle as a sight reference when aiming willprovide specific range bands for each type ofammunition.

(a) HEI-T/TP-T. (See fig. 3-3). If the line of sightis the same height as the point of aim (i.e., parallelto the deck), the battlesight range band for HEI-Tis from 0 to 950 meters when firing at targets 2.2meters in height (i.e., BMP). This data is based onthe following information: Maximum ordinate forthe HEI-T/TP-T at the battlesight circle range(800 meters) is 1.0 meters above the line of sight.This occurs at 430 meters and is the highest pointof the round’s trajectory. Line of sight is parallelwith and 1.1 meters above the deck. Therefore,the round is 2.1 meters above the deck at its high-est point (maximum ordinate). The angle of fall at800 meters is 6 mils. This would require the roundto travel to just over 1,000 meters before fallingthe 1.1 meters from point of aim to the deck.However, because of decreased velocity and grav-ity, the angle of fall for a round at 1,000 meters is9 mils. To adjust the calculation, an average angleof fall is obtained for the distance between 800and 1,000 meters (6 mils + 9 mils/2 = 7.5 mils).The resulting 7.5 mils equal 7.5 meters at 1,000meters or .75 meters at 100 meters. Using this

3-8 MCWP 3-14.1

1.1m

1.0m 6 mils (

) 6 mils

0m 430m(MAX ORD)

800m

AVERAGE ANGLE OF FALL 7.5 mils BETWEEN 800m AND 1000m

approx 950m

LOS

Figure 3-3. HEI-T Ballistic Battlesight Range Band.

ELEMENT COMMANDER GUNNER

Alert GUNNER

Weapon/Ammunition

BATTLESIGHT(AP, if required)

Description PC

IDENTIFIED

Direction

Range

Execution FIRE

ON THE WAY

adjusted fall rate, the round will fall the 1.1 metersto the deck at approximately the 950 meter mark.At 430 meters, the round will impact high on thetarget. Impacts will lower progressively until 950meters where impacts will hit the ground short ofthe target.

(b) Armor Piercing, Discarding Sabot-Tracer(APDS-T). (See fig. 3-4). If the line of sight is thesame height as the point of aim (i.e., parallel tothe deck), and the aim point is center mass on thetarget, the battlesight range band for APDS-T isfrom 0 to 600 meters and from 825 to 1,600 me-ters. There is a dead space between approximately600 and 825 meters where the round will exceed2.2 meters above the deck. This is based on theheight of the line of sight, which is 1.1 meters,maximum ordinate of 1.6 meters above the line ofsight at 723 meters, and the angle of fall of 5 mils.The 600 meters is approximate since the firing ta-ble does not give an angle of rise with the excep-tion of superelevation. The 1,600 meters is basedon a 5 mil angle of fall, which requires the roundto travel just over 200 meters past the point ofaim to drop the 1.1 meters to the deck. At 1,600meters the angle of fall is 6 mils. Obtaining an av-erage angle of fall of 5.5 mils, using the same for-mula as HEI-T, the round will hit the deck at1,600 meters. At 850 meters impacts of bursts willbe high. They will lower progressively until theyhit the ground short of the target at 1,600 meters.

To eliminate the dead space for the APDS-T bal-listic battlesight, the maximum ordinate wouldhave to be reduced to 1.1 meters. Adding this to

the height of the line of sight places the round 2.2meters above the deck at maximum ordinate, thuseliminating the dead space occurring between 600and 850 meters. In the firing table, 1.1 meters ofmaximum ordinate is obtained using 1,200 meters.There is not a 1,200 meter aim line in the sightreticle, but the top of the battlesight circle can beused. Placing the battlesight circle at 6 o’clockwill artificially place the 1,200 meter aim point atcenter mass (see fig. 3-5). Assuming that line ofsight is 1.1 meters above the deck, the battlesightrange band is from 0 to 1,450 meters (see fig.3-6). This band is figured in the same manner asthe previous bands using the following data:Maximum ordinate of 1.1 meters at 617 meters.Angle of fall of 4 mils. (Requires 300 meters oftravel to deck.) Angle of fall at 1,500 meters is 5mils; average angle of fall from 1,200 to 1,500meters is 4.5 mils. The round will impact high onthe target at 617 meters. Impacts will lower pro-gressively until they hit the ground short of thetarget at 1,450 meters

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 3-9

1.1m

1.6m 5 m ils (

) 5 m ils

0m 723m(MAX ORD)

1400m

( AVERAGE ANGLE OF FALL ) 5.5 m ils BETW EEN 1400m AND 1600m

approx 1600mapprox 600m approx 850m

LO S

Figure 3-4. APDS-T Ballistic Battlesight Range Band.

Figure 3-5. APDS-T Battlesight6 O’Clock Aim.

Ballistic battlesight will provide the full rangebands only under ideal conditions. The vehiclecommanders must be aware of this and realize thatin most situations their range bands will be de-creased or altered depending on terrain and eleva-tion disparity between firing vehicle and target.

(2) Modified Battlesights. Tactical events maypresent situations that allow vehicle commandersto predict engagement ranges. Examples are prob-able engagements on reverse slopes, at extendedranges along likely avenues of approach, and dur-ing reduced visibility from varying sources thatwill reduce engagement ranges. In these situa-tions, the vehicle commander can modify battle-sight by extending or reducing to capitalize on thesituation and to guarantee accurate killing bursts.This is accomplished by accurately ranging theengagement area and modifying the point of aim.

(a) Extended Battlesight. Upon determining thepredicted engagement range precisely (by laserrange finder, map, etc.) the vehicle commander di-rects the gunner to use the aim point that corre-sponds to that engagement range.

Example: Firing vehicle is in defensive position,overwatching road with bend in the distance. Us-ing a map, the vehicle commander determines therange to the road bend to be 1,900 meters. Thevehicle commander tells the gunner to use the1,900-meter APDS-T range line in all battlesightengagements.

Depending on the range, there will be a progres-sively increasing amount of dead space from lineof bore and maximum ordinate. In most cases, thisis irrelevant because extended battlesight engage-ments are predetermined aim points for engage-ments, as opposed to range bands for quickengagements. If the vehicle commander desires tocreate a range band at an extended range, the fir-ing table is used and maximum ordinate, range tomaximum ordinate, and angle of fall are checkedfor the selected aim point to ensure that occurringdead space will not overlap with the desired rangeband.

Example: Using the 2,400-meter APDS-T aimline will give a battlesight range band from2,300-2,500 meters based on angle of fall of 11mils.

Note: At extended ranges the range bands aresignificantly reduced. The range bands for HEI-Twill be reduced more than the APDS-T because of reduced velocity and increased superelevation ofthe HEI-T round.

(b) Reduced Battlesight. Battlefield visibility orother conditions may allow the vehicle com-mander to predict an engagement range that issignificantly reduced. Because of the flat trajec-tory of rounds when fired at shorter ranges, re-duced range bands are significantly easier todetermine than other range bands. As with ballis-tic battlesight, during its flight path, the roundnever rises above the height of a vehicle. How-ever, to ensure that rounds impact as close to cen-ter mass as possible, the following applies: For

3-10 MCWP 3-14.1

1.1m

1.1m 4 m ils (

) 4 m ils

0m 617m(MAX ORD)

1200m

AVERAGE ANGLE OF F ALL 4.5 m ils BETW EEN 1200m AND 1500m

approx 1450m

LO S

Figure 3-6. APDS-T Ballistic Battlesight Range Band (6 O’Clock Aim).

reduced engagements using HEI-T and the battle-sight circle, the round will rise 1.0 meters aboveline of sight at 430 meters. Hence, rounds will im-pact high on the target (2.1 meters). To correctthis and impact closer to the center for engage-ments under 600 meters, use the 600 meter HEI-Taim line. The round will not rise higher than 0.5meters above line of sight, providing impactswithin 0.5 meters of center mass. For reducedAPDS-T engagements using the 1,000-meter aimline, the round will not rise above 0.8 metersabove the line of sight. For engagements under600 meters, there is no distinct aim line to use forreference. In short, reduced engagements can beaccomplished with two aim points that cover theentire range band out to 1,000 meters. Either usethe battlesight circle or 600-meter line for HEI-T,depending on range, or use the 1,000-meter aimline for APDS-T. In all cases, the round will im-pact any target that is 2.2 meters or taller.

3005. 25mm Point Target Engagement Techniques

Types of point targets likely to be encountered onthe battlefield are unarmored vehicles, lightly ar-mored vehicles, bunkers, RPG teams, and helicop-ters. The procedures for conducting point targetengagements follow.

a. The vehicle commander lays the gun for di-rection and issues a fire command.b. The gunner, while attempting to acquire thetarget through the sight—

Selects ammunition and rate of fire.Arms the system.

c. Upon acquiring the target, the gunner an-nounces IDENTIFIED.

d. The vehicle commander releases control tothe gunner and commands FIRE. The vehiclecommander then observes the battlefield, search-ing for other targets, directing movement, report-ing, or performing other actions needed to ensuresurvival and mission accomplishment.

e. The gunner lays the reticle on the center oftarget visible mass, announces ON THE WAY, andfires.

f. The gunner fires a burst and then announceshis observation and adjustment or observation andBOT. (See fig. 3-7.) The gunner then fires another3-round burst, continuing until the vehicle com-mander commands CEASE FIRE.

(1) Initial Burst. While employing either battle-sight or precision gunnery, the initial burst shouldcontain 3 rounds. The likelihood of a well-trainedgunner hitting the target using either method withthe first burst is high, and in order to capitalize onthis, the 3-round burst should be employed toyield a greater probability of a quicker kill.

(2) Subsequent 3-Round Bursts. To gain thehigher probability of hitting and killing the targetwith a burst vice a single shot, use 3-round burstswith the 25mm chain gun. The 25mm chain gunhas a dispersion factor of 0.5 mil. For example, at

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 3-11

HE AP

610

10192429

1214

SENSING BURST FIRED

IMPACT ZONELINE OF THE BORE

0

1000 1500 200

DISTANCE IN METERS(NOT TO SCALE)

1.0M

1.5M

2.0M

Figure 3-7. 3-Round Burst Against Point Target with Dispersion Factor.

1,000 meters, each shot fired in single shot modewill land within 0.5 meter of the point of aim, orwithin a 1 meter diameter circle. In order to maxi-mize the potential for landing rounds within that 1meter circle on the center mass of the target, aburst on the target should be used. At 1,500 me-ters the circle is 1.5 meters in diameter, and at2,000 meters the circle is 2.0 meters in diameter.

3006. 25mm Area TargetEngagement

One of the LAV-25’s capabilities in combat issuppression of enemy positions in support of dis-mounted movement. The HEI-T ammunition, withits 5-meter bursting radius and built-in dispersion,supports this capability beyond coax range (900meters) out to 3,000 meters.

Note: T he ballistic daysight organic to theLAV-25 allows ranging for HEI-T ammunition,using the stadia lines in the reticle, only out to2,200 meters. Therefore, accurate sighting andranging is limited to targets out to this distance.Beyond that, impacts can be sensed using thesight, but there is no reticle pattern available foraccurate adjustments. The thermal sight picture,using narrow field of view, terminates at the bot-tom of the reticle pattern, which is 2,200 metersfor HE. Therefore, using the thermal sight, tar-gets cannot be acquired, nor can impacts besensed, beyond 2,200 meters.a. An area target is one of the following:

A target too large for point engagementtechniques orMultiple point targets within a definable lo-cation that must be engaged together.

An area target could be a terrain feature, a man-made object, or a location defined by enemy fire.It may be identified by muzzle flashes, troopmovements, or an unarmored vehicle column. Thespecific enemy units/weapons systems may or maynot be identifiable. Area targets may have consid-erable width and depth, requiring extensive trav-ersing of the turret. Enemy personnel dispersedover an area greater than 10 meters are engagedas an area target.

Accurate range estimation will enhance the effec-tiveness of area fire. Use of a 3-round burst isneeded because of the engagement range band(900 to 3,000 meters).

To engage an area target with HEI-T, a Z patternis used. (See fig. 3-8.) Since the area target hasdepth and width, the diagonal leg of the Z patternis adjusted based on the depth of the target. Thegunner should select 100 rounds per minute as therate of fire when engaging area targets. Using thistechnique, sufficient bursts are fired to placerounds approximately every 10 to 25 meters in thetarget area. A continuous burst should be fired foreach leg of the Z pattern. The size of the area willdetermine the number of rounds in each burst.Suppressive fire is direct fire used on known orlikely enemy locations to degrade one or more ofthe enemy’s basic combat activities, such as mov-ing, shooting, observing, or communicating. The

3-12 MCWP 3-14.1

Figure 3-8. HE Against Area Target.

degree of success is based on the effectiveness ofthe suppression. Denying the enemy the terrainand impairing his ability to observe, engage, andcommand are factors upon which the success ismeasured. This technique is repeated as manytimes as necessary to achieve success.

b. The procedures for conducting an area targetengagement follow:

(1) The vehicle commander lays the gun for di-rection and issues the fire command.

(2) The gunner, while attempting to acquire thetarget—

Selects HEI-T and low rate of fire.Arms the system.Aligns the proper range line on the sightreticle.

(3) Upon identifying the target, the gunner an-nounces IDENTIFIED. The vehicle commanderreleases control to the gunner and commandsFIRE. The gunner lays the reticle on visiblecenter-of-mass of target and announces ON THEWAY, before firing a burst. After impact, the gun-ner announces his observation and adjustment orBOT.

(4) After correcting the range by adjusting thereticle, the gunner lays the reticle on one edge ofthe target area and commences firing a sufficientburst to place a round in every 10 to 25 meters ofwidth of the target area. Once the opposite edgehas been reached, a second burst is fired diago-nally across the target area to the far corner of thearea. Finally, a burst is fired on the far depth ofthe target, left to right (right to left), covering itsentire width. The number of rounds in each burstis dependent on the size of the target and the cov-erage desired.

This technique is continued until the target hasbeen sufficiently suppressed and the vehicle com-mander commands CEASE FIRE.Additionally, the 25mm using HEI-T can be usedlike the coax for designating targets, for causingincendiary fires, or for reconnaissance by fire atranges from 900 to 3,000 meters. These

engagements can be against area targets or pointtargets.

3007. Coaxially and Pintle-Mounted 7.62mm Machine GunEngagement

The coaxially mounted 7.62mm machine gunshould be used to destroy unarmored point tar-gets, to suppress area targets, and to conductreconnaissance by fire. The pintle-mounted7.62mm machine gun should be used to suppresstargets when the coaxially mounted machine gunis not available. While point targets can be en-gaged, the nature of the pintle mount decreasesthe M240E1’s effectiveness against these types oftargets.

When possible, LAV-25 suppressive fire is ac-complished using one or more of the 7.62mm ma-chine guns. This conserves 25mm ammunition. Atranges beyond 900 meters, 25mm HEI-T is usedfor suppression. Machine gun suppressive fire isusually effective in bursts of 20 to 30 rounds (4 to6 tracers) every 10 seconds. This is a sustainedrate of fire of about 120 rounds per minute.

Engagement techniques include point and areatarget techniques and other special uses.

a. Point Target TechniquePoint targets such as jeeps, trucks, RPG teams,and ATGMs may be engaged from either a mov-ing or stationary vehicle. For personnel consoli-dated in a small area (1 to 10 meters), use thepoint target engagement technique. This techniqueis used on this type of target because of the dis-persion factor of the M240. Its dispersion factor is5 mils. This would result, for example, in therounds landing within 5 meters of the aiming pointat 1,000 meters or within a 10 meter circle. At500 meters, the rounds will land within 2 1/2 me-ters of the aiming point or within a 5 meter circle.

To engage a point target, the gunner or vehiclecommander does a precise lay on target and fires akilling burst of 20 to 30 rounds. (See fig 3-9.) Akilling burst kills as many enemy targets as possi-ble with the initial burst of fire. The gunner or

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 3-13

vehicle commander fires additional bursts until thetarget is destroyed.

If the initial killing burst is short or long of the tar-get, the gunner or vehicle commander adjusts bywalking the tracers onto the target. This is calledthe tracer-on-target (TOT) method of adjustment.Once on target, the gunner or vehicle commandercontinues to fire killing bursts until the target isdestroyed or until the gunner is told to cease fire.

b. Area Target TechniqueArea targets can be engaged from either a movingor a stationary vehicle. For personnel dispersedover a large area (over 10 meters), use the areatarget engagement technique. (See fig. 3-10.)

To engage an area target before the enemy goesto the ground, sweep through the forward edge of

the target area with a killing burst, then switch tosuppressive fires.

After the killing burst is fired, the gunner or vehi-cle commander suppresses the remaining targetarea using a Z pattern technique. The Z patterntechnique is as follows:

Fire across the front of the target area.Stop firing to maintain control of ammuni-tion expenditure.Fire through and across the target area in adiagonal movement.Stop firing momentarily at the far end of thetarget area.Fire across the rear of the target area.

Note: During the entire firing sequence, the gun-ner or vehicle commander should be firing 20- to30-round bursts.

3-14 MCWP 3-14.1

Figure 3-10. Area Target Technique.

FIRING BURST-SHORT ONCE ON TARGET, FIREKILLING BURST (20 to 30RDS) UNTIL DESTROYED

1 2 3

Figure 3-9. Point Target Technique.

When the LAV-25 is moving, it will carry theburst through a narrow frontal area when the tar-get is presented. (See fig. 3-11.) Round dispersionwill cover the target width.

From a stationary vehicle, the gunner must use theturret movement to form the Z pattern. The vehi-cle commander can move the pintle-mounted7.62mm to form the Z pattern.

c. Special Uses of Turret-MountedWeaponsIn view of the favorable characteristics of theLAV-25 weapons platform, the crew is limitedonly by their ingenuity in special employment ofthese weapons. Some special uses are as follows:(1) Reconnaissance by Fire. To conserve25mm ammunition, the LAV-25 coaxially orpintle-mounted 7.62mm machine gun should beused in reconnaissance by fire to cause a hidden

enemy to react. (See fig. 3-12.) Fire a single burstwhile constantly observing for possible enemymovement or return fire.

(2) Designating Targets. Machine gun fire canbe used by section and platoon leaders to desig-nate targets for tank, artillery, close air support,or unit organic weapons. Machine gun tracers areeffective as a marking round at ranges of 900 me-ters or less, and main gun HEI-T fire is effectiveat ranges beyond this. (See fig. 3-13.)

(3) Firing Through Concealment. Both 7.62mm machine guns can be used to penetrate lightconcealment such as small trees, hasty barricades,or lightly constructed buildings that might be usedby dismounted enemy personnel. (See fig. 3-14.)Treat such concealment as a point target. Heavierconcealment may need to be penetrated by 25mmmain gun fire.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 3-15

TURRET STATIONARY

DIRECTION OF LAV-25 TURRET TRAVERSING 2

TURRET STATIONARY 3

TARGET AREA

1

23

1

Figure 3-11. Z Pattern from a Moving LAV-25.

Figure 3-12. Reconnaissance by Fire.

(4) Incendiary Fire. Machine gun tracer ammu-nition, particularly armor-piercing incendiarytracer, can set fire to any readily combustible ma-terial such as dry grass, grain, dried brush, orwood. (See fig. 3-15.) Fire denies a particular areato the enemy, and smoke from a burning field canbe used to screen movements.3008. M257 Smoke GrenadeLauncher Engagement

To coordinate crew actions when firing the M257

smoke grenade launcher, the following fire

command is used in conjunction with specificduties.

a. While traversing the turret toward the areawhere the smoke screen is desired, the vehiclecommander commands GRENADE LAUNCHERto alert the crew that the grenade launcher is to beused.b. Upon hearing GRENADE LAUNCHER, thegunner closes the hatch.

c. The vehicle commander, after laying the tur-ret, checks to make sure that all hatches are

3-16 MCWP 3-14.1

Figure 3-13. Designating Targets.

Figure 3-14. Firing Through Concealment.

closed, then gets inside the turret and closes thehatch.

d. The vehicle commander or gunner selects aleft or right salvo (or both) and then raises theprotective cover over the spring-loaded FIREswitch. The vehicle commander commands FIREand fires the grenades using the spring-loadedswitch. After the grenades have been fired, the ve-hicle commander announces GRENADESLAUNCHED and then issues appropriate drivingcommands. The vehicle commander can then re-turn to open hatch position to resume targetacquisition.

In combat, LAV-25 crews may encounter andhave to engage multiple and simultaneous targets.These engagements require speed and accuracy tosuccessfully suppress or destroy all targets.

a. Multiple 25mm or Coax MachineGun EngagementA multiple engagement is two or more targets en-gaged in succession. These engagements requirerapid and accurate fire, target destruction, andquick shifts to new targets. The vehicle com-mander determines which target presents thegreatest threat (most dangerous) and issues a firecommand to engage that target first. When thecrew engages multiple targets, some of the ele-ments of the fire command for the first target maynot have to be repeated. Although each target en-gaged requires essential parts of the fire commanddepending on the type of fire command used (pre-cision or battlesight), the fire commands will be-come shorter as the battle progresses. Just asmultiple engagements involve different kinds oftargets, multiple fire commands are a combinationof battlesight and precision fire commands.

For example, the vehicle commander acquires twoBMPs to his front. He issues the following firecommand.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 3-17

Figure 3-15. Incendiary Fires.

3009. Multiple and SimultaneousTarget Engagements

Note: Only the description and execution wereneeded to engage the second BMP.

b. Simultaneous EngagementsA simultaneous engagement is one with two ormore weapons engaging one or more targets atthe same time. The vehicle commander issues aninitial fire command for directing engagement witheither the 25mm or coax machine gun. Before fir-ing the M240E1 machine gun, the vehicle com-mander announces TWO FORTY. This type ofsimultaneous engagement is used when the addi-tional (vehicle commander’s) target represents amost dangerous or dangerous category threat.This type of engagement is difficult to fire on themove, but it should not be ignored as a possibleengagement technique.

Although simultaneous engagements vary ac-cording to the gunnery technique used, they fol-low the basic fire command sequence shownbelow.

For example, the vehicle commander acquires oneBMP and an infantry squad to the front. He issuesthe following fire command.

Note: If the gunner’s target is destroyed beforethe vehicle commander’s target, the gunner willannounce CEASE FIRE to notify the vehicle com-mander that the 25mm or coax is free for anothermission.

c. Multiple 25mm or Coax Engagements With Simultaneous Vehicle Commander EngagementWhen the gunner is engaging multiple targets, hewill make corrections or observations and con-tinue to engage the target. If the target is de-stroyed, the gunner announces CEASE FIRE,LEFT PC IDENTIFIED and shifts fire to the nexttarget. This enables the vehicle commander tophysically adjust for the turret shift. The gunnercontinues the engagement until all targets are de-stroyed. When the vehicle commander finishes hisengagement, he announces TWO FORTY COM-PLETE and resumes control of the otherengagements.

During some multiple-simultaneous target engage-ments, the vehicle commander may need to stopfiring his weapon temporarily to assist the gunnerengage the target. The two most common situa-tions are when the gunner cannot—

Identify the target (the vehicle commanderlays the 25mm or coax on target).Observe the effect of the rounds (the vehiclecommander helps sense and adjust rounds).

3-18 MCWP 3-14.1

ELEMENT COMMANDER GUNNER

Alert GUNNER

Weapon/Ammunition

BATTLESIGHT

Description TWO PCs, LEFT PC

Direction

IDENTIFIED

Execution FIRE

ON THE WAY

Observation(optional)

SHORT BOT

Description CEASE FIRESHIFT, RIGHT PC

IDENTIFIED

Execution FIRE

ON THE WAYTARGET

CEASE FIRE

ELEMENT COMMANDER GUNNER

Alert GUNNER

Weapon/Ammunition

BATTLESIGHT

Description PC

IDENTIFIED

Execution FIRE AND ADJUSTTWO FORTY

ON THE WAYCEASE FIRE

TWO FORTYCOMPLETE

Multiple-simultaneous engagements involve dif-ferent kinds of targets. The fire command variesdepending on the gunnery technique used.

Example: The vehicle commander acquires twoBMPs and an infantry squad to the front. The fol-lowing fire command is issued.

Note: When engaging simultaneous or multiplesimultaneous targets, the vehicle commander willnot announce FIRE AND ADJUST until the gun-ner announces IDENTIFIED.

The gunner announces CEASE FIRE if he observestarget destruction before the vehicle commandercompetes his engagement.

3010. Observation of Fires

An observation is a notation by the gunner or ve-hicle commander of where the round strikes in re-lation to the target. If the first round fails to hitthe target, observation of where it did hit in rela-tion to the target may enable the vehicle com-mander or gunner to adjust subsequent rounds.TARGET, LOST, OVER, SHORT, and DOUBTFULare all observations made by the vehicle com-mander or gunner. (See fig. 3-16.) The meaningsof these observations are as follows:

TARGET. Any portion of the target is hit bydirect fire.LOST. Neither the round nor its effects areobserved in relation to the target.OVER. The round, tracer, or effects are ob-served above the target.SHORT. The round, tracer, or effects are be-tween the firing vehicle and the target.DOUBTFUL. The round or its effects are ob-served to the left or right of the target butappear to be at the correct range. With theobservation of DOUBTFUL, range correctionmay not be required, but a deflection shift isnecessary.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 3-19

ELEMENT COMMANDER GUNNER

Alert GUNNER

Weapon/Ammunition

BATTLESIGHT

Description TWO PCs,RIGHT PC

Direction

IDENTIFIED

Execution FIRE AND ADJUSTTWO FORTY

ON THE WAY

Observation(optional)

SHORT BOTCEASE FIRELEFT PCIDENTIFIEDON THE WAY

TWO FORTYCOMPLETECEASE FIRE

Figure 3-16. Target Observations.

The gunner has primary responsibility for observa-tions and adjustments. The gunner should an-nounce every observation and/or adjustment asmade. This tells the vehicle commander that thegunner has control of the engagement and doesnot require assistance. The vehicle commandercan then acquire additional targets, control thedriver, navigate, or communicate with otherleaders.

If the gunner fails to observe the strike of thesensing burst, reporting a LOST or DOUBTFULobservation, the vehicle commander announces hisobservation.

If the vehicle commander did not observe thestrike, but the driver did, the driver should auto-matically report that strike.

Note: By crew SOP, the gunner may announceboth observations and adjustments or simply an-nounce observations. The gunner and vehiclecommander may also choose not to announce ad-justments unless the gunner is unsure of wherethe burst struck, as it is understood that the gun-ner will fire and adjust until the completion of theengagement.

3011. Direct Fire Adjustment

There are many techniques of direct fire adjust-ment: BOT, TOT, and adjustment techniques inconjunction with subsequent fire commands.

a. Burst on TargetBOT is the fastest method of adjustment. BOT in-volves moving the burst of the rounds impactingon the ground onto the target. It is most effectivewhen engaging from a stationary vehicle or a vehi-cle that is moving toward the target. It is the de-fault method of adjustment for the gunner.

(1) After the gunner has made the initial lay onthe target and fires, to apply BOT, the gunnermust—

Observe through the sight.Maintain the correct sight picture.Concentrate on the target, noting the pointon the sight reticle where the tracer or burstappears as it passes, strikes short of, or hitsthe target.Announce his observation.Adjust the aiming point of the reticle imme-diately to bring the point where the roundslast impacted to bear center mass on the tar-get. The gunner must quickly and accuratelymake the adjustments and fire a burst.

(2) The gunner continues to fire, adjusting eachburst onto the center of mass until the target is de-stroyed. The vehicle commander orders CEASEFIRE or takes over adjustment of fire.

(3) When the gunner applies BOT, the vehiclecommander acts as an observer, observing therounds fired and subsequent bursts of fire for de-flection and range.

(4) Accuracy of the BOT method of adjustmentdepends on the gunner’s ability to maintain cor-rect sight pictures and to make precise observa-tions. To engage moving targets accurately usingBOT, the gunner must continuously track before,during, and after the engagement.

b. Tracer on TargetAs the name implies, the gunner or vehicle com-mander firing a machine gun adjusts the strike ofthe rounds, based on tracers, onto the target area.

c. Subsequent Fire CommandsThe vehicle commander uses subsequent fire com-mands to announce direct fire observations andadjustments. Only the elements necessary to con-tinue the engagement are announced. There arethree elements to a subsequent fire command; thealert with observation, the correction, and theexecution.

3-20 MCWP 3-14.1

(1) Alert. The vehicle commander announces therange observation as the alert SHORT. This alsonotifies the gunner that a subsequent fire com-mand follows.

(2) Correction. Corrections are made based ondeflection, range, or both.

(a) Deflection. The deflection correction is basedon the vehicle commander’s deflection observa-tion. If the round went left of the target, the cor-rection would be to the right. Deflectioncorrections may be given in mils or target forms.

(b) Range. The range correction is based on thevehicle commander’s observation. If the roundlanded short of the target, the vehicle commanderadds range. If the necessary correction is less than200 meters, the vehicle commander may use thetarget form technique. To execute a range correc-tion, the gunner must change range lines. The fol-lowing two techniques are used to aid the vehiclecommander in deflection and range correctionsduring the subsequent fire command.

1 Target Form Adjustment Technique. Targetform is the simplest method of adjustment. Oneform is the visible height or width of the target.Since the visual size in width and height differ, thevisual height is used for adjusting elevation andthe visual width is used for azimuth adjustment.The word FORM may be added after the an-nounced change, or the change may stand alone iftarget form is the standard adjustment techniquein the unit’s standing operating procedure (SOP).Form changes are always given in full- or half-form increments.

2 Mil Change Technique. This technique is sim-ple and accurate at all ranges for deflection, but itrequires the vehicle commander to use an opticaldevice with a mil graduation scale. The gunnerdoes not have the capability to accurately correctrange based on observations given with the miltechnique. Therefore, the gunner’s range correc-tions will be estimations.

(3) Execution. The vehicle commander com-pletes the subsequent fire command with the exe-cution command FIRE. The gunner will thenannounce ON THE WAY.

3012. Target Leading

When engaging a target that is moving in a lateraldirection in relation to the gun, the gunner mustlead (aim in front of) the target to compensate for

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 3-21

ELEMENT COMMANDER GUNNER

Alert GUNNER

Weapon/Ammunition

SABOT

Description PC

IDENTIFIED

Execution FIRE

ON THE WAY

Subsequent SHORT, ADD 2FORMS

ON THE WAY

TARGETCEASE FIRE

ELEMENT COMMANDER GUNNERAlert GUNNER

Weapon/Ammunition

SABOT

Description PC

IDENTIFIED

Execution FIRE

ON THE WAY

Subsequent OVER, DROPTWO FORMS

ON THE WAY

DOUBTFUL,LEFT TWOFORMS

ON THE WAY

TARGETCEASE FIRE

the movement. The amount of lead applied de-pends on the velocity of the ammunition, targetspeed, and target angle. Lead rules are applied formoving targets classified as flank views.

When using armor piercing (AP) ammunition, usea 5-mil lead from center mass of target. (See fig.3-17.)

The lead rule for HE and 7.62mm ammunition is10 mils. (See fig. 3-18.)

When engaging targets moving toward or awayfrom the position, the gunner may need to make asmall vertical adjustment. (See fig. 3-19.)

If the target is approaching, aim at the center baseof visible mass; if fleeing, aim at the top center ofvisible mass.

When a moving LAV-25 is firing over its flank(side) at a stationary target, lateral motion affectsthe projectiles as they leave the muzzle. This lat-eral motion must be compensated for, just as if a

moving target were being engaged from a station-ary LAV-25. When firing over the left side of thevehicle, aim 5 mils to the left of the target’s centerof mass (see fig. 3-20); and when firing over theright side of a vehicle, aim 5 mils to the right ofthe target’s center of mass.

If the LAV-25 and target are parallel to eachother and moving in the same direction, no lead isrequired. The lateral motion of the projectilescompensates for any lead requirement.

If the LAV-25 and target are parallel but movingin opposite directions, a 10-mil lead is applied asshown in figure 3-21. (The LAV-25 is firing overits left flank.)

3013. Engagement Termination

The vehicle commander and gunner must deter-mine when to cease fire against a target, when toshift fire against multiple targets, and when tomove from one firing position to another beforecontinuing direct fire engagements. The actual tar-get effect may not be clear or visible; they mayhave to cease fire, shift fire, or shift position basedon indicators of target effects.

a. Armored Vehicles

(1) Killing Standard. Most armored vehiclelosses are repairable; nonrepairable losses are theexception. Based on the low probability of a non-repairable loss and the additional ammunition andengagement time required to achieve destruction,the minimum standard for a direct fire engagementis to achieve a mobility or firepower kill. A mobil-ity kill means that the threat vehicle can no longer

3-22 MCWP 3-14.1

HE AP

610

1019242934

121416182022

Figure 3-17. AP Lead Appliedto a Moving Target.

HE AP

610

1019242934

1214161820

22

Figure 3-18. HE Lead Appliedto a Moving Target.

MOVING AWAY

TOP CENTERVISIBLE MASS

MOVING TOWARD

CENTER BASE OF VISIBLE MASS

Figure 3-19. Target Moving Toward orAway From LAV-25 Positions.

move under its own power. A firepower killmeans that the threat vehicle can no longer use itsantiarmor weapon system.

(2) Kill Indicators. The gunner or vehicle com-mander may cease or shift fire from the targetedvehicle to a different target if the—

Vehicle stops moving.Vehicle stops firing.Vehicle is smoking.Vehicle explodes.Vehicle is abandoned.

Note: When an armored vehicle is hit by a tankround or a 25mm round (sabot or HEI-T), an ob-servable explosion with flash occurs. This is theeffect of the round impacting on the target butnot necessarily an indication of damage to thetarget. The crew must look for one or more of theindi- cators to determine if the vehicle has re-ceived a mobility or firepower kill. Obviously,several indicators together allow for a more reli-able estimate of target effect than one indicatorby itself.

b. Unarmored Vehicles

(1) Killing Standard. Threat unarmored vehi-cles use a grade of diesel fuel which does not ex-plode easily. They are multi-wheeled, whichallows them to continue operating with one ormore tires punctured. The direct fire engagementgoal against an unarmored vehicle is to cause a

mobility kill or cause the driver and crew to aban-don the vehicle.

(2) Kill Indicators. The gunner or vehicle com-mander may cease or shift fire if the—

Vehicle stops moving.Vehicle is smoking.Vehicle explodes.Vehicle is abandoned.

c. Dismounted Infantry/AntiarmorSystems

(1) Killing Standard. Destruction of dis-mounted point targets is difficult to measure. Thegoal of direct fire engagements is to neutralize theantiarmor firepower capability of the target, eitherthrough destruction, damage, or suppres- sion.

(2) Kill Indicators. When engaging point or areadismounted infantry or antiarmor targets, the vehi-cle commander may cease fire or shift fire if—

The dismounted threat’s antiarmor fireceases or becomes noticeably ineffective.The antiarmor systems are hit by the 25mmrounds.The dismounted infantry casualties are ob-served by the LAV-25 crew.

Note: When the LAV crew is suppressing an areatarget, the duration of required suppression isbased on the METT-T requirements of the

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 3-23

HE AP

610

1019242934

1214161820

22

Figure 3-21. 10-Mil Lead Applied when aTarget and an LAV-25 are Parallel and

Moving in Opposite Directions.

HE AP

6 1019242934

121416182022

Figure 3-20. 5-Mil Lead Applied to aStationary BMP When LAV is

Firing Over the Left Flank.

situation. Suppression should be maintained aslong as the unit gains a tactical advantage by do-ing so, or until another element can close with thetarget and destroy it.

3-24 MCWP 3-14.1

Fire control is the control of all operations in con-nection with the application of fire on a target(Joint Pub 1-02). Distribution of fire refers to ei-ther a planned pattern of projectiles about a point,or a planned spread of fire to cover a desiredfrontage or depth (Joint Pub 1-02).

The efficient use of available firepower is requiredto defeat the enemy, this can be accomplished bycrew drills that emphasize proper use of fire com-mands and techniques of fire.

Fire control and distribution is achieved throughthe use of proper fire commands and disciplineduse of standing operating procedures (SOPs)based on fire control and distribution measuresthat are reflected in fire planning and address firedistribution patterns and fire control techniques.

Much of the material in this chapter is informationon how the section leader (of two of more vehi-cles) or platoon commander control the fires andeffects of fires on targets.

4001. Standing OperatingProcedures

SOPs are a set of instructions covering those fea-tures of operations which lend themselves to adefinite or standardized procedure without loss ofeffectiveness. The procedure is applicable unlessordered otherwise (Joint Pub 1-02). Used prop-erly, SOPs can save valuable time and help ensurefast, predictable action in combat situations byLAV-25 crews. To be effective, the SOP must bedrilled repetitively. Every LAV-25 crew within aplatoon must react automatically to the tactical

situation. SOPs should include actions in areacoverage responsibilities, turret orientation, andweapons-ready postures for different situa- tionssuch as road marches and various battle drills.

When forming platoon SOPs (see ARTEP17-57-10 MTP, Mission Training Plan for theScout Platoon), the platoon commander shouldconsider—

Actions on enemy contact.Reaction to artillery strike.Reaction to ambush.Formation and order of march.Techniques of movement.Alternate communication methods.Fire distribution patterns.Method of engagement. Reaction to air attack. Target responsibilities. Mission-oriented-protective-posture(MOPP) levels and hatch position. Deliberate ambush.

SOPs ensure the platoon is prepared to engagepersonnel carriers with sabot and to suppressATGMs at long ranges with HE. The commanderselects weapon systems to be used depending onthe range to the target, the ammunition capability,and the type of target. The weapons-ready pos-ture may have to be adjusted or the ammunitionredistributed after an engagement to ensure thatevery LAV-25 has the ammunition needed.

Chapter 4

Fire Control and Distribution

4002. Fire Control and Distribution Measures

Fire control and distribution measures must besimple and clear. They must be rehearsed to beroutine with no need for detailed or lengthy in-struction to execute. Sectors of fire, target refer-ence points (TRPs), phase lines, and engagementpriorities are measures that can be used to effec-tively distribute and control fires.

a. Sector of Fire A sector of fire is a defined area which is requiredto be covered by the fire of individual or crewserved weapons, or the weapons of a unit (JointPub 1-02). Each LAV-25 crew or vehicle section(two vehicles) is assigned a sector of fire. Thesector of fire must be covered by observation andfire. A sector of fire is designated by pointing outeasily recognizable terrain features such as roads,streams, hills, or ridgelines that outline the sector.

Each sector of fire should extend from a firing po-sition to the maximum engagement range of theweapons on the LAV-25. A number of sectors offire can be used to build an engagement area,which is an area along an enemy avenue of ap-proach where the commander intends to containand destroy an enemy force with the massed firesof all available weapons (MCRP 5-2A). (See fig.4-1.)

In most situations, the terrain and the number andtype of weapons available to cover an area willdictate how sectors of fire are arranged and as-signed. They should be assigned so that an en-gagement area is completely covered with theappropriate type of fire and so that mutual sup-port can be established among the LAV-25s in thearea. To gain mutual support, each LAV-25 is as-signed a primary and secondary sector of fire.(See fig. 4-2.) The secondary sector of fire of onevehicle should correspond to another LAV-25’sprimary sector of fire to establish mutual support.

Fire is shifted to the secondary sector, on order,when there are no targets in the primary sector, orto cover another LAV-25 such as one that wasforced to move to an alternate position, or is outof action.

If a mounted avenue of approach is narrow orthere is a need to concentrate the fires of an entireplatoon in one critical area such as a choke point,overlapping sectors of fire may be assigned. Be-cause this increases the problem of control andthe probability of target overkill, additional con-trol measures such as engagement priorities, firepatterns, or TRPs are needed. Leaders must selectpositions that allow them to observe and coordi-nate the fires of their unit.

4-2 MCWP 3-14.1

Figure 4-1. Sector of Fire and Engagement Area.

b. Target Reference Point A TRP is an easily recognizable point on theground (either natural or man-made) used to initi-ate, distribute, and control fires. TRPs are desig-nated by maneuver leaders to define unit orindividual sectors of fire. They are designated us-ing standard target symbols and numbers issuedby maneuver commanders (MCRP 5-2A). (Seefig. 4-3.)

In the defense, TRPs are assigned for LAV-25salong avenues of mounted approach. In the of-fense, TRPs are assigned on likely enemy loca-tions or prominent terrain features. To avoidconfusion, the number of TRPs should be limitedto the number required to distribute and controlfire.

When referring to a TRP to hand off targets, usecompass directions (north, east, south, or west)rather than right or left because each LAV-25may be viewing the TRP from a differentdirection.

Essential TRPs may be used as indirect fire tar-gets. If so, they are assigned a target identification

number (e.g., AB 1001) and are submitted to theappropriate fire support coordinator for inclusionon the list of targets.

c. Phase LinesA PL is a line utilized for control and coordinationof military operations, usually a terrain feature ex-tending across the zone of action (Joint Pub1-02). It is a linear control measure that can beused to control movement, but it can also be usedto control and distribute the fire of several, widelyspaced LAV-25s. Any prominent, natural, ormanmade linear terrain feature (ridgeline, river orstream, road, or railroad track) may be desig-nated a PL. (See fig. 4-4.)

In offensive or defensive operations, PLs can beused to start or stop firing, shift fire to anothersector, or indicate when LAV-25s are to move toalternate or supplementary positions.

PLs are a simple and effective control measure. Infigure 4-4, the platoon commander uses PLs to in-dicate to the LAV-25 crews when to fire andwhen to displace to an alternate position.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 4-3

Figure 4-2. Primary and Secondary Sectors of Fire.

d. Engagement Priorities Targets that present the greatest threat and tar-gets that, when engaged, may break the momen-tum of an attack (such as command vehicles)should be engaged first. Usually, targets seen in

formations on the battlefield are varioustypes—tanks, BMPs, BRDMs, or air defense ve-hicles. Engagement priorities are useful in deter-mining which specific target to engage first whenno sectors of fire have been assigned or whenoverlapping sectors of fire have been designated.

4-4 MCWP 3-14.1

Figure 4-4. Phase Lines.

N

TANGO 42 ENGAGE EASTAND TANGO 43 WEST OFTRP 003 AA5004

++

ROAD

ORCHARD

BRIDGE

CHURCH GULLY

TRP

TRP

AA5003

Figure 4-3. Target Reference Points.

4003. Fire Distribution Patterns

Frontal fire, cross fire, and depth fire are the threebasic fire patterns that can be used to distributethe platoon’s (or section’s) fire when multiple tar-gets appear and no control measures have beenassigned. a. Frontal Fire Pattern The frontal fire pattern is used when targets arepositioned in front of LAV-25s in a lateral con-figuration. The left flank LAV-25 fires at the left-most target; the right flank LAV-25 fires at therightmost target. As targets are destroyed,friendly fires are shifted toward the center tar-get(s) of the enemy formation. (See fig. 4-5.)

b. Cross Fire PatternThe cross fire pattern is used when targets are po-sitioned laterally but obstructions preventLAV-25s from firing to the front. The left flankLAV-25 engages the rightmost target; the rightflank LAV-25 engages the leftmost target. As tar-gets are destroyed, the vehicles automatically shifttheir fires towards the target(s) located in the cen-ter of the enemy formation. (See fig. 4-6.)

c. Depth Fire PatternThe depth fire pattern is used when targets are en-countered in a column configuration. When theelement commander gives no other instruction inthe fire command, the left flank LAV-25 engagesthe rearmost target; the right flank LAV-25 en-gages the closest target. (See fig. 4-7.) As targetsare destroyed, the vehicles shift fires to the tar-get(s) in the center of the enemy formation. De-pending on the orientation of the targets (e.g.,echeloned left or right), the element commandermay want the leftmost LAV-25 to engage theclosest target, and the rightmost vehicle the rear-most target. If that is the case, the element com-mander would qualify his fire command by addingLEFT, FRONT or RIGHT, REAR after the com-mand DEPTH. (See fig. 4-8.)

Note: The element commander can delineate sec-tors of responsibility by firing first to visuallydemonstrate a sector. However, there may be oc-casions when the element commander wishes toachieve massed, surprise fires. To do this, theelement commander must assign sectors of re-sponsibility through an alternate method. Inmany cases, this should be planned ahead of timemuch like an engagement area or ambush. When

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 4-5

Figure 4-5. Frontal Fire.

it cannot be previously planned, the element com-mander delineates sectors of responsibility overthe radio or land line.

4004. Section Fire Planning

Section fire planning is an integral part of thetroop leading procedures and begins when thesection leader receives a mission from the platooncommander. The platoon commander and eachsection leader coordinate separate but linked fire

plans. Fire planning is a continuous process; itdoes not stop until the mission is accomplished.The primary goal of fire planning is to prescribehow fires, direct and indirect, are to be distributedand controlled to best support the scheme of ma-neuver. The section fire plan provides the detailsof how the section plans to use fires to supporttheir maneuver and the platoon commander withthe information needed to distribute and controlthe fires of all available weapons in the platoon.

4-6 MCWP 3-14.1

Figure 4-6. Cross Fire.

Figure 4-7. Depth Fire.

a. Defensive Fire PlanningDefensive fire planning is normally deliberate anddetailed because sufficient time is available toconsider planning and assigning—

Individual LAV-25 direct fire targets.Section direct fire targets.Indirect fire targets.Fire distribution and control measures.

Alternate and supplementary firing posi-tions.

To develop a defensive fire plan (figure 4-9), thesection leader—

Assigns primary, alternate, and supplemen-tary firing positions to each LAV-25 andassigns to each position a primary and sec-ondary sector of fire.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 4-7

Figure 4-8. Variation of Depth of Fire.

WHITE 2WHITE 3

WHITE 4WHITE 1

AB1001

AB1002

AB1005

AB1003

AB1004

PRISEC

Figure 4-9. Defensive Fire Plan.

Designates possible point or area targets andother control measures (TRPs, RPs, PLs, ortarget priorities) to coordinate the fire of thesection when more than one LAV-25 is firinginto the target area or sector.Receives information from vehicle com-manders (provided on range cards). The sec-tion leader then reviews this information toensure that fire is properly distributed acrossthe entire section sector and that sufficientcontrol measures have been established. Thisreview will assist the section leader in deter-mining if positions must be adjusted, if mine-fields and obstacles must be emplaced, and ifadditional indirect fire support must berequested.Completes the section fire plan, gives a copyof the section sector sketch to the platoonleader, and has each vehicle commandermake a copy of the sector sketch. (If time isshort, the section leader may only be able togive the vehicle commander a quick briefingon the sector sketch.)Coordinates with the platoon commander tosubmit their target requests to the supportcoordinators. Once the targets are approved,the section leader needs to backbrief person-nel in the section about the indirect fire planincluding types of preplanned targets and tar-get numbers. If the section leader fails to co-ordinate all targets and target numbers withthe section and the platoon, the result will beconfusion once contact is made. All platoonmembers must be operating from the samefire plan.

b. Offensive Fire Planning Time may not be available to plan fires in thesame detail as in defensive fire planning. The sec-tion leader may have to rely more on fire com-mands and prearranged SOP signals to rapidlybring effective fire on the enemy targets. How-ever, offensive action requires some planning. Asection leader must plan how to engage known orsuspected enemy targets, where suppressive firemay be needed, and how to control section fires

against planned targets and targets of oppor-tunity.

4005. Section Fire ControlSection fire control may be conducted using si-multaneous or alternating fire.

a. Simultaneous FireSimultaneous fire is used to achieve massed, sur-prise fires effect on the enemy. In this method, allvehicles of a section fire into their assigned sec-tors at the same time. This technique is used whenall vehicles are able to or required (by target pres-entation) to fire at the same time. All vehicle com-manders within the unit react to the sectionleader’s fire command by firing simultaneously attargets within their sectors or at targets desig-nated by a fire pattern unless given the commandALTERNATING after the fire pattern in the sec-tion fire command.

b. Alternating FiresAlternating fires are used to prevent the enemyfrom getting a good fix on the firing vehicle’s lo-cation. Alternating fires allow one vehicle to shiftfiring positions while the other vehicle engagestargets. This method provides constant fire intothe engagement area while hindering the enemy’sattempts to acquire and suppress firing vehicles.At extended ranges (at least 2,500 meters), thepair can alternate firing and observing until bothare satisfied they are delivering effective fire. Touse alternating fire, the section leader must an-nounce ALTERNATING in the control element ofthe fire command.

4006. Section Fire CommandsSpeed and accuracy are vital when engaging tar-gets, so commands must be concise and clear. Inthe stress of battle, a section leader or vehiclecommander must quickly analyze a situation andissue concise and complete fire commands with-out delay.

4-8 MCWP 3-14.1

A standard format for section fire commands en-sures that all necessary information is given inminimum time, even under the worst conditions.The elements of a section fire command issued inproper sequence are as follows:

Note: Weapon or ammunition is optional but maybe given when BMPs and BTRs appear together.Range is optional and may be given if it can be

determined. Control is optional but may be givento control the fire pattern used by the section.

The following are examples of section firecommands.

Example 1: Section leader’s fire command to en-gage assaulting BMPs with the section LAV-25s:WHITE 2, THIS IS WHITE 1; SABOT (optional);THREE BMPs; FRONT, 1600 (optional); CROSS(optional); FIRE.

Example 2: Section leader’s fire command to en-gage section of BMPs from primary and alternatepositions: WHITE 2, THIS IS WHITE 1; SABOT(optional); TWO BMPs; SOUTH OF TRP ONETWO FOUR (optional); FRONTAL, ALTERNAT-ING (optional); AT MY COMMAND.

Section leader’s command to break off the en-gagement: WHITE 2, THIS IS WHITE 1; CEASEFIRE.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 4-9

Element ExampleAlert WHITE TWO,

THIS IS WHITE ONE

Weapon/Ammunition(Optional)

SABOT/HE

Description ONE BMP, TWO BTRs

Location (Optional) 500 METERS EAST OF TRPZERO ZERO FOUR

Range (Optional) ONE FOUR HUNDRED

Control (Optional) DEPTH

Execution AT MY COMMAND

(reverse blank)

This chapter provides information to assist unitcommanders and master gunners in developingsuccessful gunnery training programs. Trainingguidelines, tips, and the progression from sustain-ment to intermediate to advanced training are ad-dressed systematically. Hence, crewmembers areefficiently trained, training goals and objectivesare met, and LAV-25 crews develop and maintaingunnery skill proficiencies.

5001. Developing LAV-25Gunnery ProgramsAn effective program for unit training is the resultof careful analysis and planning, supervised exe-cution, and command emphasis. Command inter-est in the gunnery training plan is a key element tosuccessful programs. Detailed information on de-velopment and implementation of unit trainingprograms may be found in MCRP 3-0A, UnitTraining Management Guide, and MCRP 3-0B,How to Conduct Training.

The training plan should be based on the currentlevel of proficiency in the unit to be trained. Twofactors that may affect a unit’s overall proficiencylevel are personnel turbulence and normal deterio-ration of basic skills. Personnel reassignments, re-lease from active duty, fleet assistanceprogram/temporary additional duty, etc., cannegatively impact on the experience level within aunit. This personnel turbulence may impair aunit’s gunnery proficiency level and possiblyweaken crew cohesion. Nongunnery-training re-quirements may take time and resources awayfrom gunnery training, which may cause masteredskills to weaken. Without sustainment training,those skills can be lost. Unit and vehicle com-manders, trainers, and master gunners need to beaware of the effect of these two factors and plantraining to counter their effects.

Figure 5-1 outlines the preferred progression ofLAV-25 gunnery training. Only gunnery-specificevents are listed. Training progresses from theprerequisite initial skills training and testing topreliminary and basic gunnery qualification. Oncea crew member is basically qualified in LAV-25gunnery, training progresses to sustainment train-ing level and into achievement of intermediate andadvanced gunnery levels. Since commanders havemany other competing training requirements thatimpact the overall training plan, gunnery trainingshould be effectively incorporated into that plan.

5002. Training Analysis andPlanningLAV-25 gunnery training should be a continuous,challenging, well-planned, and progressive pro-gram. Commanders must assess their units to de-termine their levels of proficiency in gunnery and

Chapter 5

LAV-25 Unit Gunnery Training Programs

Figure 5-1. Training Progression.

tactics against existing standards. Recommenda-tions come from all levels of the command; how-ever, unit master gunners should be involved inrecommending a training program for gunnery, asoutlined in the following steps:

a. AnalyzeAll available data of the unit’s performance duringpast gunnery training programs should be ana-lyzed so that a clear picture of the unit’s currentgunnery proficiency level can be made. The analy-sis should focus on—

Past results from gunnery table exercises.Specific results by type of task on all tables.Personnel turnover within the unit as it re-lates to experience and crew cohesion.The LAV-25 gunnery skills test (LGST)results.Training results relating to gunnery (i.e., per-formance in the turret trainer).LAV-25 crew evaluator (LCE) training.Other common training results.

b. Identify Strengths and WeaknessesAfter careful compilation of all available data, thetraining planners and master gunner should iden-tify specific unit strengths and weaknesses in gun-nery proficiency.

c. Derive RecommendationsOnce strengths and weaknesses have been identi-fied, the master gunner develops courses of actionand makes recommendations. Considerationshould be given to availability of training aids/ ar-eas so that recommendations are realistic.

d. Brief CommanderThe master gunner briefs the commander on re-sults of the analysis and makes recommendationson how to sustain strengths or correct weak-nesses. The commander decides on a course ofaction which becomes the initial training plan.This briefing process may be repeated as neces-sary until the commander approves a basic planfor implementation.e. Issue the Unit Training Plan

The commander issues the overall unit trainingplan for implementation. This plan provides bothlong-range and short-range goals to focus devel-opment of a short-range training plan that willprovide detailed instructions for execution.

f. Update the PlanThe master gunner updates the plan approved un-der the commander’s continuous guidance.

g. Develop Short-Range Training Plan(SRTP)The master gunner develops and designs the com-plete training program into a briefing form for keypersonnel. Informing key personnel allows thecommander’s plan for gunnery training to be visu-alized by unit leaders. The SRTP should includethe following:

Cover sheet.Purpose, goals, and objectives of the gun-nery training plan.Identified strengths and/or weaknesses.Recommendations.Personnel turnover issues as they relate tocollective unit experience.Ammunition.Short-range and near-term calendars.LCE training.LGST issues. (See app. D.)Basic tables/sustainment tables. (See app. Eand app. F.)Additional training. Intermediate tables. (See app. G.)Advanced tables. (See app. H.)

5003. Training Planning Tips

a. Start EarlyAll aspects of a training program should be thor-oughly coordinated. This requires proper timemanagement. Establish milestones for ammuni-tion, resource, and maintenance requests as far inadvance as possible. Involving unit commoditysections in the gunnery training planning and

5-2 MCWP 3-14.1

execution phases help ensure successful evolu-tions. Information regarding ammunition forecast-ing and allocation is covered in detail in appendixI.

b. Be ThoroughLeave nothing to chance. Avoid wasting valuabletraining resources and opportunities. Issue unitleaders the appropriate guidance and assistancerequired so that they may train their units. Dou-blecheck the plan, and continuously coordinatewith commodity sections to ensure nothing ismissed.

c. Be Flexible Continually adjust the training program to reflectchanges in the unit’s commitments. Have backuptraining prepared. Unit commitments, weather,range time, and availability of ammunition invaria-bly affect a training plan. Have contingency plansready for these eventualities.

d. Train ContinuallyGunnery training must be recurring in nature tosustain skills through time. Plan proper use of allavailable time. Establish concurrent training for allaspects of the plan.

e. Reduce Unnecessary PersonnelTurnoverCommanders should do everything possible to re-duce the personnel turbulence within their units.Crew turnover will occur naturally throughout theyear, but leaders should attempt to maintain a bal-ance in experience.

f. Plan Around Availability of TrainingAidsSome LAV-25 gunnery training relies on the useof training aids. Planners must ensure that theyproperly forecast and allocate the use of availabletraining aids. If this is not done, the result may bean outstanding plan without the means to accom-plish it. Do not overextend your assets.

g. Plan Around Range AvailabilityGunnery training is heavily reliant on live fireranges. A great plan means nothing if the range isnot available.

5004. Prerequisites to GunneryTrainingAll LAV-25 crew members are taught basicLAV-25 tasks during their initial military occupa-tional specialty (MOS) school. The school teachesstudents the basic skills of gunnery. Gunnery skillsare perishable. Commanders cannot solely rely onthe retention abilities of personnel to ensure thatthey are prepared to conduct gunnery training.Actual live fire training is a precious commoditythat cannot afford to be wasted. Preparation forgunnery training begins prior to the first roundgoing downrange. For this reason, all personnelshould train to meet certain prerequisites prior tobeginning live fire gunnery train- ing.

Since gunnery training can begin at either the ba-sic or sustainment levels, planners should developthe training plan from each perspective. Prerequi-sites for each level should be taught and/or testedper existing unit SOPs prior to conducting gun-nery training.

a. Basic Level

(1) Safety. All personnel must be familiar withthe safety aspects of gunnery training. This in-cludes range regulations, flag use and meaning,weapons clearing procedures, and ammunitionhandling procedures. Briefing general vehicle andunit safety SOPs is important.

(2) Maintenance Procedures. Prior to begin-ning gunnery training, personnel should be famil-iar with the care and maintenance of the turret andall turret-mounted weapons.

(3) Prefire Checklists. Personnel should beable to demonstrate the proper use of prefirechecklists prior to training.

(4) Immediate and Remedial Actions. Theseprocedures should become second nature to allpersonnel for a number of reasons. Safety is a ma-jor concern during these actions. Valuable trainingtime can be lost due to inexperienced personnelhandling weapons problems. These actions are in-cluded in appendix J.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 5-3

(5) Diagnostic LGST. These tests are usuallyscheduled prior to training to identify weak areasin training. Information on the LGST is includedin chapter 6, and details on stations of the test arein appendix D.

(6) Weapons Conditions. The use of weaponsconditions for each of the weapons systems foundon the LAV-25 must be mastered. These condi-tions denote the state of fire readiness and safetyfor each weapons system. Information on detailsregarding LAV-25 weapons conditions can befound in appendix K.

b. Sustainment Level

(1) Basic Gunnery Training. By natural pro-gression, successful completion of basic gunnerytraining leads to sustainment gunnery training.Basic gunnery qualification tables can be found inappendix E.

(2) Crew Qualification. Crews who have quali-fied previously will naturally cycle into sustain-ment gunnery training.

(3) Record LGST. A record of LGST is re-quired prior to any personnel starting full calibergunnery. Planned properly, this allows a unit tomeet all LGST requirements for the gunnerytraining plan and meet standard requirements ofindividual training standards (ITS).

5005. Continuation of GunneryTrainingSustainment gunnery consists of firing tables 4through 8. The sustainment gunnery tables (seeapp. F) are designed to reinforce, evaluate, andexercise precision and battlesight skills learnedduring crew qualification. Sustainment gunnerybuilds on basic gunnery skills and prepares crewsfor more intermediate and advanced gunnerytraining.

Intermediate TrainingIntermediate gunnery is conducted to train a sin-gle vehicle crew using full caliber live fire. Toreach the goal of full crew qualification, interme-diate gunnery builds on skills acquired during sus-tainment gunnery training. Intermediate gunnerytraining consists of firing tables 9 through 12(app. G). Point calculation worksheets (app. M)and scoring matrices (app. H) are used for firingfull caliber tables 8 through 12. Point calculationworksheets are used for battlesight engagementscoring. Scoring matrices are used for precisionengagement scoring.

Advanced TrainingAdvanced gunnery trains and evaluates LAV-25scout section members in conducting section re-connaissance and security missions. Advancedgunnery training also evaluates the scout sectionleader’s ability to control the scout section in tac-tical engagements. Advanced training is con-ducted using the advanced gunnery tables (seeapp. H) and the advanced gunnery performancechecklists (see app. L). These tables and check-lists are used as a baseline to tailor a challengingtraining exercise that accomplishes the successfulcompletion of identified combat critical tasks. Thegoal of advanced gunnery training is the qualifica-tion of scout sections.

Master gunners should continually evaluate thetraining level of unit personnel. That assessmentshould provide the commander with an indicationof the unit’s training level and identify areas re-quiring training emphasis. It is important to trainnew personnel as rapidly as possible to ensure theentire unit is at the same training level. This mayrequire firing of the basic gunnery tables a numberof times during a training cycle to ensure all per-sonnel are qualified and to meet the prerequisitesfor higher level training.

5-4 MCWP 3-14.1

The LAV-25 gunnery skills test (LGST) evaluateseach crewmember’s ability to perform gunnery-related skills. Crewmembers are tested individu-ally without the aid of technical manuals or publi-cations. Tests are conducted prior to live fireexercises to serve as a way to ensure crewmem-bers have mastered required knowledge and skillsand meet minimum standards for training andsafety before advancing into live fire.

Appendix D contains a detailed description of arecommended LGST. The appendix lists testablesubjects by test stations as well as informationthat supports the setup, administration, testing,and evaluation of required tasks. It also providesgrading criteria for each task.

6001. Types of LGSTs

Diagnostic The commander uses a diagnostic LGST as anevaluation tool to ensure the unit meets desiredtraining levels. Information gained from results ofa diagnostic LGST enables units to design trainingplans that capitalize on strengths and correctweaknesses identified during the LGST. Diagnos-tic LGSTs should be administered to units prior tostarting gunnery exercises. In addition, diagnosticLGSTs can be administered to new personnel andused as a method for measuring proficiency levelswhen designing cross-training programs.

Record Record LGSTs are conducted for score. RecordLGSTs satisfy requirements during the conduct ofgunnery exercises. In successful training plans, re-cord LGSTs ensure that standards are met andthat each crewmember has mastered or sustainedthe skills necessary to operate various weapons

systems. The frequency of conducting recordLGSTs may vary, but tests should be given atleast semiannually in accordance with individualtraining standards and at least 90 days prior to fullcaliber firing.

A well-orchestrated plan can accomplish both re-quirements simultaneously.

6002. Standards

The task tested at each station should have itsown standards that govern the conduct of thatstation and the grading criteria. It is importantthat evaluation standards remain consistentthroughout the LGST. Performance steps for eachstation should be clearly outlined in detail for theevaluator and not compromised. The followingoverall standards are recommended:

To receive a GO on any station, a GO mustbe achieved for all subtasks (performancemeasures) within that station.NO GOs are given if the task—

Is not completed.Is performed incorrectly.Time standards are not met.

The evaluation may be conducted either in-ternally or externally. Internal evaluation, us-ing unit personnel qualified as LCEs, shouldonly be used for diagnostic LGSTs. RecordLGSTs are best evaluated by external LCE-qualified personnel, thereby providing objec-tive results.Critiquing at each station is important.Crewmembers should be made aware ofwhere they failed to meet the standard andwhat corrective action is required for them

Chapter 6

LAV-25 Gunnery Skills Test

to meet the standards. LCEs should conductcritiques in this manner to allow the unit toenforce consistent standards.Retesting is accomplished in accordance withthe unit SOP.

6003. Site Planning andPreparationThe goal of any unit conducting an LGST is thatthe testing site be organized to support consistent,predictable throughput of the evaluated unit. Thisequates to nothing more than proper time man-agement, thorough planning, and detailed prep-aration.

Site Planning Considerations

Combine test stations based on the availability oftime, evaluators, equipment, and the number ofcrewmembers to be evaluated.

Combine test station subjects in an organizedfashion. See fig. 6-1. For example, do not requirea student to perform downloading procedures be-fore performing uploading procedures. Prepara-tion time can be minimized by progressing in alogical fashion.Combine related stations. For example, boresight-ing of and disassembly of the M240 are unrelated

subjects and if combined would damage consis-tent throughput.

Determine and balance the time allotted for test-ing of each station. This will allow predictablethroughput and enable the evaluators to finish thetest within the allotted time frame.

Establish an area for the crewmembers to waitand study between stations.

Ensure that backup equipment is on hand to re-place faulty equipment. Backup equipment mustbe readily accessible; if not, throughput will be af-fected by delays.

Troubleshoot or wargame the LGST site. Thor-oughly critique the site organization and test planprior to testing. Often problems can be identifiedand corrected prior to evaluation.

Site Preparation Considerations

Ensure that all evaluators are qualified as LCEs,since they are solely responsible for the prepara-tion of their stations.

Assign LCEs in advance, and ensure they under-stand the criteria of their stations.

6-2 MCWP 3-14.1

WAITING AREA

STATION 7

STATION 5/STATION 6

STATION 1/STATION 2 STATION 3/STATION 4

Figure 6-1. Example of an LGST Site Layout.

Ensure LCEs are familiar with the task, condi-tions, and standards of their stations.

Ensure all equipment and administration materialsare present and in working order at each station.

Ensure that pretest preparation for each station iscomplete, to include the brief each crewmemberreceives on details regarding conditions and stan-dards of each task.

Prior to conducting the LGST, thenoncommissioned officer in charge (NCOIC) ofthe LGST site issues a site brief to personnel be-ing tested.

Ensure evaluators are prepared to maintain notesto assist in the critique and debrief of each crew-member immediately after their evaluation.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 6-3

(reverse blank)

The high cost of ammunition and overcommit-ment of available training areas makes the use oftraining devices increasingly important. Trainingdevices can enhance performance in all levels ofgunnery training by simulating the conditions re-quired for mastering, reinforcing, or executinggunnery skills. Some aspects of gunnery can bestbe evaluated with the use of training devices. Forexample, some exercises that evaluate gunnersighting skills are best accomplished by usingtraining devices.

Some of the described training devices may beavailable through the local training and audio vis-ual support center (TAVSC). Some may need to

be manufactured locally. The using unit is respon-sible for developing, purchasing, and maintaininglocally manufactured devices.

7001. LAV-25 Turret TrainerThe LAV-25 turret trainer is a classroom trainingdevice (fig. 7-1) for teaching, maintaining, andevaluating basic turret operation, conduct of fire,and fire control skills. This trainer enables mastergunners to use preprogrammed scenarios or tocreate scenarios that aid in accomplishing unittraining goals. The turret trainer can be used in allphases of training as a reinforcement tool. Defi-ciencies identified in training can be corrected in

Chapter 7

Training Devices

Figure 7-1. LAV-25 Turret Trainer.

the controlled classroom environment of the turrettrainer.

The LAV-25 turret trainer should not be usedalone to accomplish training goals. Because of itslimitations, the turret trainer is best used as a sup-plemental tool to train or reinforce specificgunnery-related skills. Information on the use andcare of the LAV-25 turret trainer can be obtainedin Naval Training System Command (NTSC)P-5603, Light Armored Vehicle (LAV-25) Train-ing System Turret Trainer Device 17B19.

7002. Precision Gunnery System

The precision gunnery system (PGS) is a vehicle-mounted training device that assists the crew ingaining and improving proficiency in gunneryskills without expending live ammunition. Gun-nery and tactical training can be conducted any-where that eye-safe laser firing is permitted. ThePGS provides the crew with visual and sound ef-fects to accurately simulate real firing conditions.The PGS —

Simulates firing of the vehicle’s main gunand the coaxially mounted machine gun.Simulates vehicle firing and ammunition ef-fects on targets.Provides full fire control interface to enablethe vehicle operator to train using normal en-gagement techniques.Provides gunnery training capabilities using aclass 3A (conditionally eye-safe) laser.Provides interoperability and compatibilitywith other gunnery simulation systems.Provides panel gunnery training, targettracking, scaleable target capability, andcombat training in a realistic environmentwith immediate feedback.Simulates visible effect of the main gun andcoaxially mounted machine gun firing, in-clude sensing.Provides all mission information in a formthat can be downloaded by computer andanalyzed for after action reviews.

Provides the following firing sound effectsover the vehicle intercom system:

Main gun firing signature.Coax firing signature.Hit indication.Ammunition loading. Tracks the numberof rounds fired to force the crew to uploadonce the initial upload is fired.System error indication.

7003. M240 as a SubcaliberDevice

The M240 coaxially mounted machine gun can beused to fire 1/10, 1/5, 1/2, and full scale ranges.The M240 coax requires 4,800 meters of impactarea. If using the coax with a single-shot solenoidor the fire control box, crews can accomplish thesame results as using the M16A2 with the subcali-ber device, without having to mount and zero theLAV-25 subcaliber device. An additional benefitof using the M240 is that with increased rangesthe trajectory of the 7.62mm tracer round is visi-ble. This allows accomplishment of limited preci-sion gunnery aiming training on 1/2 to full scaleranges. The M240 coaxially mounted machinegun can also be used when validating ranges orrunning gunnery table 13. The significantly lowercost of the 7.62mm round, as opposed to the25mm, gives the unit an option and an advantagewhen intracrew coordination or tacticalconsiderations outweigh full-caliber gunneryperformance.

7004. LAV-25 Subcaliber TrainingDevice

The LAV-25 subcaliber training device is a mountthat fixes either the M16A2 or the visual aimingdevice (VAD) to the weapons system. (See fig.7-2.) The subcaliber device’s construction allowsmaster gunners to precisely evaluate the sightingskills used by the gunner. The ability to use sub-caliber devices allows units to conduct scaledrange training within smaller range impact areas.The LAV-25 subcaliber device is connected to thefire control system of the LAV-25 by the fire con-trol box.

7-2 MCWP 3-14.1

The fire control box is used for all subcaliber de-vices employed and is mounted on top of the con-trol display assembly (CDA) by thumbscrews.Connect the P5 connector on the fire control boxto the J8 terminal on the power display assembly(PDA). Disconnect the cable from the M240 sole-noid connector. Connect the P3 and P4 connec-tors from the fire control box to the appropriateconnectors from the M240 solenoid connector.

a. M16A2 as a Subcaliber DeviceWhen using the M16A2, the LAV-25 subcaliberdevice (complete with wiring harness) must beused to fix the weapon to the vehicle and to allowthe weapon to interface with the LAV-25 firecontrol system. The M16A2 can be used to fireeither 5.56mm or .22 caliber ammunition depend-ing on either the training requirements or the

impact area available for training. For safety, the.22 caliber requires a minimum of 1,400 meters ofimpact area, and the 5.56mm requires a minimumof 3,600 meters. Using the M16A2 subcaliber de-vice allows crews to fire on scaled ranges and toobserve the actual impact of the round by usingtracers.

Crews can practice battlesight gunnery, movingtarget gunnery, and fire adjustment without thecost or range restrictions of full-caliber (25mm)ammunition. Crews cannot, however, practiceprecision gunnery skills because of the flat trajec-tory of the subcaliber rounds at the distance pa-rameters used. Although fire adjustment can bepracticed, the M16A2 will not simulate the burstsof the 25mm cannon. However, imaginative useof this training device will allow units to accom-plish a number of goals in the early stages of gun-nery densities.

(1) Firing 5.56mm. Use of 5.56mm ammunitionis recommended if the impact area to support it isavailable. Use tracer rounds to get the full trainingbenefit from this device. Wear and tear from firinglarge numbers of tracer ammunition must be con-sidered to protect the rifle’s serviceability.

(2) Firing .22 Caliber. To fire .22 caliber am-munition, the bolt and carrier of the M16A2 mustbe replaced by the .22 caliber rimfire adapter. TheM261 conversion kit (see fig. 7-3) includes onebolt adapter assembly and three magazine adapter

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 7-3

MOUNTING BRACKET

MI6A2 (SUPPLIED BY UNIT)

FIRING SOLENOID

Figure 7-2. LAV-25 SubcaliberTraining Device.

Figure 7-3. M261 Conversion Kit.

assemblies. When this device is used, the weaponis accurate up to 50 meters in the semiautomaticmode only.

Tracer rounds should be used for training exer-cises. Standard M16A2 magazines are requiredwhen using the M261. The magazine adapter as-semblies fit into the standard magazines.

Refer to TM 9-6920-363-12&P for the use andcare of the M261 conversion kit, and refer to TM43-0001-27 for authorized .22 caliber tracerammunition.

b. Visual Aiming DeviceThe VAD (fig. 7-4) is a low-powered lasermounted on the LAV-25 subcaliber training de-vice (fig. 7-5). The low-powered laser pulse is re-flected in either the continuous or flash mode onany white target surface. The laser is fixed-focused at 60 meters. In the flash mode, the laseris eye-safe at 0 meters. The VAD allows evalua-tors to rate tracking and aiming skills. To use theVAD, the LAV-25 subcaliber training device

mount (complete with wiring harness) must beused.

The VAD is the only precise means that the mas-ter gunner has to evaluate precision gunnery aim-ing skills. However, the VAD will not allowcrews to practice BOT, TOT, moving target, orfire adjustment techniques. This training deviceshould be restricted to achieving desired trainingresults and must be augmented by other devices.Refer to Army Regulation (AR) 385-63, chapter19 and appendix B, for the use of lasers on train-ing ranges.

c. Stout BoardThe stout board is an evaluation aid used in con-junction with the VAD. The stout board (fig. 7-6)allows crews to fire on scaled ranges or manipula-tion boards while providing the evaluators a pre-cise tool to evaluate the aiming techniques of thecrews. The board is a 2-feet by 6-feet sheet ofplywood or light metal coated with either a white

7-4 MCWP 3-14.1

ON-OFF SWITCH

BATTERY

VAD

1005V0726

BORE SIGHT ARBOR

Figure 7-4. Visual Aiming Device (VAD).

VAD

MOUNTINGBRACKET

Figure 7-5. Visual Aiming Device (VAD)Installed on Subcaliber Training Device.

or a retroreflective surface. The board is placed 1to 3 meters, on its self-supporting stand, in frontof the vehicle, and 1/2-inch markers are used tocorrespond with downrange targets. The stoutboard can be locally manufactured, but it is in-cluded in the subcaliber training device kit. Usinga sheet of plywood behind the reflective paper isstrongly recommended to keep the wind from ex-cessively moving the board and giving the evalua-tor erroneous results.

d. ZeroingRegardless of which subcaliber device is used, itmust be zeroed to the sight prior to use. Zeroingensures the subcaliber device is properly aimed bythat sight so the gunner hits where he aims.

(1) M16A2 With .22 Caliber or 5.56mm. Placea target 50 meters in front of the vehicle(50-100m for 5.56mm). The target should have acentered, well-defined aiming point visible to thegunner.

Connect the cable assembly (PN1005V0725) firstto the solenoid lead (PN1005V0720) and then tothe fire control box using the 90-degree connectorat the port marked M16A2.

(a) Using manual controls, lay the battlesightcircle on the aiming point and fire three rounds,re-laying the sight after each round.

(b) If the impact is on target, use the boresightknobs and adjust the battlesight circle to the cen-ter of the three-round shot group. If the impact isnot on target, go to step (d).

(c) Re-lay the weapon and repeat steps (a) and(b) until the impact is consistently on the aimingpoint.

(d) If the impacts are not on target, determinewhich side of the target the rounds are missing.The LAV-25 subcaliber device must be moved tocompensate for the error. To do this, loosen thedevice elevation and/or deflection wing screws

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 7-5

Figure 7-6. Stout Board.

and move the device toward the target. Fire checkrounds, repeating as necessary until the group ison the target.

(e) Repeat steps (a) and (b) until the subcaliberdevice is zeroed.

(2) Using the Visual Aiming Device. There aretwo methods used when zeroing the VAD: pointof aim and stout board. Use point of aim zeroingif the VAD is used to evaluate tracking skills or ifthe master gunner has determined that a singlepoint of the sight will be used (i.e., battlesightgunnery). Stout board zeroing is used wheneverthe stout board is used for evaluation. Connectthe cable assembly (PN1005V0725) first to theVAD lead (PN1005V0726) and then to the firecontrol box using the 90-degree connector at theport marked VAD.

(a) Point of Aim Method

1 Disconnect cable assembly from the VAD,and replace it with the ON/OFF switch.

2 Place the target (worm board, manipulationboard, etc.) at least 15 meters in front of the vehi-cle (optic focal point).

3 Place the laser in continuous mode and selectan aiming point for zeroing. Lay the battlesightcircle on the aiming point.

4 Adjust the VAD’s laser dot close (withingunner/vehicle commander sight picture) to theaiming point by adjusting the VAD in its mount.

5 Once the laser dot is close to the aimingpoint, adjust the sight to the dot by using the de-flection and elevation knobs on the M36 sight.

(b) Stout Board Method

1 Place stout board directly in front of the ve-hicle (1-2 meters) and ensure that a downrangetarget (scaled range, manipulation board, etc.) isestablished. Place laser in continuous mode.

2 Aim turret to the left, center, right, top, andbottom of the downrange target and fire the laserto determine if the laser dot is on the stout board.If the dot is not on the board, get a wider stoutboard or move the target farther from the vehiclewhile maintaining appropriate scale. Place the tur-ret to the center of the downrange target.

3 Adjust the LAV-25 subcaliber device usingdeflection and elevation bolts to point the laserroughly at the center of the stout board.

4 From the gunner/vehicle commander posi-tion, aim at the farthest left target. Squeeze andhold the trigger. An assistant at the stout boardwill place a marker on the stout board corre-sponding to that target.

5 Number each marker as it corresponds toeach target.

Note: Markers should be roughly the same size asthe laser dot for the most accurate evaluation ofcrews.

7-6 MCWP 3-14.1

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 7-7

(reverse blank)

LAV-25 crew evaluators (LCEs) are used by thetraining unit to evaluate all aspects of gunnery.From LGST through firing the qualification table,LCEs are used extensively in establishing and op-erating gunnery training and in evaluating crewproficiency in both individual skills and crew du-ties. Qualified LCEs make it possible for mastergunners to remain focused on their primary re-sponsibility of planning and overall supervisingunit training.

For LCEs to be effective in their duties, they mustbe properly trained. LCE training should be stan-dardized at the battalion level to ensure all battal-ion evaluations are of consistent quality. It is thebattalion master gunner’s responsibility to ensurethat standard training for LCEs is conducted. It isthe company master gunner’s responsibility to en-sure that personnel assigned as LCEs to battaliontraining are qualified.

Personnel used for training prospective LCEsshould be either master gunners or certified LCEs.The battalion master gunner should interviewtrainers to ensure that they possess the requiredskills—mental and communicative—to use thebattalion’s lesson plans for training.

8001. Prerequisites

Some common knowledge is required of person-nel receiving LCE training. If the personnel as-signed to receive training do not have anunderstanding of basic LAV-25 weapons, the taskof training them to evaluate proficient crews be-comes greater. The end product of the trainingmay be less proficiency than is required. Sincetraining time is valuable, the following prerequi-sites are recommended for prospective LCEs:

0313 corporal and above.

LGST qualification within last 3 months.Gunner or vehicle commander qualificationwithin last year.

The above prerequisites are recommended for thebest end product. Units that cannot provide per-sonnel meeting these requirements should nomi-nate the best qualified personnel. Nominations arebased on input from the chain of command andthe master gunner, but the commander makes thefinal decision.

8002. Certification

Candidates that complete LCE training are certi-fied by their command to evaluate all gunnerytraining. Training must cover the unit’s entiregunnery program. Determination for certificationshould be based on each individual’s ability tosuccessfully complete performance evaluations

comprehensive. Successful results should ensurethat candidates have mastered all topics and canwork unsupervised in their duties as LCEs.

The abilities to work unsupervised and to adhereto the standards are highly important. LCEs maywork as external evaluators throughout the con-duct of their duties. If the candidate cannot under-take these duties without supervision, or cannotadhere to the standards, the evaluation renderedfor an external unit may be suspect.

Certification of LCEs should be conducted on aregular basis to ensure that units have qualifiedpersonnel to evaluate training as turnover occurs.Certification lasts a period of 1 year from issue.Recertification can be accomplished by writtenexamination. Qualified LCEs need not attend LCEtraining to be recertified unless there are new

Chapter 8

LAV-25 Crew Evaluator Training

training events. Qualified LCEs should receiveonly the new training. It is important for the bat-talion master gunner to maintain LCE training re-cords in order to track an individual’squalifications and currency.

Training recommended for LCE certification islisted below according to the method by whichthe LCE is evaluated.

Performance Evaluation

LGST.Turret trainer. Preliminary gunnery.Basic gunnery.Sustainment gunnery.Training devices.

After-action review techniques.Target acquisition process.

Written Evaluation

LGST.Turret trainer.Preliminary gunnery.Basic gunnery.Sustainment gunnery.Intermediate gunnery.Advanced gunnery.

LCE training should concentrate on the evaluationof training. It is a “train the trainers” program.Any other training requirements included in theunit’s gunnery plan should be included as subjectsfor LCE training.

8-2 MCWP 3-14.1

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 8-3

New crewmembers require an initial period of ba-sic gunnery training on the LAV-25. Preliminarygunnery introduces the basic skills associated withLAV-25 gunnery. This preliminary gunnery train-ing allows the new crewmember to reach a basicproficiency level and helps identify additionaltraining requirements.

Preliminary gunnery teaches the skills necessaryto acquire, lay on, range to, and track targets dur-ing good and limited visibility conditions. Trainingin these skills is done through exercises in weap-ons manipulation, target acquisition, range deter-mination, passive and thermal sight employment,smoke employment, and pintle-mount machinegun employment.

9001. Weapons ManipulationTraining

Manipulation training teaches new crewmemberswho will act as vehicle commanders and gunnersto rapidly lay the weapon on and track targets

over various types of terrain. Manipulation is acombination of eye-hand coordination and rein-forcement training. There are two parts to ma-nipulation training: gun lay and tracking.

a. Gun LayThe purpose for gun lay training is to developskills that allow the gunner and vehicle com-mander to quickly lay the turret on target andmove rapidly from target to target. Emphasis is onspeed and accuracy of the lay. The evaluation canbe done with the visual aiming device (VAD) ifdesired. Figure 9-1 depicts a manipulation boardused for training.

A typical manipulation board is constructed ofplywood, paper, or even paint on a nearby walland is placed 20 meters in front of the vehicle.This allows a 200 mil change in elevation and de-flection between targets. At the discretion of thecommander, any properly scaled and visible targetcan be used.

Chapter 9

Preliminary Gunnery Training Exercises

Figure 9-1. Manipulation Board Training Setup.

20m/65 FT DISTANCE

VEHICLE LINE

BASE OF TARGET

3 FT 6 IN

TARGET

3 FT 3 IN(HEIGHT)

6 FT 3 IN(HEIGHT)

3 FT 6 IN

2 FT 6 IN

5 FT 9 IN (HEIGHT)

1 FT 9 IN(HEIGHT)

6 FT 9 IN(HEIGHT)

2 FT

1 2 3 4 5

b. Tracking (Snake Board)In tracking exercises, the training crewmembermoves the sight reticle along a predetermined pathat various speeds corresponding to target speed.The path requires the crewmember to make cor-rections in elevation to simulate the target travel-ing over different types of terrain. Emphasis is onaccuracy at each of the speeds listed. The ultimategoal is for the crewmember to be able to success-fully track a target moving 25 miles per hour.Crewmembers should master the track at slowerspeeds before increasing to faster speeds. Figure9-2 depicts a snake board.

Manipulation tracking lines simulate the track of amoving target for a distance of 400 meters. Theactual length of the lines, the width of the lines,and the width between the lines is scaleable anddepends on the LAV-25 distance to the snakeboard. Once you have determined the range (thescale), use table 9-1 to develop the snake board.Snake boards are locally manufactured by the us-ing unit.

Evaluation is accomplished either by using theVAD zeroed to the board and physically watchingthe gunner’s track or by watching the gunner’strack through the commander’s sight. Table 9-2(page 9-3) is a sample score sheet used for evalu-ating training with the snake board.

9002. Target Acquisition Training

Target acquisition training teaches the LAV-25crewmember to rapidly acquire and designate tar-gets. To be effective, all conditions—stationaryand moving targets, day and night conditions, aswell as single and multiple target situations—aredepicted.

Target acquisition training may be conductedalong with range determination training and pas-sive and thermal sight training.

The unit designs the acquisition exercise to meetthe needs of the crewmembers being trained. Ini-tial screening and monitoring progress will helpunits to determine what level of acquisition train-ing is required.

Scoring is based on the time the target is exposedto the crewmember until the crewmember ac-quires the target. The evaluator can serve as gun-ner and allow the crewmember to acquire targetsand lay the turret on target.

9-2 MCWP 3-14.1

STOP START

START STOP

STOP

STOP START

START

STOP START

START STOP

STOP START

START STOP

seconds 40 km/h) (36 ml/h 25 seconds60 km/h) (24 ml/h 15 seconds100 km/h) (8 ml/h 5

CYCLETRACKING SPEED TARGET

Figure 9-2. Example of a Snake Board.

Table 9-1. LAV to Target Distance.

LAV-25-To-Tracking Line

Distance(meters)

Length of Target Line

(meters)

Width BetweenParallel Lines(millimeters)

5 1.67 14.710 3.33 29.415 5.00 44.120 6.67 58.825 8.33 73.530 10.00 88.235 11.67 102.940 13.33 117.645 15.00 132.350 16.67 147.0

Target acquisition training should be conductedfrom both a stationary and a moving vehicle, andit may also include vehicle identification and/orfire commands.

9003. Range DeterminationTraining

Range determination training and exercises equipthe crewmember with the skills to rapidly and ac-curately estimate target ranges. This exerciseteaches crewmembers range determination tech-niques when using binoculars, the sight reticle,and the naked eye. All training should be in accor-dance with the procedures outlined in chapter 3and appendix B.

A range determination exercise can be conductedwith a target acquisition exercise. As each target

is exposed, the crewmember estimates range witheither the naked eye, the sight, or binoculars.

Scoring is based on time and accuracy. Time be-gins upon acquisition and ends when the crew-member announces the range. The crewmembershould be accurate to within 100 meters in 10seconds.

9004. Passive and Thermal SightEmployment

The LAV-25 is equipped with both passive andthermal sights for target acquisition in reducedvisibility. Exercises should teach the crewmemberproper acquisition techniques for both sights.Training includes operation of the sights and in-struction on vehicle identification with the sights.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 9-3

Running Time 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 Total Distance

Evaluator/LAV-25

CommanderPower25mm

180

* X X

Power25mm

50

Power25mm

40

Manual25mm

180

Manual25mm

50

Manual25mm

40

*The gunner was tracking a target at 2,200 meters using the 25mm and turret power ON. An X indicates time frames when the vehicle was off tar-get at the 50-second and 150-second point as called out by evaluator/LAV-25 commander.

Table 9-2. Sample Score Sheet.

The crewmember must properly identify thermal-ized targets. Emphasis is on speed and accuracy.

9005. Smoke Employment

Smoke employment exercises teach crewmembersto properly use the M257 smoke grenade launch-ers. Training includes principles of smoke employ-ment and duties of the driver when usingprotective smoke. The exercise can be conductedon any available range area. The crewmemberdemonstrates proper employment of smoke in re-sponse to a threat. The crewmember also demon-strates the driving techniques required whenemploying smoke.

9006. Pintle-Mount Machine GunEmployment

Pintle-mount machine gun employment teachescrewmembers the proper techniques used whenengaging targets with the M240 E1 pintle-mountmachine gun. Training should include the princi-ples and methods of employment for the weapon.The exercise can be conducted on any machinegun range. To ensure crewmembers become fa-miliar with the use of the M240 E1, the exerciseshould include targets at various ranges and ofvarious configurations. The principles and meth-ods of employment are covered in detail inMCWP 3-15.1, Machine Guns and Machine GunGunnery.

9-4 MCWP 3-14.1

Live firing exercises require establishing or usinglive fire ranges. These ranges may be permanentor temporary, depending on the existence of localfacilities and the type of live fire training required.A permanent LAV-25 firing range is normally partof a designated base range or facility. Each rangehas a surface danger area diagram, which is a mapof the area and ground, designating a firing line ormaneuver area and safety limits. Each range alsohas established procedures for its operation.Ranges are designed for a specific purpose—typesof weapons, ammunition, and particular firing ta-bles. These ranges usually cannot be modified orused for other types of firing without approval.Normally, the base or facility range control officeris the approving authority.

Temporary ranges are established to fill specificunit training requirements not resident on thatbase or facility. These requirements may rangefrom subcaliber ranges to a special live fire exer-cise range. Requests to establish a temporary fir-ing range must be accompanied by a surfacedanger area diagram, informing the approvingauthority of the specific requirements and desiredarea.

This chapter covers general guidelines for estab-lishing, organizing, and operating live fire ran-ges. 10001. Establishing an LAV-25Live Fire Range

Before selecting a site for a scaled or a full-caliberrange, prepare a detailed map and perform groundreconnaissance of the available firing areas.

a. Site Selection

The range selected for live fire training must belarge enough to accommodate all weapons sys-tems to be used during training, the type ofammunition to be fired, and the scenario require-ments of the table(s) to be fired. Realistic condi-tions not available within the selected terrainshould be constructed to enhance training. Thefollowing are examples:

Defilade stationary firing position.Sufficient maneuver areas and enough tar-gets to provide multiple firing points and tar-get locations.Targets arranged in realistic arrays and, ifpossible, unmarked using berms.

b. Firing Tables for Cannon, 25mmGun, M242The ballistic data in firing tables for LAV-25 am-munition is used to develop or modify surfacedanger area diagrams.

(1) Using ballistic characteristics combined withknowledge of the fire control system allows thecrews to use the LAV-25 weapons more effec-tively. (See table 10-1 for an extract of a ballisticfiring table; FT 25-A-2, Firing Tables for Can-non, 25mm Gun, M242).

(2) The following terms explain the data in allgunnery firing tables. Data columns may differslightly among various rounds of ammunition andtypes of weapons.

(a) Range. Weapon-to-target distance.

(b) Superelevation. To ensure that the projectilehits a target at a given range, induce into the firecontrol system additional elevation to raise theballistic flight of a given projectile.

Chapter 10

Live Fire Ranges

(c) DX/DSE. The number of meters a 1-mil ele-vation change makes in linear range, on theground, at a given range and superelevation.

(d) DH/DX. The change in height (in meters) of aprojectile for a 100-meter change in linear rangeor on the ground at a given range.

(e) Drift. The number of mils the projectilemoves to the right of the gun-target line becauseof the spin caused by the rifling.

(f) Time of Flight. The amount of time it takes aprojectile to reach a target at a selected range.

(g) 10 km/h Cross Wind Deflection. Generally, around is most unstable when it exits the muzzle.This effect of wind deflection assumes a 10 km/hcross wind. The correction is applied into thewind. When wind speed is different from 10 km/h,the point of aim must be estimated.

(h) Maximum Ordinate. The maximum height theprojectile travels above the line of sight at a givenrange.

(i) Range to Maximum Ordinate. The range atwhich the maximum ordinate is reached. Out tothis range, the projectile is ascending; beyond thisrange, the projectile is descending. The range tothe maximum ordinate always occurs shortly be-yond half the target range.

(j) Angle of Fall. The number of mils betweenthe projectile’s trajectory at impact and the line ofsight.

(k) Remaining Velocity. Speed of the projectilein meters per second at a selected range.

c. Surface Danger Area DiagramLAV-25 units establishing ranges or modifyingexisting ranges must submit a surface danger areadiagram to the range control officer before firing.Surface danger area diagrams show rangeboundaries and safety features in overlay form,

10-2 MCWP 3-14.1

CARTRIDGE, APDS-T M791 MUZZLE VELOCITY, 1345M/S

RANGEMETERS

SUPERELEVATIONMILS

DX/DSEM/MIL

DH/DXM/100M

DRIFTMILS

TIME OF FLIGHTSECONDS

1600 5.1 262 0.6 0.1 1.3

1700 5.5 257 0.6 0.1 1.4

1800 5.9 252 0.7 0.1 1.5

1900 6.3 246 0.7 0.1 1.6

Table 10-1. Extract of Ballistic Firing Table.

CARTRIDGE, APDS-T M791 MUZZLE VELOCITY, 1345M/S

10KM/HCROSS WINDDEFLECTION

MILS

MAXIMUMORDINATEMETERS

RANGE TOMAXIMUMORDINATEMETERS

ANGLE OFFALLMILS

REMAININGVELOCITY

METERS/SECONDSRANGE

METERS0.2 0.9 564 4 1159 1100

0.2 1.1 617 4 1143 1200

0.2 1.4 669 5 1126 1300

0.2 1.6 723 5 1109 1400

including range limit markers for firing positions.FT 25-A-2, Firing Tables for Cannon, 25mmGun, M242 provides values for range, maximumordinates, and superelevation for each ammunitiontype required to construct a surface danger areadiagram. (See fig. 10-1.)

(1) Surface danger area diagrams on establishedranges should be modified when these ranges donot make maximum use of available terrain. Re-strictions and precautions for surface danger areadiagrams are found in AR 385-63, Policies andProcedures for Firing Ammunition for Training,

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 10-3

NON-EXPLOSIVE

EXPLOSIVE

NOT TO SCALE

NOT TO SCALE

DISTANCE X

DISTANCE X

RICOCHET AREA

DISPERSION AREA

AREA

LINE OF FIRE

IMPACTIZ

Y

AREA W

RICOCHET AREA

LINE OF FIRE

DISPERSION AREA

AREA A

IZ

AREA W

AREA B

IMPACT AREA

25 Y

Figure 10-1. Range Safety Fans for Explosive and Non-Explosive 25mm Ammunition.

Target Practice and Combat. When engagingground targets, distance X (maximum range) maybe reduced to a 15-degree elevation, provided thefiring elevation of the gun can be maintained atless than or equal to 15 degrees. (See table 10-2.)If the weapon cannot be controlled at or under 15degrees, such as might happen when firing whilemoving over rough terrain with inoperative stabi-lization, the maximum range (distance X) shouldbe used. Range at 15 degrees elevation is themaximum distance the projectile can travel whenfired at an elevation of 15 degrees or less. Thisvalue was derived using data from the ballistic fir-ing tables and ricochet data..(2) When laser range finders (LRFs) are used, anadditional buffer area (C) may be added. (See AR385-63, chapter 19 and SPAWARINST 5100.12.)Every object the laser beam strikes reflects en-ergy. In most cases, this energy is diffused and isnot hazardous. Remove mirrors, plastic or glass,or other flat mirror-like objects with a vertical ornear vertical surface in the target area that mightreflect the laser beam and cause injury. If this isimpractical, cover the surface with lusterless paintor some non-reflecting material, such as cloth orcardboard.

(3) In all cases, research range establishment re-quirements with the base or facility range controlpersonnel.

10002. Range and Training AreaReconnaissance

The range officer in charge (OIC) of firing, mastergunner, and company gunnery sergeant shouldpersonally conduct a reconnaissance and coordi-nate with range control before their unit occupiesa range or training area. It is not possible to listeverything checked during a reconnaissance, butthe following questions may be considered as aminimum:

Where are the routes to the range or trainingarea?How many vehicles can fire stationary ormoving course simultaneously?Are there hull-down defilade positions?

What control facility (tower) is available, andwhat is its condition?What communication hookups are availableto operate the range?Are range limit markers visible during theday, reduced visibility, and night firing?What barriers and guard posts need to beclosed and/or manned?Are surveyed boresight panels available?Who furnishes the targets, target supplies,and/or training devices used on the range?What requirements are necessary for targetoperators or target details?What ammunition can be used on the range?Has the range or training area been clearedof duds?Where are the following areas?

Ammunition pad.Firing line and maneuver areas.Barriers and guard posts.Range limits.Helipad.Aid station.Parking areas.Maintenance area.Head.Briefing and debriefing areas.Tower.

10003. Range and Training AreaPersonnel, Equipment, andLayout

Effectively planned and executed tactical exer-cises allow progressive training and proper unitevaluation. Administrative requirements for suc-cessfully planning and executing tactical trainingare found in AR 385-63, local range regulations,and unit SOPs. A range book that contains all theapplicable regulations and reference materials(e.g., range schedules, firing tables, gunnery ta-bles, maps, and range logs) is an invaluable toolthat the OIC of firing can use to achieve efficientrange operation.

10-4 MCWP 3-14.1

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 10-5

DIMENSIONS FOR M791, APDS-T, 25MM

IMPACTMEDIA

AREAA

METERS

AREAB

METERS

AREAW2

METERS

ANGLEY Z

DEGREES

DISTANCEX1

METERS

RICOCHETRANGE

METERS

15-DEGREEELEVATION

RANGEMETERS

Armor NA NA 1510 24 5 14572 7294 11550

Concrete NA NA 2208 34 5 14572 7622 11550

Earth NA NA 1466 18 5 14572 7402 11550

Water NA NA 263 06 5 14572 5665 11550

DIMENSIONS FOR M792, HEI-T, 25MM

IMPACTMEDIA

AREAA

METERS

AREAB

METERS

AREAW2

METERS

ANGLEY Z

DEGREES

DISTANCEX1

METERS

RICOCHETRANGE

METERS

15-DEGREEELEVATION

RANGEMETERS

Armor 300 400 1373 28 5 6379 5265 5241

Concrete 300 400 1290 27 5 6379 5071 5241

Earth 300 400 908 19 5 6379 4792 5241

Water 300 400 1047 19 5 6379 4823 5241

DIMENSIONS FOR M793, TP-T, 25MM

IMPACTMEDIA

AREAA

METERS

AREAB

METERS

AREAW2

METERS

ANGLEY Z

DEGREES

DISTANCEX1

METERS

RICOCHETRANGE

METERS

15-DEGREEELEVATION

RANGEMETERS

Armor NA NA 1373 28 5 6047 5265 5112

Concrete NA NA 1290 27 5 6047 5071 5112

Earth NA NA 9083 19 5 6047 4792 5112

Water NA NA 1047 19 5 6047 4823 5112

Table 10-2. Data for 25mm Ammunition.

1Distance X (maximum range) may be reduced to ricochet range when engaging ground targets at ranges up to 3,000meters from stationary firing positions. When firing from a moving vehicle over level terrain at ground targets up to3,000 meters, use the 15-degree elevation range. For armor impact medium, use whichever distance is greater(ricochet range or 15-degree elevation range). When firing on the move over rough terrain, use distance X.

2When firing at aerial targets and the gun elevation is greater than 15 degrees, the ricochet area is defined by area W,and angle Y is not required.

3Values listed for area W, angle Y, and ricochet range are the same as listed in the dimension for M792 since theM792 HEI-T projectile is ballistically similar to the M793, TP-T projectile.

a. Key Personnel and ResponsibilitiesThe following personnel are key to the conduct oflive fire range training.

(1) Officer in Charge of Firing. The OIC of fir-ing has overall responsibility for conducting train-ing safely and using facilities properly. The OICof firing should appoint a range safety officer(RSO), when required, who—

Helps perform safety responsibilities.Determines when it is safe to fire.Supervises the procedures for misfires, hang-fires, and cookoffs.Ensures that required communications areestablished and maintained.

The OIC of firing can also designate other assis-tants who are responsible for specific areas ofoperation.

(2) Range Safety Officer. The RSO is a com-missioned officer, warrant officer, or senior non-commissioned officer (SNCO) (E-6 or higher)who is weapons systems qualified. The RSO is theOIC of firing’s direct representative. The RSOwill not have any other responsibility during rangefiring other than performing the following duties:

Conducts a safety briefing to all hands beforeall live fire exercises.Enforces all safety regulations.Ensures that all ammunition is handled cor-rectly.Enforces smoking restrictions near vehicles,ammunition, petroleum, oil, and lubricants.Ensures that misfires are handled in accor-dance with AR 385-63 and the appropriateoperator’s manual.Investigates and reports accidents in accor-dance with all regulations.Ensures that weapons on live fire ranges arepointed towards the impact area at all times.Ensures that personnel are clear of the dan-ger area (except as authorized in AR 385-63or applicable regulations).

Checks all ammunition for suspended orrestricted lots using TB 9-1300-385, Muni-tions, Restricted or Suspended .Ensures that barriers and guards are in placebefore starting the exercise.Checks for proper identification and qualifi-cations and ensures transportation of medicalpersonnel, if used or required.Inspects and clears all weapons following thecompletion of fire.

(3) Master Gunner. The master gunner is thecommander’s gunnery technical advisor. The mas-ter gunner assists the commander and the staff inplanning, developing, and conducting gunnerytraining. The master gunner’s range dutiesinclude—

Preparing a surface danger area diagram andrange overlay, if required.Preparing scaled ranges if required.Organizing and setting up range firing ex-ercises.Ensuring that range firing exercises are prop-erly conducted.Coordinating target array and layout forrange firing and qualification.Establishing remedial training on site asneeded, by coordinating with the LCEs andplatoon sergeants to identify crew defici-encies.Ensuring that an effective LAV-25 crewevaluator program is implemented for stand-ardization.

(4) Company Gunnery Sergeant. The com-pany gunnery sergeant coordinates and supervisesthe various details and assists the OIC of firingand the RSO in operating the range or trainingarea.

(5) Ammunition NCO. The ammunition non-commissioned officer (NCO)—

Ensures that ammunition is accounted for bytype and lot, is correct for the scheduled

10-6 MCWP 3-14.1

firing, and is properly stored and secured onthe ammunition pad at the training area.Checks any ammunition resupply to be sureit is not restricted or suspended (verifies withRSO and TB 9-1300-385).Issues the correct type and number of rounds(as instructed by the master gunner) andkeeps a running inventory to cross-checkdaily expenditures turned in to the RSO.Ensures that the ammunition pad is main-tained in an orderly fashion and continuallypoliced of links, brass, and packagingmaterials.

(6) Target NCO. Where target NCOs are re-quired, their duties are to—

Ensure that targets are the type, color, andscale (if applicable) required by the table.Ensure that targets are in the proper locationon the range.Ensure that target detail is proficient in theoperation and troubleshooting proceduresfor all target mechanisms used.Ensure that the target detail has the requiredequipment and supplies and that preposi-tioned targets are available when needed.Ensure that there are enough spare targets,target mechanisms, batteries, patches, andother related equipment on the range ortraining site to support training.Report to the master gunner any mechanicalmalfunctions that require prompt replace-ment to continue firing.Ensure targets are properly thermalized asrequired in accordance with TC 25-8, Train-ing Ranges.

(7) LAV-25 Crew Evaluator. The LCE—

Enforces required safety precautions.Acts as an instructor during practice and re-medial training.Acts as an evaluator during qualification.Debriefs crew at completion of firing.Confers with the master gunner on any scor-ing discrepancy.

Maintains a log containing records of crewperformances.

(8) Fire-Fighting Detail. When a fire fightingdetail is needed, the following points should beconsidered:

Determine if range regulations allow for mili-tary personnel to fight fires that occur withinthe impact area.Availability of fire-fighting equipment.Designated vehicles for troops and equip-ment.Access routes to the impact or target areas.

(9) Corpsman. The corpsman must—

Be assigned a safety vehicle and driver.Know how to get to the nearest aid stationor hospital.Know radio telephone operating proceduresto use during an air medical evacuation.Have an identification card (medical) or adisposition form from the commander statingthat he is a qualified corpsman.Be properly equipped for emergencies.

(10) Radio Telephone Operators. These radioor telephone operators maintain communicationsas required during an exercise.

(11) Platoon Sergeant. The platoon sergeant’sduties include, but are not limited to, the fol-lowing:

Ensuring that turret and gun preventativemaintenance checks and services have beenperformed prior to occupying the range.Ensuring that pre-dry fire and dry fire checkshave been done before occupying the range.Supervising the LAV-25 crews to ensurethat proper boresighting and zeroing are ac-complished to standard.Coordinating with the master gunner on theconduct of fire.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 10-7

Ensuring that vehicles are staged at the re-quired places at the appropriate times andare ready to fire when required.Reviewing the platoon records to ensure thatthe guns are capable of firing; i.e., roundcount will not inhibit firing because of serv-ice life wear.

b. Range EquipmentThe master gunner and company gunnery ser-geant should make sure that the required equip-ment is on hand for the following exercises.

(1) Gunnery and Tactical Exercises

Current gunnery standards for the table be-ing conducted.Targets and target operating and controlmechanisms.Target repair equipment.Range regulations.Flashlights for scorers.Batteries for lights and radios.Recovery means.Evaluator communications.Briefing tent.Scorecards.Stopwatches.Binoculars.Night vision devices with batteries.Field telephones, as required.Fire-fighting equipment (if required).Vehicles for—

Target and scoring detail.Fire-fighting detail (if required).Backup aid vehicle.Safety officers (moving range).

Generators to power light sets.Equipment for concurrent training.Boresight equipment.Other table of equipment (TE) and expend-able supplies.

All other required regulations, SOPs, maps,and overlays.FM radio sets and antenna GRC-292, ifrequired.

(2) Gunnery ExercisesRange flag.Range lights or lanterns.Flag sets for vehicles and tower.Compass for marking round(s) out of impactarea.Ballistic firing tables.

(3) Tactical Exercises

Multiple integrated laser equipment system(MILES) equipment.Opposing force (OPFOR) equipment.OPFOR personnel.

c. Range and Training Area Layout forGunnery ExercisesA well-organized gunnery range provides maxi-mum firing and training time. If ranges areplanned and organized and all items are collectedbefore moving to the range, firing can commenceon time and terminate in ample time to allow anorderly range clearance. (See fig. 10-2.)

(1) A battalion-level range operation SOP savestime and energy for the firing unit. Company mas-ter gunners may extract any necessary informationfrom the battalion SOP that pertains to range op-erations at the company level. The SOP should in-clude guidelines for occupying the range anddescribe actions to be taken for hand-over of spe-cific tasks, such as the following:

Coordinating with maintenance contactteams.Operating moving targets.Replacing targets.Repairing target mechanisms.Fighting range fires (if applicable).Determining range scenario.Conducting range brief/range safety brief.

10-8 MCWP 3-14.1

Firing orders.Policing the range.Departing the range.Breaking down ammunition.Moving vehicles to the ammunition point andto the ready line.

(2) Moving ranges have a maneuver box notfound on stationary ranges. (See fig. 10-3.) Ifcourse roads are available within the training area,they should be used. The vehicle commandershould also use available terrain for masking thevehicle’s position. Master gunners frequently haveto modify maneuver boxes based on what type ofengagement is fired. Maneuver boxes are used toallow the vehicle crew to acquire, range, and de-stroy targets arranged in a realistic array as out-lined on appropriate gunnery tables. Themaximum distance the vehicle could travel andstill have the target exposed is the length of themaneuver box. Maneuver boxes must be clearlydefined and adhered to (start and stop points).This area never extends or surpasses the exposureand engagement times because surface danger

area diagrams correspond to exact maneuver boxlength.

(3) To calculate the maneuver box length, theaverage vehicle speed for the course and targetexposure time must be known. The calculationprocedure is shown in the following example:

Vehicle Speed: 12 miles per hourTarget Exposure: 42 seconds

Convert the vehicle speed to meters per second(multiply the vehicle speed by the constant0.4471416):

12 (miles per hour) x 0.4471416 = 5.3656992 (meters per second)

Calculate the maneuver box length (multiply themeters per second by the target exposure):

5.3656992 x 42 (target exposure in seconds) = 225.35936 meters

The maneuver box length is 225 meters.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 10-9

MOVING TARGETROUTE MOVING

TARGET MOVING TARGETROUTE

STATIONARYTARGET

3,000

2,500

2,000

1,500

1,000

500

FIRING POSITION

Figure 10-2. Sample Layout of an LAV-25 Stationary Firing Range.

Note: If the first number after the decimal pointis 5 or more, round up to the next whole number.

d. Range and Training Area Layout forTactical TrainingTactical training can be conducted either onranges or in training areas, whichever is avail-able. Most of the preparation that goes into agunnery exercise also applies in tactical training.

(1) The configuration of the course depends onthe local terrain. Each task must be fitted to a spe-cific piece of terrain, so tasks will probably not beencountered in the order in which they appear in aparticular table.

(2) As in gunnery tables, tactical tables need arange operation SOP that saves time and energyfor the firing unit. The SOP should include guide-lines for setting up the tactical range or training

10-10 MCWP 3-14.1

CEASE FIRECLEAR ALLWEAPONS

INCOMING VEHICLE TARGETSTATIONARY VEHICLE TARGETE-TYPE SILHOUETTE

AMMUNITION POINT

RETU

RN R

OUT

E

OUTER LANE MARKERS

OUTER LANE MARKERS

1,000-2,000m

1,400-1,800m

1,400-1,800m

1,800-2,000m

1,600-2,000m

1,80

0-2,

000m

600-800m1,100-1,400m

100-

300m

1,60

0-1,8

00m

1,30

0-1,

400m

1,00

0-2,

000m

600-

800m

1,20

0-14

00m

1,30

0-1,

400m

Figure 10-3. Sample Layout of an LAV-25 Moving Range.

area and should describe actions to be taken forspecific tasks, such as—

Coordinating with the maintenance contactteam (for MILES devices).Testing MILES equipment.Setting up a tactical table layout based onMETT-T and table standards.Briefing OPFOR and controller personnel onduties for each engagement.Test firing weapons (Hoffman signature de-vice and machine guns with blank adapters).Moving vehicles to the start point and issu-ing fragmentary orders to initiate movementdown the course.Conducting after action reports followingeach engagement and assembling LAV-25crews (resetting MILES equipment).Controlling movement on the course to pre-vent the congestion of LAV-25s or platoons.Policing the range or training area.Departing the range or training area.

e. TargetsFull scale targets should be of the same shape,size, and color as the threat targets they represent.TC 25-8 describes targets, target mechanisms,and target control in detail.

(1) Hard Targets (Live Fire). When availableand where ricochets do not present safety haz-ards, hard targets are preferred when firing 25mmservice ammunition. Old tank hulls and turrets,APCs, and wheeled vehicles make good hard tar-gets. When filled with sand or dirt, these hard tar-gets withstand many hits.

(2) Soft Targets (Live Fire). Soft targets aremade from target cloth or wood by the unit orrange control activity. These targets should be ol-ive drab. TC 25-8 describes targets, target mecha-nisms, and target sizes.

f. FlagsOn all ranges, each vehicle displays flags to visu-ally indicate the vehicle’s weapon status. The fol-lowing flags will be used:

(1) Red. LAV-25 is engaging in firing. Weaponsare loaded, pointing at the target area. Weaponarm switch is on fire and manual safety is off.

(2) Green. All weapons are cleared and ele-vated. Weapon arm switch is on safe and manualsafety is off. There is no ammunition onboard thevehicle.

(3) Yellow and Red (or Green). Yellow indi-cates there is a malfunction on the vehicle. Thisflag is used in conjunction with the red or greenflag to specify more information.

(a) Yellow and Red. The LAV-25 has a malfunc-tion or misfire. Weapons are pointing at the targetarea and are not clear, or ammunition is on board.(The weapon arm switch is on safe and manualsafety is on; if not, notify range safety personnel.)

(b) Yellow and Green. The LAV-25 has a mal-function and all weapons are clear. The weaponarm switch is on safe and manual safety is on.There is no ammunition onboard.

(4) Red and Green. The LAV-25 is preparingto fire or the crew is conducting a nonfiring exer-cise. The 25mm gun feeder may be loaded but thebolt is in the sear position, and the weapon armswitch is on safe and manual safety is on. Thecoax machine gun may be loaded, bolt to the rear,and manual safety on. Ammunition is eitherstowed onboard or loaded in the ready boxes.

g. Range ControlThe range control officer is responsible for the co-ordination and safe conduct of range activity forall units using range facilities. Normally, unit lead-ers are required to receive a range briefing fromthe range control officer before occupying arange. Schedule this briefing promptly to preventany delay in training. Range control should alsoprovide a set of local range regulations andpolicies.

h. Range CommunicationsThe installation range officer normally controls allranges by wire and radio communication. Thecontrol system is used for obtaining clearance to

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 10-11

fire, making reports, coordinating, and callingcease fires.

The OIC of firing controls all training activities,including firing, on that particular range by thebest means available and always has a backupsystem.

Wire is the preferred means of communication fortarget operators and personnel in the impact areaor, in the case of tactical training, with the OP-FOR. In all cases, the OIC of firing plans abackup communication system to prevent delay.

10004. Range Operations

A plan must be developed for conducting LAV-25combat training. This plan usually varies with thetables to be trained. The plan should reflect con-sideration of the following areas.

a. AssetsTraining can be conducted either by battalion orby company.

(1) Battalion Training. The battalion signs for,administers, and clears the range or training site.The training company assists in range police andother administrative duties. This allows the com-pany to concentrate on gunnery, tactics, andmaintenance. Advanced gunnery tables requiresupport from outside of the battalion because ofthe magnitude of the target array and number ofpersonnel needed to control the range. The tacti-cal tables should not require assets from sourcesother than the battalion.

(2) Company Training. The company signs for,administers, and clears the range or training area.The company provides the necessary support indetails, RSO, range guards, and administrativepersonnel.

b. Opening the Range or Occupyingthe Training Site (Sequence of Events)Key personnel perform the following tasks:

(1) The OIC of firing—

Moves to the range or training site beforethe unit arrives.Checks communications and, for live fire ex-ercises, ensures that backup communicationsare available.Briefs the RSO, evaluators, and units to betrained.Ensures that range equipment is present andoperational.Ensures that the correct range or firing posi-tion is occupied.Ensures that the impact area is clear of unau-thorized personnel and that safety meas- uresdirected by the installation commander havebeen taken (use of barriers to deny accessinto the impact area and positioning of roadguards).Ensures that clearance to fire has been ob-tained from range control.Ensures personal awareness of the surfacedanger zone for each ammunition and eachfiring position.

(2) The company gunnery sergeant—

Sets up additional training areas.Supervises ammunition, targets, and adminis-trative details.

(3) The RSO—

Ensures that barriers are closed and/or rangeguards are posted and briefed of their duties.Ensures that no live ammunition is presenton a nonfiring range.Inspects storage, handling, and lot numberfor restricted or suspended ammunition.Inspects corpsmen and vehicles.Gives safety briefing to everyone before alllive-fire exercises.Ensures personal awareness of the surfacedanger zone for each ammunition and eachfiring position.

10-12 MCWP 3-14.1

(4) The master gunner—

Gives final briefing to the LCEs.Ensures that the concurrent training is set upproperly.Moves to the range or training site beforethe firing unit.Briefs the OIC of firing and RSO on the sur-face danger zone for each ammunition andeach firing position.Briefs the unit on the conduct of fire, and thetasks, conditions, and standards for each fir-ing evolution.

c. During the ExerciseThe following actions must be performed:

(1) The OIC of firing—

Maintains all required communication.Ensures that personnel do not move to orfrom the small-arms or crew-served rangefiring lines without permission from the OICof firing or RSO.Ensures that materiel is not removed fromthe firing line without permission from theOIC of firing or RSO.Monitors the surface danger zone to ensurethat it remains clear.Ensures impact area observation to assureprojectiles land within prescribed limits.Ensures misfires are handled in accordancewith procedures established for the weapon.Ensures weapons are cleared and checkedduring temporary suspensions of firing.Maintains records (type of ammunition fired,number of rounds fired, number of duds withapproximate locations).Ensures firing is promptly halted when anunsafe act is observed or reported.

(2) The company gunnery sergeant—

Supervises all work details.

Controls the movement of personnel fromfiring positions to additional training andother administrative areas.

(3) The RSO—

Ensures that misfires are handled in accor-dance with safety regulations.Observes for any safety violation.Clears each LAV-25 upon completion ofexercise.Ensures all vehicle firing status flags are dis-played as per paragraph 10003f.

(4) The master gunner—

Ensures that range firing is conducted in ac-cordance with the appropriate gunnery table.Ensures remedial training is conducted byLCEs on site as needed.Ensures that correct zeroing is accom-plished.Supervises the LCEs.Assists safety personnel to clear weapons,when required.Assists maintenance personnel to trouble-shoot and correct fire control malfunctions,when required.Assists the commander to determine or ver-ify alibi conditions.

d. Closing the RangeThe following tasks must be performed.

(1) The OIC of firing —

Notifies range control that firing has ter-minated.Debriefs the unit personnel.Ensures that the range or training area iscleared in accordance with local regulationsand SOPs.Ensures all weapons are cleared. (The vehi-cle commanders will clear their weapons andthe RSO will check them.)

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 10-13

Reports the number of duds and their ap-proximate location in accordance with localprocedures.

(2) The RSO—

Checks each vehicle or weapon system toensure it is cleared.Ensures all firing status flags are displayed asper paragraph 10003f.Gives OIC of firing an ammunition expendi-ture report.

(3) The master gunner—

Coordinates with range personnel for repairof any targets or equipment.Gathers appropriate computer and scoringdata.Debriefs the LCEs.Debriefs the unit leaders.

(4) The ammunition NCOIC—

Gives an ammunition expenditure report tothe RSO.Ensures that no munitions are removed fromthe range by anyone other than authorizedpersonnel.Ensures that all unexpended ammunition isaccounted for and staged for pickup by am-munition personnel.Accounts for all misfires or duds and ensuresturn in to ammunition personnel.

e. Tips for Training on the RangeThe following tips are given for conducting train-ing on the range.

(1) Brief Key Personnel. Before moving to thetraining site, brief key personnel in setting up thesite and in reacting to unusual circumstances. Thiskeeps downtime to a minimum and prevents wast-ing time and resources.

(2) Start on Time. Have the training site readyand communications set up early so that crews

can begin firing on time. Plan operations so thatthere are no interruptions to training for coursemaintenance until a prearranged time or normalshutdown time, which is posted in the range dailybulletin. This means there must be sufficient tar-gets available to complete all training before thescheduled break.

(3) Use Range Marker Lights (Live Fire). Donot fire at night without a light and a thermalrange marker on the range safety markers. If therange marker lights fail, all ranges that use thesame impact area must be closed. To prevent this,consider placing two lights on each range safetymarker, ensuring that a backup light is available.Make sure that lights are in good operating condi-tion and batteries are fresh.

(4) Plan Illumination. Register weaponsproviding indirect illumination before dark. Forease of control and reduction of support require-ments, locate indirect-fire weapons on the samerange with firing vehicles (ammunition pads, OICof firing, safety officers, transportation, and com-munications).

(5) Keep a Log. The OIC of firing maintains anaccurate log. A log keeps the OIC of firing betterinformed of dry-firing times, live firing times, andother important events. At a minimum, the logshould contain—

When the unit occupied the range or trainingsite.When permission to fire was received fromrange control for live fire.Who gave the permission to fire.When the range was in a cease-fire status.When the range was reopened.Compass azimuth to any stray impacts andwhen they were fired.When the unit cleared and departed therange.

(6) Brief Guards. Have a plan to check andchange guards frequently. Also, make sure thatthe guards are briefed on their duties and their im-portance and ensure that they understand theirinstructions.

10-14 MCWP 3-14.1

(7) Be Prepared for Fires. During dry seasons,there is always a danger that tracer illuminationmay cause grass and forest fires. Be prepared toquickly control the situation. It may be necessaryto reduce the number of tracer rounds in linkedammunition, if allowed.

(8) Police the Area. Keep the area policed at alltimes. A clean training site reduces the chance ofinjury, especially at night. Police continuously toavoid spending valuable time cleaning up afterfiring.

(9) Brief Visitors. Have a plan for briefing visi-tors and designate a briefing NCO or officer. Briefvisitors before escorting them to the primarytraining site. Ensure appropriate safety equipmentis available for their use.

(10) Check Safety Markers. Make sure thatrange safety markers are present before any livefiring begins; if light markers are used, check op-erations before darkness.

(11) Coordinate for Munitions. Coordinate withthe support elements responsible for supplyinglive ammunition or pyrotechnics. This coordina-tion ensures having the correct type of ammuni-tion in the correct amounts at the right time andplace. Be sure that the ammunition to be fired hasbeen checked against TB 9-1300-385 for re-stricted or suspended ammunition lot numbers.

(12) Conduct Other Training. Stress those areasin which the unit needs additional training. Thefollowing are suggested areas for additionaltraining:

Target acquisition.Range determination.Movement techniques.Crew tasks.Platoon tasks.Fire commands.Methods of adjustment.Stabilization training.Prepare-to-fire checks.Immediate action for the weapons system.Remedial action for the weapons systems.Armor identification.Maintenance of vehicles and weapons.

(13) Recovery Vehicle. Quickly remove disabledvehicles from the course to prevent loss of train-ing time. A manned recovery vehicle must be inposition to support the unit at all times.

(14) Opposing Forces Personnel. Brief OP-FOR personnel on the role that they will play inthe tactical training. Ensure that they know whatto do and when to do it. Stress that their actionsmust be the same for each unit going through thecourse to provide consistent results.

(15) Maintenance. Have maintenance personnelon site to correct any sight, gun, or vehicle mal-functions as they occur.

(16) Support the Trainers. Ensure that the pri-mary personnel responsible for the conduct offires and the training of the unit are able to per-form their duties and get the support they need.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 10-15

(reverse blank)

Preparing and using scaled ranges requires onlyminor changes to the procedures used to conductfull caliber firing. Scaled firing helps to preparecrews and platoons for full caliber firing and quali-fication. It also allows units to train themselves inrange operations during home-station training.(See fig. 11-1.)

The rising cost of ammunition, fuel, and spareparts makes it difficult to produce and maintainskilled LAV-25 crews, sections, and platoons. Tominimize the cost, more gunnery training must beaccomplished at the unit’s home station, usingsubcaliber training devices and innovative trainingtechniques. This chapter provides guidelines on

the uses and types of scaled ranges and the targettypes and mechanisms that may be en- countered.

11001. UsesThe commander chooses the range scale that bestsuits the training needs and the facilities available.Using scaled ranges, units can realistically simu-late day and night firing by single vehicles, sec-tions, and platoons against single, multiple,stationary, and moving targets. Actual machinegun engagements can be incorporated where aunit has enough space for the larger range safetyzones required for the machine gun. Targets rep-resenting friendly equipment can be placed in the

Chapter 11

Scaled Ranges

Figure 11-1. Scaled Ranges (1/30 to 1/60).

target area to give the crew practice in distin-guishing friend or foe. For overseas units, terrainand target arrays can be set up to resemble the an-ticipated threat targets and the actual terrain infront of prepared battle positions.

The crew moves down the course, engaging aseries of targets. (See fig. 11-2.) StabilizedLAV-25s move at normal speeds during engage-ments. Although all targets are within battlesightrange of the subcaliber device, precision and bat-tlesight gunnery techniques should be practicedon the half-scale range. When using a stadia reti-cle on half-scale targets, first-round-hit probabilitymay be degraded, thereby placing a heavier em-phasis on the adjustment of a subsequent round.The crew should also run the course at night, us-ing available illumination (passive, flare, infrared,or white light).

The three types of LAV-25 scaled ranges aresmall-scale, stationary; small-scale, moving ; andhalf-scale, stationary or moving.

11002. Small-Scale (1/60 or 1/30,Stationary LAV-25)

This type range is used for stationary single squad,section, and platoon firing exercises. The scalechosen (1/60 or 1/30) depends on the area avail-able. Ideally, these ranges are basically large sandtables and, as such, offer the best possibility fordeployed units to set up target arrays that resem-ble those expected in actual battle positions. Untilsand-tablelike ranges can be constructed, any sur-face can be used if berms are available for safety.

The size of the range depends on the area availableand the caliber of the device used. The size of therequired impact area can be reduced by addingberms.

Impact targets, with appropriate mechanisms ofthe desired scale (targets), are emplaced on thescaled range to present challenging engagementexercises. Targets representing friendly equipmentmay be placed in the target area to give the crewpractice in target identification. See the combatrange versus scaled ranges chart (table 11-1) for

11-2 MCWP 3-14.1

STARTING POINT

1/10-SCALE POP-UP TARGET

1/10 -SCALE RANGE

Figure 11-2. 1/10-Scale (Dry Fire) Range.

proper target emplacement distances. Appropriatescaled objects (roads, buildings, vegetation, andterrain features) add realism to the target area.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 11-3

COMBATRANGE

METERS

METERS1/2

SCALE

FEET1/5

SCALE

METERS1/10

SCALE

FEET1/20

SCALE

FEET1/30

SCALE

FEET1/35

SCALE

FEET1/60

SCALE500 250 330 50 82 55 47 27

600 300 380 60 99 65 56 33

700 350 464 70 115 76 66 38

800 400 470 80 132 87 75 44

900 450 592 90 148 98 84 49

1000 500 660 100 165 110 94 55

1100 550 724 110 181 120 103 60

1200 600 792 120 198 131 113 66

1300 650 856 130 214 142 122 71

1400 700 924 140 231 154 132 77

1500 750 990 150 247 164 141 82

1600 800 1060 160 264 176 150 88

1700 850 1120 170 280 186 160 93

1800 900 1192 180 297 198 169 99

1900 950 1256 190 313 208 179 104

2000 1000 1320 200 330 220 188 110

2100 1050 1388 210 346 230 198 115

2200 1100 1450 220 363 242 207 121

2300 1150 1520 230 379 250 216 126

2400 1200 1588 240 396 264 226 132

2500 1250 1650 250 412 274 235 137

2600 1300 1720 260 429 286 245 143

2700 1350 1780 270 445 296 254 148

2800 1400 1850 280 462 308 264 154

2900 1450 1915 290 478 318 273 159

3000 1500 1980 300 495 330 282 165

Table 11-1. Combat Range Versus Scaled Ranges Chart.

11003. Small-Scale (1/10), Mov-ing LAV-25

A moving LAV-25 range requires a larger areathan a stationary LAV-25 range. The 1/30-scalerange can be used for stationary gunnery. How-ever, the scale is so small that the terrain changestoo quickly for a moving LAV-25 to adequatelyuse proper adjustment techniques. For example, ina course run simulating 1,200 meters on a1/30-scale range, a moving LAV-25 traversesonly 113 feet. An LAV-25 moving at 3 miles perhour travels this distance in 27 seconds. There-fore, the suggested scale is 1/10. The exact con-figuration of the 1/10-scale range variesdepending on range area and type of terrain. Mas-ter gunners must be adept at configuring thescaled ranges by taking into account all factors,i.e., vehicle speed, size of maneuver boxes, targetexposure time, and depth of range, as they relateto the scale.

Determining range size depends on the type ofsubcaliber device used and whether machine gunengagements are incorporated into the training.

This range can be easily constructed on an exist-ing small-arms or machine gun range. Direction ofLAV-25 movement can be parallel to the firingline or through the impact area, depending on thesize and shape of the existing range.

Simulated 25mm gun impact targets with appro-priate target mechanisms are emplaced within thedistance constraints of the scaled ranges. Spacepermitting, coax machine gun targets can be em-placed among simulated 25mm gun-scaled tar-gets. Markers indicate the simulated 25mm gunengagement positions along the route the LAV-25will travel. These are necessary so that the desiredscaled target range is retained when firing.

From marked firing locations, the LAV-25 mov-ing along a designated route engages a series ofactivated main gun targets (and machine gun tar-gets, if incorporated). Stabilized LAV-25s keepmoving during engagements; however, their speedis considerably slower than normal because of theshort distances between targets. Crew duties forbattlesight engagements should be practiced.

Night firing and battlefield obscuration can be ac-complished as in the stationary scaled course.

Note: Precision engagement skills cannot beevaluated on a s mall-scale, moving LAV-25range because of the flat trajectory, at short dis-tances, for subcaliber rounds. However, preci-sion aimng skills can be evaluated if theevaluator uses a variation of the point of aimmethod. (See chap. 7.)

11004. Half-Scale

Half-scale ranges are used for stationary or mov-ing LAV-25 exercises. More realistic training canbe conducted on half-scale ranges than on thesmaller scale ranges. Ranging to the target can bepracticed using the reticle stadia lines because ofextended LAV-25-to-target ranges.

The length of the range depends on the size of thearea available, the subcaliber device used, andwhether machine gun engagements are to be used.Refer to table 11-2 for length of impact area re-quired based on type of subcaliber device used.(Impact area size may be waived to a lesser dis-tance with the addition of berms. Approval for thisreduction may be granted by local range controlauthority.)Once a subcaliber device is chosen, the course canbe set up to resemble any combat course. Full-size

targets are placed beyond the device firing rangeto give the crew practice in ranging to long-rangetargets. Moving targets can also be used. It mustbe noted that when converting an area into a sub-caliber range, an appropriate surface danger areadiagram must be prepared and submitted to thelocal range control officer for approval.

11-4 MCWP 3-14.1

Table 11-2. Range Size Determination.

CALIBER DEVICEIMPACTAREA

METERS.22 cal. long rifle Rimfire 1400

5.56mm rifle LAV-25 subcaliberdevice

3600

7.62mm coax 4800

11005. Target Types

The targets and the activating mechanisms to beused on the scaled ranges for subcaliber tables areas follows:

Sample targets for subcaliber scaled ranges can bemounted on an “E” type silhouette. (See fig.11-3.) Table 3 subcaliber targets can be mountedon a moving panel. (See fig. 11-4.) These targetscan be placed on various silhouettes for use withsubcaliber devices such as the .22 caliber device.

The scaled impact target is available in scales of1/60, 1/30, and 1/10. (See fig. 11-5.) The target ismounted in a stationary scaled pop-up targetmechanism. The target, a two-dimensional sil-houette made from plastic, is easily replaced whendestroyed. Targets are available in an assortmentof threat vehicle silhouettes as well as somefriendly equipment silhouettes, for target identifi-cation practice.

11006. Small-Scale TargetMechanismsThe following types of mechanisms are for usewith small-scale targets.

Moving Targets and Scaled MoldedRubber TargetsThis target mechanism is used on the 1/60- and1/10-scaled ranges. (See fig. 11-6.) It can be fab-ricated locally. (See TC 25-8, Training Ranges.)Targets for use with this mechanism can be ob-tained locally.

Stationary TargetsThis device is a wire-operated target mechanismfor popping up 1/60-, 1/30-, and 1/10-scaleimpact targets powered by any 24-volt electricalsource. (See fig. 11-7.) When the target is struckby an impact weapon, the target falls. The mecha-nism comes with wire attached to the control box(or for 1/60- and 1/30-scale targets through ajunction box). The wire and the target mechanismare buried in sand or in the ground to protectthem from projectile impact. When not in use, the

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 11-5

TRUCKSQUARE TURRET

OVAL TURRET BUNKER

ANTITANK GUNAREA TARGET

FLANK TARGETSQUARE TURRET

OVAL TURRETFRONTAL TANK

MACHINE GUNTRUCK3 IN

40 IN

18.5 IN

4 IN

Figure 11-3. Sample Targets on “E” Silhouettes.

mechanism should be removed or covered to pro-tect it from the weather. Quick-connect plugs areused for easy removal. (See TC 25-8.)

M31A1 Target-Holding Mechanism forStationary TargetsThe M31A1 target-holding mechanism is usedwith popping up impact targets of 1/20 scale. (Seefig. 11-7.) This device is normally operated on110-volt alternating current.

Portable Infantry Target System

This device is normally used with “E” type silhou-ette or other similar infantry type targets. It can bemodified for use with properly reduced impacttargets. The Portable Infantry Target System is ra-dio controlled and has hit sensors that sense ballis-tic hits on the target. The radio controller canprogram them for allowable variations to thescaled ranges.

11-6 MCWP 3-14.1

Figure 11-4. Sample Subcaliber Targets for Table 3.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment 11-7

Figure 11-6. Target Mechanism for Moving Targets.

Figure 11-5. Scaled Impact Targets.

STAND

MOVING TARGET CONTROL BOX

STAND

FRONTOFRANGE

11-8 MCWP 3-14.1

Figure 11-7. Target Mechanismfor Stationary Targets.

Figure 11-8. M31A1 Target-HoldingMechanism.

FRONT

FRONT OBLIQUE REAR OBLIQUE

SIDE

To maintain the safety, serviceability, and effec-tiveness of the 25mm and 7.62mm ammunitionused on the LAV-25, care must be taken whenhandling it. The following guidelines can aid crewmembers in cleaning, inspecting, and storing am-munition. Using proper procedures can preventproblems.

Ammunition Precautions

Do not open ammunition containers until ready touse to avoid corrosion or contamination and tomake the process of ammo turn-in easier shouldfiring be shut down for any reason.

Protect ammunition from mud, dirt, and water. Ifthe ammunition gets wet or dirty, wipe it off priorto use. Wipe off light corrosion as it is discov-ered. Heavily corroded rounds should bereplaced.

Use caution during firing to ensure ammunition iskept out of the dirt. Dirt picked up during firingwill act as an abrasive in the chamber of theweapon and could cause serious damage.

Do not expose ammunition to direct sunlight. Ifthe powder is hot, excessive pressure may de-velop when the gun is fired.

Do not oil or grease ammunition. Dust and otherabrasives will collect on it and damage the operat-ing parts of the gun.

Do not use defective rounds, including dentedrounds or those with loose projectiles. Replacethem.

Do not fire any ammunition graded and marked“FOR TRAINING ONLY” over friendly troops.

Cleaning Ammunition

Clean primers only with rags dipped in alcohol oracetone. Store cleaning rags in noncombustibleself-closing containers. Waste or used rags shallbe disposed of according to local hazardous mate-rials regulations. Areas in which solvents andpaints are used must be well-ventilated.

Remove dirt, mud, and other foreign material us-ing rags or brushes. Use rags dampened with al-cohol or acetone to remove grease.

Remove flaked, chipped, and blistered or peelingpaint using a nonferrous brush. Remove rust usinga nonferrous brush or sandpaper.

Clean corrosion from aluminum or copper-basedmetals by brushing with a nonferrous brush andthen removing residue with rags and corrosion-removing compound.

Inspection of Ammunition

Inspection criteria and classification of specificdefects (identified as acceptable, repairable, andirreparable) are outlined in tables A-1 and A-2.

Acceptable ammunition will be cleaned andrepackaged.

For disposition of irreparable ammunition, contactexplosive ordnance disposal (EOD) personnel forguidance.

Small arms cartridges will be given an inspectionprior to issue. The cartridges in a minimum ofthree boxes from each lot will be inspected forphysical defects. Lots having more than 5 percentdefective cartridges may be subjected to a 100

Appendix A

Cleaning, Inspecting, and Storing Ammunition

percent inspection if authorized by higher author-ity, and visually defective rounds will be pulledout. Ammunition having less than 5 percent visu-ally defective rounds may be issued without fur-ther inspection.

During inspection of belted ammunition for use inmachine guns, look for the following defects:

Cartridges improperly aligned in the belts.Incendiary and/or tracer ammunition improp-erly proportioned or spaced with ballammunition.Cartridge links in link belts have broken,cracked, or stretched loops.Link belts not packed with double loop ontop.Cracks or other damage and deterioration.

A-2 MCWP 3-14.1

Table A-2. Inspection Criteria for 25mm Ammunition Metallic Cartridge Case.

Item Acceptable Repairable Irreparable Markings. Legible and correct. Illegible, correct data available

for remarking.

Correct data cannot be

determined.

Paint. No scratches, peeling,

or blistering.

Scratches, peeling, or blistering

in spots.

Scratches, peeling, or blis-

tering requiring complete

repaint.

Body. Free from rust. Minor rust that can be removed

with corrosion-removing com-

pound, sandpaper, or wire

brush.

Extensive rust that cannot

be removed with corrosion-

removing compound, sand-

paper, or a wire brush.

Table A-1. Inspection Criteria for 25mm Ammunition Projectiles.

Item Acceptable Repairable Irreparable Markings. Legible. Markings illegible, incorrect, or

misleading, but correct data is

available for remarking.

Correct data cannot be

determined.

Body. Light corrosion. Minor

scratches or dents in

casing.

Minor scratches, rust, or corro-

sion which can be removed with

fine sandpaper, steel wool, or

corrosion-removing compound.

Severe corrosion, rust, or

scratches which cannot be

removed with sandpaper or

steel wool.

Body and

base.

Minor cuts, scratches,

and dents.None. Severe cuts, tears, and

dents where propellant is

exposed.

Storage Precautions

Store ammunition in a dry, cool place. Neverstore in the direct sunlight or where temperaturesexceed limits marked on containers.

Select storage sites carefully to avoid exposure topower lines and electric cables.

Ensure that exposure to radio frequency (RF) en-ergies and electromagnetic radiation is kept to aminimum in storage areas.

Do not store ammunition adjacent to reservoirs,water mains, or sewer lines.

Select level, well-drained sites free from flamma-ble materials.

Do not store ammunition under trees or adjacentto towers or other structures that attract lightning.

Provide nonflammable or fire-resistant overheadcovers (e.g., tarpaulin) for all ammunition. Main-

tain overhead air space of approximately 18inches between cover and ammunition. Keepcover at least 6 inches from stack on ends and atsides to permit circulation of air.

Use heavy, well-supported dunnage to preventstacks from sinking and to keep bottom tier offground.

Dig suitable trenches to prevent water from flow-ing under stacks.

Group ammunition by caliber, type, method ofpacking, and lot number.

Tag or mark ammunition removed from originalpacking to preserve the ammunition lot or func-tional lot identification. This will prevent other-wise serviceable ammunition from becomingCondition Code H through loss of identity (am-munition lot number). Small arms ammunitionwith loss of lot identity is to be reported to thebattalion S-4 (ammo tech).

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment A-3

(reverse blank)

A-4 MCWP 3-14.1

Range determination is the process of determiningthe distance between two points. The distance isusually measured from the observer to the target,but it may also be from a known or prominentfeature to the target, and the observer-target dis-tance is then computed. The ability to accuratelydetermine range is a key skill needed to accom-plish the mission. Not only does accurate rangedetermination affect the LAV-25 crewman’s com-bat gunnery proficiency, but it is also necessary inreporting information accurately and adjustingsupporting arms effectively. Range determinationcoupled with knowledge of threat weapons capa-bility aids the vehicle commander in choosing themethod of engagement. Two methods are used inthe LAV-25 to determine range: immediate anddeliberate. The immediate method is used whenspeed has priority over accuracy. The deliberatemethod is used when accuracy has priority overspeed.

Immediate Method of RangeDetermination

The two techniques used in the immediate methodare the battlesight technique (with the main gunand/or coaxially mounted machine gun or coax)and the recognition technique.

Battlesight TechniqueThe battlesight technique is accomplished by lay-ing the battlesight circle center mass of the target(6 o’clock for armor piercing [AP] ammunition)and applying a burst. The battlesight circle is aknown distance of 470 meters for the coaxiallymounted machine gun, 950 meters for high explo-sive (HE) ammunition, and 1,450 meters for AP.Having fired a burst, the gunner uses the burst-on-target (BOT) method to adjust the sight pic-ture. Then, the gunner engages the target until it

is destroyed or the command CEASE FIRE isgiven. The coax is used in the same manner, butmainly for troops in the open. The main gun bat-tlesight tells if the target is within battlesightrange. It gives about a 50 percent probability of afirst round hit to a range of approximately 950meters for HE and 1,450 meters for AP.

Recognition Technique The recognition technique depends on target visi-bility and can be used with the unaided eye orwith vision aids such as scopes or binoculars. Tar-gets recognizable to the unaided eye or by sight-ing through vision aids with about 7- or 8- powermagnification are normally at the ranges shown intable B-1. For example, if a vehicle can be identi-fied as an armored personnel carrier (BMP) withthe naked eye, it is probably within 1,500 meters.If the crew members can be seen on or around theBMP with the naked eye, it is probably within 500meters. Certain viewing conditions can make atarget appear to be closer or farther away than itactually is.

Deliberate Method of RangeDetermination

The deliberate method is typified by the use ofmore accurate techniques of range determinationsuch as laser range finder (LRF), stadia technique,the mil-relation formula, or the flash-to-bangtechnique.

Laser Range Finder An LRF is normally an individually operated,hand-held or vehicle-mounted, distance-measur-ring device which uses a reflected laser pulse toprovide an accurate range to the target. The LRFincreases first round hit probability on targets

Appendix B

Range Determination

through fast and accurate range determination. Itmay be operated from an internal battery or froman external power source by means of the powercable. Some of its capabilities and features are thefollowing:

It fires an invisible laser beam at a target,then detects laser energy reflected from thetarget.It has a highly accurate range determinationfrom 200 to 9,900 meters (plus or minus 10meters).It warns operator when the internal battery isgetting weak.It informs operator if the LRF has been firedat more than one target.Its reticle pattern is graduated in mils.

Stadia Technique The stadia technique, also called the chokingtechnique, provides a rapid and accurate way ofmeasuring distance. The LAV-25 crewman sightson the target and moves the gun in elevation untilthe appropriate (AP or HE) stadia lines enclose a6-meter portion of a flank target or a 3-meter por-tion of a frontal target. In figure B-1, HE ammo isused and the target is approximately 5 meterswide, so the guns are elevated until the target fillsfive-sixths of the space between the HE stadialines. If the target and the firing LAV-25 are bothstationary, the intersection of the vertical rangeline and the indicated range on the range scale be-comes the sighting point. The gun can then befired as soon as the target is centered between thestadia lines at the correct elevation. Figure B-1depicts target ranges of 1,400 meters, 1,700 me-ters, and 700 meters using the stadia method.

B-2 MCWP 3-14.1

TargetIf recognized by thenaked eye, range is

If recognized by 7- or 8-power magnification, rangeis

Tank Crewmember, Troops,Machine Gun, Mortar, AntitankGun, Antitank Missile Launches

500 meters 2000 meters

Tank, APC, Model of Truck 1000 meters 4000 meters

Tank, Howitzer, APC, Truck 1500 meters 5000 meters

Armored Vehicle, Wheeled Vehicle

2000 meters 6000 meters

Variable Target Conditions

Target seems closer Target seems more distantBright clear day Fog, rain, or hazy twilight

Sun in front of the target Sun behind the target

Higher elevations Lower elevations

Large targets Small targets

Contrast Dark colors

Looking across ravines, hollows,rivers, or depressions

At sea

Table B-1. Recognition Technique.

Mil-Relation FormulaThe range to a target can be estimated using themil-relation formula and the vehicle’s known di-mensions. The mil-relation formula W = R x m,commonly called WORM or WORM rule, isbased on the assumption that an angle of 1 milequals 1 meter in width at a distance of 1,000 me-ters (actually 0.98175) from the observer. (W =vehicle’s width in meters, R = range in thousandsof meters [i.e., 2.5 = 2,500 meters], and m = vehi-cle’s width in mils.) To use the mil-relation for-mula to determine range, simply solve theequation for R (R = W ÷ m). Dimensions ofequipment can be obtained from training aids suchas armored vehicle recognition cards (GTA17-2-13) which can be obtained from the battalionS-2, S-3, or supply officer or on the Internet. Di-mensions of selected equipment are provided infigure B-2. See FMFM 6-8, Supporting Arms Ob-server, Spotter, and Controller, for details.

Example: A BMP is observed. The width as seenfrom a side view is measured as 2 mils. Using theformula R = W ÷ m, the range to the target isdetermined.

R = W ÷ mR = 6.8 meters ÷ 2 milsR = 3.9 (3,700 meters)

Flash-to-Bang TechniqueTo determine the range to a target using the flash-to-bang technique, count the number of secondsbetween the visual signature of the target’sweapon firing and the sound of the report. Multi-ply this figure by the speed of sound (350 metersper second). The result will be the distance fromthe observer to the target in meters.

Example: An enemy tank is observed firing. Thetime difference between seeing the weapon’s sig-nature and hearing the report of the firing is 10seconds. Multiply the seconds by 350 = 3,500.The tank is about 3,500 meters away.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment B-3

EquipmentDimensions(in meters)

SideView

Front View

Tank (T-62) 7.5 3.4

Reconnaissance Vehicle (BRDM-2)

5.7 2.4

ReconnaissanceVehicle (BTR-60)

7.5 2.8

Armored PersonnelCarrier (BMP)

6.5 2.9

Air Defense Weapon(ZSU-23-4)

6.3 2.9

Figure B-2. Selected Equipment Dimensions.

HE

FIVE METER TARGET AT 1700 METER RANGE

FIVE METER TARGET AT 1400 METER RANGE

FIVE METER TARGET AT 700 METER RANGE

AP

6

6

10

10

1019242934

12

12

14

14

16

61012141618

Figure B-1. Stadia Method.

/

/

/

(reverse blank)

/

Air defense is all defensive measures designed todestroy attacking enemy aircraft or missiles in theEarth’s envelope of atmosphere, or to nullify orreduce the effectiveness of such attack. (Joint Pub1-02.)

There are two methods of air defense—passiveand active. All LAV-25 units must know how totake passive measures to avoid air detection andactive measures to combat air attack.

Passive Air Defense Methods

Passive air defense is the most important methodof air defense as it may prevent you from beingtargeted. Passive air defense involves taking thosemeasures necessary to avoid detection andengagement by threat aviators.

Vehicle dispersion must be emphasized to reducethe effectiveness of enemy radar and otherdetection devices. This also reduces casualties anddecreases the enemy’s ability to engage more thanone target at a time. Attack avoidance depends onthe unit’s ability to avoid detection; what can beseen, can be destroyed.

Use of cover and concealment must bemaximized. If possible, have a friendly aircraftobserve the position and correct all vehicles thatare visible.

Observing and reporting help the commander tocoordinate active air defense measures to engagedetected enemy aircraft, to move unprotectedelements, and to request additional support.Reports must be accurate and timely to beeffective.

Active Air Defense Methods

When passive air defense fails, LAV-25 crewsmust employ active air defense. Enemy aircraftare engaged to—

Destroy the aircraft.Force the aircraft away from the friendly position.Force the aircraft to fly higher so that friendly airdefense weapons or friendly aircraft can destroyit.Spoil the aircraft’s aim while it is engaging you.

High volume of fire is the key to success in activeair defense. Because of the speed and agility ofaircraft, the response must be coordinated,practiced, and highly controlled. Active airdefense measures should be controlled at sectionlevel. Platoon dispersion does not allow foraccurate and timely engagement of aircraft. Thesection has sufficient weapon systems (with asignificant amount of ammunition and somedegree of control) to engage enemy aircraft.

The technique to obtain volume of fire is simple.All section vehicles engage with either the M24225mm or M240 coax as designated by the sectionleader either by fire command or by SOP.

Unit SOPs should provide guidance forintegrating dismounted weapons fire inconjunction with supporting LAV-25 weaponsystems in active air defense.

Appendix CAir Defense

Once the engagement begins, all gunners continueto fire until the aircraft crashes, the aircraftcatches fire or is smoking, the personnel haveevacuated the aircraft, or the aircraft withdraws.

Aerial Engagement Weapons

Proper weapons and ammunition selection for therange and target is important. Table C-1 showsthe weapon and ammunition and the type of aerialtargets that it can destroy.

The M242 25mm automatic gun is effectiveagainst slow-moving, fixed-wing aircraft andhelicopters. Target identification is imperative todetermining the type of ammunition to use. Usethe APDS-T, the APFSDS-T, or the HEI-T roundagainst slow-moving, fixed-wing aircraft andhelicopters. The APDS-T and APFSDS-T have ahigher probability of hit than HEI-T; however,HEI-T has a higher probability of kill. At rangesbeyond 1,200 meters, the APDS-T is moreeffective on helicopters. Rounds should be fired in20- to 25-round bursts on high rate to sustain theproper volume of fire.

Use the coaxially and pintle-mounted 7.62mmmachine guns against fixed-wing aircraft, un-armored helicopters, and airborne troops. Acontinuous burst (50 to 100 rounds) at the properaiming point is required. Use the tracer-on-targettechnique to bring rounds on target. The 7.62mmmachine guns are not effective against heavilyarmored helicopters such as the HIND-D.

Sighting Systems and EngagementTechniques

Use the LAV-25 ballistic sight with either the25mm gun or the 7.62mm coax machine gunwhen engaging aerial targets.

Engaging Helicopters If the helicopter is flying a lateral or overheadcourse, the commander or gunner uses a lead of50 meters (half the length of a football field).

If the helicopter is flying directly toward thevehicle, aim the fire slightly above the nose of thehelicopter.

If the helicopter is hovering, the commander orgunner aims just above the fuselage and fires aburst of 20 to 25 rounds on high rate of fire.

C-2 MCWP 3-14.1

FIXED-WING

HELICOPTER PARATROOPER

SLOW

FAST

ARMORED UNARMORED

Coaxiallymounted7.62mm

Yes Yes No Yes Yes

Pintle-mounted7.62mm Yes Yes No Yes YesHEI-T Yes Yes* Yes Yes Yes

Table C-1. Weapon and Ammunition Selection Against Aerial Targets.

The HIND-D is about the same height as a BMPwhen measured from the aircraft’s bottom to thetop of the pilot’s canopy. (See fig. C-1.)

Engaging High-Speed AircraftThe best technique for engaging high-speedaircraft is a controlled burst of coax machine gunand small arms from both the mounted anddismounted elements at a designated TRP. Thiscan be initiated by either the section leader issuinga predetermined command or by a leader initiatingfire so that other elements can fire on his tracers.The section leader needs to apply a 200-meterlead (about two football field lengths) on theapproaching aircraft. Aim the fire in front of theaircraft so that the aircraft will fly through the

entire section’s cone of fire. Do not try to trackthe aircraft if it flies too fast. (See fig. C-2.)

If the aircraft is flying directly toward the vehicle,use a controlled burst (50 to 100 rounds) andselect an aiming point slightly above the nose ofthe aircraft. Thus, the aircraft will fly into thecone of fire.

A third technique to engage high-speed aircraft isto pick a reference point or a series of referencepoints. (See fig. C-3.) (Example: the platoonleader alerts the platoon and as the aircraft nears areference point, he orders ENEMY AIR;REFERENCE POINT TWO; FIRE. Fire allweapons [of LAV-25s and of dismountedMarines] at a 45-degree angle above the reference

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment C-3

Figure C-1. HIND-D and BMP Height Comparison.

2 FOOTBALL FIELDS FOR HIGH-SPEED AIRCRAFT

200-METER LEAD

Figure C-2. High-Speed Aircraft Engagement.

C-4 MCWP 3-14.1

REF PT, 4

REF PT, 2REF PT,

3

Figure C-3. Reference Point Technique.

AIM TWO-MAN HEIGHTSBELOW PARATROOPER

APHE

61012141618

2022

1019242934

Figure C-4. Engaging Paratroopers.

point.)

Engaging ParatroopersParatroopers’ rapid rate of fall and oscillation ofthe parachute makes them difficult to engage.(See fig. C-4.)Use the LAV-25 ballistic sight.

Use the coax machine gun at ranges under 900meters.

Use the 25mm gun with HEI-T at ranges over900 meters.

Fire a burst (with a lead of two man-heights)beneath the dropping paratrooper.

If troop-carrying helicopters are sighted, engagethem—not the parachuting or rappelling troops.Helicopters are better targets.

Note: The Geneva Convention specificallyprohibits engaging aircraft crewmembers whoare parachuting out of damaged aircraft. They

cease to be a threat when removed from theiraircraft. However, the Geneva Convention doesnot protect paratroopers (from any aircraft)while they are in the air.

Weapons Control StatusAir defense fires are controlled using hostilecriteria (determining type of aircraft and whetherit is friend or foe) and weapons control status.Once identified, engagement is controlled by theweapons control status. These weapons controlcategories are—

Weapons free. Crews may fire at aircraft notpositively identified as friendly.Weapons tight. Crews fire only at aircraftpositively identified as hostile according toannounced hostile criteria.Weapons hold. Crews do not fire except inself-defense.

Friendly aircraft also operate in hostile air spaceor environment.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment C-5

The division G-2 often provides early warning ofthreat air attack. Normally, the probability ofattack is described using one of three conditions:

Red—attack imminent or in progress.Yellow—attack probable.White—attack not probable.

C-6 MCWP 3-14.1

The LAV-25 gunnery skills test (LGST) evaluateseach crewmember’s ability to perform gunnery

related skills without the aid of technical manualsor publications.

Appendix D

LAV-25 Gunnery Skills Test RecommendedPerformance Checklists

D-2 MCWP 3-14.1

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Test Station 1 - Load the M24225mm Automatic Gun. (0313.3.9)

1. Task. Load the M242 25mm automatic gun.

2. Conditions. Given an LAV-25, 210 25mmdummy rounds, appropriate tools and technicalmanuals.

3. Standards. Within 10 minutes, fully load thehigh explosive (HE) and armor piercing (AP) sideof the weapon. The Marine must load the readyboxes and feeder and cycle the ghost round.

4. Evaluation Procedures.

The evaluator logs crew members on a roster. Allmaterials and equipment needed for the task mustbe present and operational. The evaluator mustuse the performance checklists to score this task.Only one crewmember at a time is tested.

If the crewmember receives a NO GO, he is toldwhat mistakes he made and actions required tocorrect them. The crewmember is tested in ac-cordance with local standing operating pro-cedure.

5. Personnel, Equipment, and MaterialRequired:

Qualified LAV-25 crew evaluator (LCE).Operational LAV-25 with SL-3.210 25mm dummy rounds.Clipboard and pen.Stopwatch.

6. Pretest Preparation:

Remove 25mm automatic gun and ensure allparts are present and operational.Install 25mm automatic gun.Ensure master power and turret powerswitches are off.Ensure gas bag is removed.

7. Test Planning Time.

Administrative: 5 minutesTest: 10 minutes

Total: 15 minutes

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment D-3

Recommended Performance Checklist, Station 1

NAME:_______________________________________________________________________GRADE:___________ UNIT:___________________ DUTY POSITION:________________

TASK: Load the M242 25mm automatic gun.

1. Ensure that the turret is powered down. _____ _____2. Ensure that the M242 is clear. _____ _____3. Ensure that the M242 is in SEAR. _____ _____4. Ensure that the M242 is on SAFE. _____ _____5. Ensure that the feed and link chutes are in place. _____ _____6. Load HE ammunition. _____ _____

a. Load ready box. _____ _____b. Route ammunition to feeder. _____ _____c. Load feeder. _____ _____

7. Load AP ammunition. _____ _____a. Load the feed chute. _____ _____b. Load the ready box. _____ _____c. Route ammunition to feeder. _____ _____d. Load the feeder. _____ _____

8. Cycle the ghost round. _____ _____9. Complete performance steps within 10 minutes. _____ _____

EVALUATOR’S NAME:_____________________________________________________

TEST DATE:__________OVERALL SCORE: GO NO GO

REMARKS:_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

D-4 MCWP 3-14.1

PERFORMANCE STEPS GO NO GO

Test Station 2—Clear, Remove,Disassemble, Assemble, and In-stall the M242 25mm AutomaticGun. (0313.3.1; 0313.3.2;0313.3.10)

1. Task. Clear, remove, disassemble, assemble,and install the M242 25mm automatic gun.

2. Conditions. Given an LAV-25 with installedM242 loaded with 210 25mm dummy rounds, ap-propriate tools, technical manuals, and anassistant.

3. Standards. Within 30 minutes, the Marinemust—

Fully unload the HE and AP side of theweapon. Unload the ready boxes and feeder, and stowthe ammunition properly.Disconnect the feed chutes and link chutes,remove the M242 receiver, feeder, and barrelassemblies, and completely disassemble theweapon.Completely reassemble the weapon, installthe M242 receiver, feeder, and barrel assem-blies, connect power to the J1 electrical re-ceptacle, attach feed chutes, and attach linkchutes.

4. Evaluation Procedures

The evaluator logs crew members on a roster. Allmaterials and equipment needed for the task mustbe present and operational. The evaluator mustuse the performance checklists to score this task.Only one crewmember at a time is tested.

If the crewmember receives a NO GO, he is toldwhat mistakes he made and actions required tocorrect them. The crewmember is tested in ac-cordance with local SOP.

5. Personnel, Equipment, and MaterialRequired:

Qualified LCE.Operational LAV-25 with SL-3.Stopwatch.Clipboard and pen.210 25mm dummy rounds.

6. Pretest Preparation:

Remove 25mm automatic gun and ensure allparts are present and operational.Install 25mm automatic gun.Ensure that the M242 is completely loadedand the ghost round is cycled.Ensure master power and turret powerswitches are off.Inform assistant crewmember that he is onlyto assist with the barrel and receiverassemblies.

7. Test Planning Time

Administrative: 5 minutesTest: 30 minutes

Total: 35 minutes

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment D-5

Recommended Performance Checklist, Station 2

NAME:_______________________________________________________________________GRADE:___________ UNIT:___________________ DUTY POSITION:________________

TASK: Clear, remove, disassemble, assemble, and install an M242 25mm automatic gun.

1. Unload the 25mm automatic gun. _____ _____a. Ensure that the turret is powered down. _____ _____b. Ensure that the M242 is on SAFE. _____ _____c. Ensure that the turret is locked. _____ _____d. Remove link chutes. _____ _____e. Unload AP ammunition. _____ _____

(1) Unload feeder. _____ _____(2) Unload ready box. _____ _____(3) Stow ammunition. _____ _____

f. Unload HE ammunition. _____ _____(1) Unload feeder. _____ _____(2) Unload ready box. _____ _____(3) Stow ammunition. _____ _____

g. Remove and clear the feeder. (Ensure the feedselect solenoid remains in AP while removing feeder.) _____ _____(1) Remove the feed chutes from the

feeder assembly. _____ _____(2) Unlock the feeder handle. _____ _____(3) Release the drive shaft. _____ _____(4) Slide the feeder assembly back on the

receiver assembly rails. _____ _____(5) Lock the feeder handle down. _____ _____(6) Lift the feeder assembly off the

receiverassembly and place on clean, flat surface.(Assistant helps.) _____ _____

(7) Push in drive shaft on receiver. _____ _____h. Clear the receiver. _____ _____

2. Remove the M242 25mm automatic gun. _____ _____a. Remove the barrel assembly. (Assistant helps.) _____ _____

(1) Unlock the barrel assembly from the receiver assembly. _____ _____

(2) Withdraw the barrel assembly from the receiver assembly. _____ _____

b. Remove the receiver assembly. _____ _____(1) Disconnect the electrical harness from

the J1 receptacle. _____ _____(2) Unlock the anti-rotation latch handle. _____ _____(3) Remove the receiver assembly from the

locking ring. (Assistant helps.) _____ _____3. Disassemble the M242 automatic gun. _____ _____

D-6 MCWP 3-14.1

PERFORMANCE STEPS GO NO GO

a. Remove the bolt and track assembly from the receiver. _____ _____(1) Pull out drive shaft. _____ _____(2) Cycle bolt out of SEAR. _____ _____(3) Unlock track latch. _____ _____(4) Remove bolt and track assembly. _____ _____(5) Push in drive shaft on receiver. _____ _____

b. Disassemble bolt and track assembly. _____ _____(1) Remove bolt carrier from track assembly. _____ _____(2) Unlock bolt from forward locking position. _____ _____(3) Remove firing pin sleeve keeper. _____ _____(4) Remove firing pin and sleeve from bolt and

separate the pin and sleeve. _____ _____(5) Remove cam pin. _____ _____(6) Remove bolt from bolt carrier. _____ _____(7) Remove idler sprocket shafts. _____ _____(8) Remove idler sprockets. _____ _____(9) Remove drive sprocket retainer. _____ _____(10) Remove drive sprocket. _____ _____(11) Remove chain from track assembly. _____ _____

4. Assemble and install the 25mm gun. _____ _____a. Assemble bolt and track assembly. _____ _____

(1) Place chain on track assembly. _____ _____(2) Insert drive sprocket. _____ _____(3) Insert drive sprocket retainer. _____ _____(4) Insert idler sprockets. _____ _____(5) Insert idler sprocket shafts. _____ _____(6) Slide bolt into bolt carrier. _____ _____(7) Insert cam pin. _____ _____(8) Insert firing pin and sleeve into bolt. _____ _____(9) Insert firing pin keeper. _____ _____(10) Lock bolt in forward position. _____ _____(11) Place bolt and carrier on track assembly. _____ _____

b. Install bolt and track assembly. _____ _____(1) Lower drive shaft handle. _____ _____(2) Insert bolt and track assembly into receiver. _____ _____(3) Lock track latch handle. _____ _____(4) Cycle bolt to SEAR. _____ _____(5) Raise drive shaft handle. _____ _____

c. Install receiver. _____ _____(1) Pull anti-rotation latch handle out. _____ _____(2) Install receiver into trunion and lock anti-rotation handle

into place. (Assistant helps.) _____ _____(3) Connect electrical harness to J1 receptacle. _____ _____

d. Install barrel. _____ _____(1) Install barrel into barrel support. (Assistant helps.) _____ _____(2) Lock into place. _____ _____

e. Install feeder. _____ _____(1) Verify feeder assembly is in SEAR and AP. _____ _____

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment D-7

PERFORMANCE STEPS NO GO

(2) Lower drive shaft handle. _____ _____(3) Raise feeder handle. _____ _____(4) Position feeder on receiver. _____ _____(5) Raise drive shaft handle. _____ _____(6) Lower feeder handle. _____ _____(7) Install feed chutes. _____ _____(8) Install link chutes. _____ _____

5. Completed performance steps within 30 minutes. _____ _____

EVALUATOR’S NAME:_____________________________________________________

TEST DATE:__________OVERALL SCORE: GO NO GO

REMARKS:_________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

D-8 MCWP 3-14.1

PERFORMANCE STEPS GO NO GO

Test Station 3 - Load The M2407.62mm Coaxially Mounted Ma-chine Gun (0313.3.11)

1. Task. Load the M240 7.62mm coaxiallymounted machine gun.

2. Conditions. Given an LAV-25 with installed7.62mm coaxially mounted machine gun, 4007.62mm dummy rounds, appropriate tools, andtechnical manuals.

3. Standards. The Marine must fully load theready box and the coaxially mounted machine gunwithin 5 minutes.

4. Evaluation Procedures.

The evaluator logs crew members on a roster. Allmaterials and equipment needed for the task mustbe present and operational. The evaluator mustuse the performance checklists to score this task.Only one crewmember at a time will be tested.

If the crewmember receives a NO GO, he is toldwhat mistakes he made and actions required tocorrect them. The crewmember is tested in ac-cordance with local SOP.

5. Personnel, Equipment, and MaterialRequired:

Qualified LCE.Operational LAV-25 with SL-3.

Operational M240 coax machine gun,installed.Four hundred rounds of 7.62mm, dummyammunition.Stopwatch.Clipboard and pen.

6. Pretest Preparation:

Remove 7.62mm coaxially mounted machinegun and ensure all parts are present andoperational.Install 7.62mm coaxially mounted machinegun.Ensure all power is off.

7. Test Planning Time

Administrative: 5 minutesTest: 5 minutes

Total: 10 minutes

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment D-9

Recommended Performance Checklist, Station 3

NAME:_______________________________________________________________________GRADE:___________ UNIT:___________________ DUTY POSITION:________________

TASK: Load the M240 7.62mm coaxially mounted machine gun.

1. Ensure that the turret is powered down. _____ _____2. Ensure that the turret is locked. _____ _____3. Ensure that the M240 is clear. _____ _____

a. Charge M240 machine gun. _____ _____b. Set manual safe on M240 to SAFE. _____ _____c. Open cover assembly and feed tray. _____ _____d. Look in chamber to ensure no rounds in chamber. _____ _____e. Close feed tray. _____ _____f. Close cover assembly. _____ _____g. Place on fire and ride bolt forward. _____ _____

4. Ensure that the feed chute is connected. _____ _____5. Load the ready box. _____ _____6. Route the ammunition to the M240. _____ _____7. Place the ammunition in the M240. _____ _____

a. Charge M240 machine gun. _____ _____b. Set manual safe on M240 to SAFE. _____ _____c. Open cover assembly. _____ _____d. Install ammunition belt on feed tray. _____ _____e. Close cover assembly. _____ _____

8. Completed performance steps within 5 minutes. _____ _____

EVALUATOR’S NAME:_____________________________________________________

TEST DATE:__________OVERALL SCORE: GO NO GO

REMARKS:_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

D-10 MCWP 3-14.1

PERFORMANCE STEPS GO NO GO

Test Station 4 - Clear, Remove,Disassemble, Assemble, and In-stall the M240 7.62mm CoaxiallyMounted Machine Gun (0313.3.3;0313.3.4; 0313.3.12)

1. Task. Clear, remove, disassemble, assemble,and install the M240 7.62mm coaxially mountedmachine gun.

2. Conditions. Given an LAV-25 with installedM240 7.62mm coaxially mounted machine gunloaded with 400 7.62mm dummy rounds, appro-priate tools, and technical manuals.

c. Standards. Within 15 minutes the Marinemust—

Clear and fully unload the M240 7.62mm co-axially mounted machinegun, unload the am-munition from the feed chute and ready box;and stow the ammunition in the ammunitioncans.Remove the M240 7.62mm coaxiallymounted machine gun and completely disas-semble the weapon.Assemble, perform a function check on theM240 7.62mm coaxially mounted machinegun, and install the weapon.

4. Evaluation Procedures.

The evaluator logs crew members on a roster. Allmaterials and equipment needed for the task mustbe present and operational. The evaluator mustuse the performance checklists to score this task.Only one crewmember at a time is tested.

If the crewmember receives a NO GO, he is toldwhat mistakes he made and actions required tocorrect them. The crewmember is tested in ac-cordance with local SOP.

5. Personnel, Equipment, and MaterialRequired:

Qualified LCE.Operational LAV-25 with SL-3.Operational, installed, fully loaded M2407.62mm coaxially mounted machinegun.Four hundred rounds 7.62mm dummyammunition.Stopwatch.Clipboard and pen.

6. Pretest Preparation:

Remove 7.62mm machine gun and ensure allparts are present and operational.Ensure the 7.62mm machine gun mountsproperly.Install 7.62mm machine gun.Ensure that the 7.62mm machine gun is com-pletely loaded.Ensure master power and turret powerswitches are off.Ensure cradle is clear of any obstructions.Ensure the cradle securing pin is present.

7. Test Planning Time.

Administrative: 5 minutesTest: 15 minutes

Total: 20 minutes

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment D-11

Recommended Performance Checklist, Station 4

NAME:____________________________________________________________ ___________GRADE:___________ UNIT:___________________ DUTY POSITION:________________

TASK: Clear, remove, disassemble, assemble, and install the M240 7.62mm coaxially mountedmachine gun.

1. Unload the M240 coax machine gun. _____ _____a. Ensure that the turret is powered down. _____ _____b. Pull the charger cable to lock the bolt to rear. _____ _____c. Place manual safety to SAFE position. _____ _____d. Open cover assembly. _____ _____e. Remove any ammunition from feed tray. _____ _____f. Raise feed tray. _____ _____g. Look in chamber to ensure no rounds in chamber. _____ _____h. Close cover assembly. _____ _____i. Place manual safety to FIRE position. _____ _____j. Pull manual fire lever, ride bolt forward. _____ _____k. Perform steps a through j in sequence. _____ _____

2. Download 7.62mm ammunition. _____ _____a. Remove ammunition from feed chute and ready box. _____ _____b. Place ammunition into ammo cans. _____ _____

3. Remove M240 coax machine gun. _____ _____a. Unlock and remove gun cradle securing pin. _____ _____b. Pull and hold cradle release lever. _____ _____c. Lift rear of coax gun and pull it away from rotor. _____ _____d. Release cradle release lever. _____ _____e. Remove coax gun from cradle. _____ _____

4. Disassemble M240 machine gun. _____ _____a. Depress barrel locking latch and hold. _____ _____b. Turn barrel release to upright position. _____ _____c. Remove barrel. _____ _____d. Depress trigger pin spring and remove pin. _____ _____e. Pull trigger housing assembly down and back. _____ _____f. Pull charger handle through cable guide. _____ _____g. Pull back plate latch and lift buffer straight up. _____ _____h. Press driving spring in, then up, and pull out. _____ _____i. Depress cover latches and raise cover assembly. _____ _____j. Pull charger handle back, pull out the bolt and

operating rod assembly. _____ _____k. Close cover, push out spring pin, and remove. _____ _____l. Press latches and remove cover assembly and feed tray. _____ _____

5. Assemble the M240 coax machine gun. _____ _____a. Position feed tray and cover assembly, push cover

assembly forward, close cover, and insert spring pin. _____ _____b. Insert spring pin from right side. _____ _____

D-12 MCWP 3-14.1

PERFORMANCE STEPS GO NO GO

c. Open cover assemby. _____ _____d. Set bolt and operating rod assembly on top

of receiver rails. _____ _____e. Extend bolt to unlocked position, then push

assembly all the way in. _____ _____f. Close and lock cover. _____ _____g. Insert driving spring in the operating rod, push in fully,

and lower it to seat the stud in the hole of the receiver. _____ _____h. Install buffer and make sure it latches. _____ _____i. Slide charger handle through cable guide

and position trigger housing assembly in place. _____ _____j. Insert pin. _____ _____k. Insert barrel fully into socket, push barrel

release to the right as far as it will go (not less than two, or more than seven clicks). _____ _____

6. Perform function check on M240 machine gun. _____ _____a. Ensure safety is to FIRE position. _____ _____b. Charge the weapon. _____ _____c. Place safety to SAFE position. _____ _____d. Attempt to fire the weapon. (The weapon should

not fire.) _____ _____e. Place safety to FIRE position and ease recoiling

parts forward. _____ _____f. Perform steps a through e in sequence. _____ _____

7. Install the M240 coax machine gun. _____ _____a. Place M240 coax machine gun in

cradle channel guide. _____ _____b. Slide M240 coax machine gun forward

until rear of machine gun is seated in cradle. _____ _____c. Install and lock gun cradle securing pin. _____ _____d. Ensure the feed chute is connected. _____ _____

8. Completed performance steps within 15 minutes. _____ _____

EVALUATOR’S NAME:_____________________________________________________

TEST DATE:__________OVERALL SCORE: GO NO GO

REMARKS:_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment D-13

PERFORMANCE STEPS GO NO GO

D-14 MCWP 3-14.1

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Test Station 5 - Load the M240E1Pintle-Mounted Machine Gun.(0313.3.13)

1. Task. Load the M240E1 pintle-mountedmachine gun.

2. Conditions. Given an LAV-25 with installedM240E1 pintle-mounted machine gun, 200rounds of 7.62mm dummy ammunition, and ap-propriate tools and technical manuals.

3. Standards. The Marine must fully load theM240E1 pintle-mounted machine gun within 2minutes.

4. Evaluation Procedures.

The evaluator logs crew members on a roster. Allmaterials and equipment needed for the task willbe present and operational. The evaluator mustuse the performance checklists to score this task.Only one crewmember at a time is tested.

If the crewmember receives a NO GO, he is toldwhat mistakes he made and actions required tocorrect them. The crewmember is tested in ac-cordance with local SOP.

5. Personnel, Equipment, and MaterialRequired:

Qualified LCE.Operational LAV-25 with SL-3.

Operational, installed M240E1 pintle-mounted machine gun.Two hundred rounds of 7.62mm dummy am-munition in an ammunition can.Stopwatch.Clipboard and pen.

6. Pretest Preparation:

Clear the weapon.Complete a function check on the weapon.Ensure M240E1 machinegun bolt is forward.

Ensure manual safe is set to FIRE position.

7. Test Planning Time

Administrative: 5 minutesTest: 2 minutes

Total: 7 minutes

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment D-15

Recommended Performance Checklist, Station 5

NAME:_______________________________________________________________________GRADE:___________ UNIT:___________________ DUTY POSITION:________________

TASK: Load the M240E1 pintle-mounted 7.62mm machine gun.

1. Load the M240E1 pintle-mounted machine gun. _____ _____a. Ensure the M240E1 is clear. _____ _____

(1) Pull the charging handle to lock the bolt to rear. _____ _____

(2) Place manual safety to SAFE position. _____ _____(3) Open cover assembly. _____ _____(4) Raise feed tray. _____ _____(5) Look into chamber to ensure no rounds

are in chamber. _____ _____(6) Close cover assembly. _____ _____(7) Place manual safety to FIRE position. _____ _____(8) Pull trigger, ride bolt forward. _____ _____(9) Perform steps 1 through 8 in sequence. _____ _____

b. Charge M240E1 machine gun. _____ _____c. Set manual safe on M240E1 to SAFE. _____ _____d. Open cover assembly. _____ _____e. Attach 7.62mm ammunition can to the gun cradle. _____ _____f. Install ammunition belt on feed tray. _____ _____g. Close cover assembly. _____ _____

2. Completed performance steps within 2 minutes. _____ _____

EVALUATOR’S NAME:_____________________________________________________

TEST DATE:__________OVERALL SCORE: GO NO GO

REMARKS:_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

D-16 MCWP 3-14.1

PERFORMANCE STEPS GO NO GO

Test Station 6 - Clear, Remove,and Install the M240E1 Pintle-Mounted Machine Gun. (0313.3.5;0313.3.6; 0313.3.14)

1. Task. Clear, remove, and install the M240E1pintle-mounted machine gun.

2. Conditions. Given an LAV-25 with installedM240E1 7.62mm pintle-mounted machine gun,loaded with 200 7.62mm dummy rounds, appro-priate tools, and technical manuals.

3. Standards. Within 5 minutes, the Marinemust—

Clear and fully unload the M240E1 7.62mmpintle-mounted machine gun, and stow theammunition in the ammunition cans.Remove the M240E1 7.62mm pintle-mounted machine gun from its cradle, andremove the pintle-mount cradle from theLAV-25.Install the pintle-mount cradle onto theLAV-25, and install the M240E1 pintle-mounted machine gun into the cradle.

4. Evaluation Procedures.

The evaluator logs crew members on a roster. Allmaterials and equipment needed for the task mustbe present and operational. The evaluator mustuse the performance checklists to score this task.Only one crewmember at a time is tested.

If the crewmember receives a NO GO, he is toldwhat mistakes he made and actions required tocorrect them. The crewmember is tested in ac-cordance with local SOP.

5. Personnel, Equipment, and Material Required:

Qualified LCE.Operational LAV-25 with SL-3.Operational, installed, fully loaded M240E17.62mm pintle-mounted machine gun.200 rounds 7.62mm dummy ammunition.Stopwatch.Clipboard and pen.

6. Pretest Preparation:

Remove 7.62mm pintle-mounted machinegun and ensure all parts are present andoperational.Ensure the pintle-mount gun cradle is in-stalled securely on the LAV-25.Ensure the 7.62mm pintle-mounted ma-chinegun mounts properly to the cradle.Install 7.62mm pintle-mounted machine gun.Ensure that the 7.62mm pintle-mounted ma-chine gun is completely loaded.

7. Test Planning Time

Administrative: 5 minutesTest: 5 minutes

Total: 10 minutes

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment D-17

Recommended Performance Checklist, Station 6

NAME:_______________________________________________________________________GRADE:___________ UNIT:___________________ DUTY POSITION:________________

TASK: Clear, remove, and install the M240E1 pintle-mounted 7.62mm machine gun.

1. Unload the M240E1 pintle-mounted machine gun. _____ _____a. Pull the charging handle to lock the bolt to rear. _____ _____b. Place manual safety to SAFE position. _____ _____c. Open cover assembly. _____ _____d. Remove any ammunition from feed tray. _____ _____e. Raise feed tray. _____ _____f. Look in chamber to ensure no rounds are in chamber. _____ _____g. Close cover assembly. _____ _____h. Place manual safety to FIRE position. _____ _____i. Pull trigger, ride bolt forward. _____ _____j. Perform steps a through i in sequence. _____ _____

2. Download 7.62mm ammunition. _____ _____a. Place ammunition in ammo cans. _____ _____b. Remove the ammunition can from the pintle-mount

gun cradle. _____ _____c. Stow ammunition. _____ _____

3. Remove M240E1 pintle-mounted machine gun. _____ _____a. Unlock and remove gun cradle securing pin. _____ _____b. Remove M240E1 from the pintle-mount gun cradle. _____ _____c. Remove the pintle-mount gun cradle from the LAV-25._____ _____

4. Install the M240E1 pintle-mounted machine gun. _____ _____a. Attach the pintle-mount gun cradle to the LAV-25. _____ _____b. Lock the M240E1 to the pintle-mount gun cradle. _____ _____e. Insert the gun cradle securing pin. _____ _____

5. Completed performance steps within 5 minutes. _____ _____

EVALUATOR’S NAME:_____________________________________________________

TEST DATE:__________OVERALL SCORE: GO NO GO

REMARKS:_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

D-18 MCWP 3-14.1

PERFORMANCE STEPS GO NO GO

Test Station 7 - Boresight LAV-25Turret Weapon Systems

1. Task. Boresight the LAV-25 turret weaponssystems.

2. Conditions. Acting as a gunner, with the aidof one assistant, given an LAV-25 with SL-3;boresight adapter; boresight kit; and an M240coax machine gun installed.

3. Standards. Within 15 minutes, the Marineboresights the turret weapons systems. (TheMarine performs the task as a gunner and a vehi-cle commander; the assistant acts as the driver.)The Marine must—

Align the gunner’s DIM-36TH and the com-mander’s M36 to show the same sight pic-ture as the borescope.Align the installed coax machinegun to the1000 meter reference point.

4. Evaluation Procedures.

The evaluator logs crew members on a roster. Allmaterials and equipment needed for the task mustbe present and operational. The evaluator mustuse the performance checklists to score this task.Only one crewmember at a time is tested.

If the crewmember receives a NO GO, he is toldwhat mistakes he made and actions required tocorrect them. The crewmember is tested in ac-cordance with local SOP.

5. Personnel, Equipment, and MaterialRequired:

Qualified LCE.Operational LAV-25 with SL-3.Operational M240 coax machine gun.25mm boresight kit and adapter.Stopwatch.Clipboard and pen.

6. Pretest Preparation:

Insert 25mm boresight adapter and boresighttelescope.Align telescope on a target approximately1000 meters away.Ensure DIM-36TH and M36 are installedand secure, and will boresight.Offset the alignment of the sights.Instruct the assistant to act only as thedriver.Ensure that the DIM-36TH is cooled downprior to testing any Marines.

7. Test Planning Time.

Administrative: 5 minutesTest: 15 minutes

Total: 20 minutes

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment D-19

Recommended Performance Checklist, Station 7

NAME:_______________________________________________________________________GRADE:___________ UNIT:___________________ DUTY POSITION:________________

TASK: Boresight the LAV-25 turret weapons systems.

1. Turn on the thermal sight. _____ _____2. Align the day sights. _____ _____

a. Clear both the main gun and the coaxially mounted machine gun. _____ _____

b. Locate aiming point on target at 1000 meters. _____ _____c. Set turret drive lock lever to unlock. _____ _____d. Ensure sights are properly installed and secure. _____ _____e. Manually move turret/gun to place day sight reticle

boresight cross on chosen aiming point.f. Setup the boresight adapter and telescope. _____ _____g. Move turret/gun manually to lay boresight telescope

reticle on aiming point. (Assistant guides the Marine.) _____ _____h. Adjust gunner’s day sight to align boresight cross on

the aiming point. _____ _____i. Set deflection and elevation collars to midscale (4). _____ _____j. Repeat steps h and i for the commander’s day sight. _____ _____

3. Align the thermal sight. _____ _____a. Ensure that daysight boresight cross is on chosen

aiming point. _____ _____b. Set System Mode switch to BORESIGHT. _____ _____c. Set Field of View to NARROW. _____ _____d. Using boresight switch, align thermal boresight cross to

same aiming point as daysight. _____ _____e. Manually place the thermal sight battlesight circle on the

same aiming point. _____ _____f. Set Field of View to WIDE. _____ _____g. Using the boresight switch, align the dot in the center of

the Wide Field of View to the same aiming point. _____ _____h. Turn the System Mode switch to NORMAL. _____ _____

4. Boresight the coax. _____ _____a. Manually move the turret/guns to place the day sight reticle

boresight cross on the chosen aiming point. _____ _____b. Install the boresight telescope and red streamer in the barrel

of coaxially mounted gun. _____ _____c. Adjust gun elevation and azimuth drives to align the

boresight telescope with the aiming point. _____ _____d. Remove and store boresight telescope and streamer. _____ _____

5. Completed performance measures within 15 minutes. _____ _____

D-20 MCWP 3-14.1

PERFORMANCE STEPS GO NO GO

EVALUATOR’S NAME:_____________________________________________________

TEST DATE:__________OVERALL SCORE: GO NO GO

REMARKS:_____________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment D-21

Score Sheet For The LAV-25 Gunnery Skills Test

MARINE’S NAME:___________________________________________________________

SSN:__________________RANK:________________________UNIT:_________________

DUTY POSITION:_______________________________TEST DATE:__________________

D-22 MCWP 3-14.1

RESULTSSTATION GO NO GO

1. Load the M242 25mm automatic gun.

2. Clear, remove, disassemble, assemble, and install the M24225mm automatic gun.

3. Load the M240 7.62mm coaxially mounted machine gun.

4. Clear, remove, disassemble, assemble, and install the M2407.62mm coaxially mounted machine gun.

5. Load the M240E1 pintle-mounted machine gun.

6. Clear, remove, and install the M240E1 pintle-mounted ma-chine gun.

7. Boresight LAV-25 turret weapon systems.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment D-23

Basic gunnery tables train crewmembers in the en-gagement of targets using battlesight and preci-sion gunnery, and fire adjustment techniques.Basic gunnery includes the firing of subcaliber ta-bles 1 through 3. Tables are fired using day and

night, or limited visibility conditions. The thermalor the passive sight may be used at night; units areencouraged to use both throughout training.

Appendix E

Basic Gunnery Tables

E-2 MCWP 3-14.1

(This page intentionally left blank.)

Table 1.Precision Gunnery Manipulation

Table 1 is a precision gunnery manipulation exer-cise designed to evaluate each crewmember’sability, acting as a gunner, to properly range andaim at frontal and flank targets at varied ranges.Table 1 reinforces precision gunnery rangingskills, and drills the crewmembers in precisiongunnery aiming procedures.

Table 1 is divided into three phases that should berun successively. Table 1 is a scaled laser rangethat uses the visual aiming device (VAD) with themanipulation board (see fig. E-1). The manipula-tion board is placed 23 meters in front of the fir-ing vehicle, and the targets are sized according tofigure E-1. Crewmembers must achieve a GO onall three phases to receive a GO on table 1.

General Instructions to Crewmemberson Task, Conditions, and Standards

Task. Engage five targets per phase.

Conditions. Given one shot per target, with theVAD.

Standards. Hit 4 of 5 targets within 15 secondsper phase.

ConductEvaluator aligns and zeros the laser by aiming ateach target, and placing a 1/2-inch marker onstout board in front of the vehicle prior to evalu-ating any crewmembers. Evaluator should checkzero of the day and night sights.

Manipulation board is placed 23 meters in front ofthe firing vehicle.

Target markers on stout board are no greater than1/2-inch in diameter.

Each crewmember is evaluated from the gunner’sstation.

Evaluator numbers each target per phase at ran-dom prior to conducting table 1.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment E-3

Figure E-1. Manipulation Board.

PHASE 1

2.34 INCHES

2.90 INCHES

3.90 INCHES

5.85 INCHES

5.85 INCHES 2.90 INCHES

1.46 INCHES1.17 INCHES

1.95 INCHES

11.70 INCHES

PHASE 2

PHASE 3

ALL TARGETS 5.85 INCHES WIDE

FLAN

K TA

RG

ETS FLA

NK

TAR

GETS

FLANK

TAR

GETS

Firing TasksPhase I, flank manipulation, evaluates the gun-ner’s ability to shift rapidly from target to targetat a constant range. Crewmember starts at thestart cross, and engages targets in numerical or-der, one shot per target.

Phase II, progressive flank manipulation, evalu-ates the gunner’s ability to rapidly shift from mul-tiple targets at progressively decreasing ranges.Crewmember starts at the start cross, and engagestargets in numerical order, one shot per target.

Phase III, non-progressive frontal manipulation,evaluates the gunner’s ability to rapidly shift frommultiple frontal targets at varied nonprogressiveranges. Crewmember starts at the start cross, andengages targets in numerical order, one shot pertarget.

Crewmember repeats all phases during reducedvisibility using the thermal night sight.

Note: The passive sight cannot be used for train-ing in this table.

Scoring ProceduresTime starts for each phase when the gunner firesat the start cross, and ends when the gunner firesat the last target.

Score each target as a hit or a miss. If 50 percentof the laser strike is outside the 1/2-inch target onthe stout board, it is a miss.

Allowable VariationsReduced visibility tasks may be fired during theday with the thermal night sight as long as targetson manipulation board are properly thermalized.

E-4 MCWP 3-14.1

Table 2. Battlesight GunneryManipulation

Table 2 is a battlesight gunnery manipulation ex-ercise designed to evaluate the crewmember’sability, acting as gunner, to properly aim at frontaltargets representing “most dangerous” threats tothe crew. The focus of the table is evaluating thecrewmember’s ability to consistently use theproper battlesight aiming point based on the tar-get and selected ammunition.

Table 2 uses the VAD and a scaled target panel(fig. E-2) that is manufactured locally. The scaledtarget panel is placed 23 meters in front of the fir-ing vehicle, and the targets are sized in accor-dance with figure E-2. Crewmembers must hitfour of five high explosive (HE) targets within thecenter mass circle and four of five armor piercing(AP) targets within the 6 o’clock circle.

General Instructions to Crewmemberson Task, Conditions, and Standards

Task. Engage ten targets.

Conditions. Given one shot per target with theVAD, engage targets in numerical order startingfrom the zero circle.

Standards. Hit 4 of 5 HE targets within thecenter mass circle and four of five AP targetswithin the 6 o’clock circle within 30 seconds inorder to receive a GO on table 2.

ConductEvaluator zeros VAD, day sight, and night sightprior to evaluating any crewmember. Laser is ze-roed to the battlesight circle on day sight andthermal sight reticles and to the center cross onthe passive night sight reticle.

Crewmember’s first shot will be at the zero circle(unevaluated) to initiate table start.

Crewmember fires the table from the gunner’s sta-tion for day fires and thermal night fires and firesfrom the commanders station for reduced visibilityfires with the passive night sight. Evaluator numbers each target at random prior toconducting table 2.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment E-5

Figure E-2. Scaled Target Panel.

Note: 1. Aiming circles are1/2-inch in diameter.

2. This is an example only;numbers for targets shouldbe random.

Firing TasksStarting at the zero circle, crewmember engagestargets in numerical order given one shot pertarget.

The firing task is repeated during reduced visibil-ity using the thermal night sight.

The firing task is repeated during reduced visibil-ity using the passive night sight.

Scoring ProceduresTime starts when the crewmember engages thezero circle and ends when the crewmember en-gages target 10.

Laser strikes more than 50 percent outside thecenter, and 6 o’clock circles will be evaluated asmisses.

Allowable VariationsReduced-visibility thermal engagements may befired during the day from the thermal sight.

E-6 MCWP 3-14.1

Table 3.Adjustment of Fire on Stationaryand Moving Targets

Table 3 is used to train the commander and thegunner in the fundamentals of direct fire adjust-ments. Table 3 requires them to use methods ofadjustment because error is induced into the sight-ing system. They use battlesight gunnery aimingtechniques when engaging targets on table 3. Thecommander and the gunner are evaluated on theproper use of fire commands to conduct the exer-cise. The crew duties are critiqued, but they haveno effect on the overall rating.

General Instructions to Crewmemberson Task, Conditions, and Standards

Task. Employ direct fire adjustment techniquesagainst stationary and moving targets.

Conditions. Using the M16A2 or M240 as thesubcaliber device, adjust fire from a first roundmiss. Tasks are fired from a stationary LAV-25against stationary and moving targets using tracerammunition.

Standards. Crewmembers use correct adjust-ment techniques, and hit the target with the sec-ond round to meet the minimum standards.Crewmembers must receive a GO on each task toreceive a GO on table 3.

ConductMaster gunner or LAV-25 crew evaluator (LCE)induces error into the fire control sighting systemprior to evaluating any crewmembers on table 3.

The appropriate scaled range size and range depthfor the recommended subcaliber devices are—

M16A2 (5.56mm), 1/20 scale, 100 meters.M16A2 (.22 cal), 1/60 or 1/35 scale, 60meters.M240 (7.62mm), 1/5 scale, 400 meters.

Note: If zeroing the subcaliber device is not ac-curate, reduce range scale and range asappropriate.

Firing Tasks

Task 1. The commander issues a battlesight firecommand while laying the gun for direction. Thegunner identifies and, on command, engages thetarget. Since error was induced into the fire con-trol system, the initial round will be off target re-quiring the gunner to use proper adjustmenttechniques to hit the target with the second round.Five targets are engaged in this manner, tworounds per target using the day sight.

Task 2. The commander repeats task 1 from thegunner’s position.

Task 3. Gunner repeats task 1 against five mov-ing targets.

Task 4. The commander repeats task 3 from thegunner’s position.

All tasks are repeated during reduced visibility us-ing the passive and thermal night sight. The gun-ner uses the thermal sight for tasks 1 and 3; thecommander uses the passive sight for tasks 2 and4.

Scoring Procedures

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment E-7

For all tasks, time starts when the commander orgunner issues the alert element of the fire com-mand, and time stops when the commander issuesCEASE FIRE on the fifth target.

Crew duties are critiqued but have no effect onthe overall rating on table 3.

Allowable VariationsReduced-visibility firing for the gunner may be ac-complished during the day as long as the nightsight is used.

The commander’s reduced-visibility firing is indarkness due to the nature of the commander’snight sight.

If moving targets are not available, they may besubstituted with stationary frontal targets.

E-8 MCWP 3-14.1

TASK TARGETCONDITION

AMMUNITION HIT TIME CREWDUTIES

RATING

Apply direct fire adjustmentusing the gunner’s controls.

5 stationary targets 10 rounds 3 of 5 in 0-2

3030+

SatUnsat

GONO GO

Apply direct fire adjustmentusing the commander’scontrols.

5 stationary targets 10 rounds 3 of 5 in 0-2

3030+

SatUnsat

GONO GO

Apply direct fire adjustmentusing the gunner’s controls.

5 stationary targets 10 rounds 3 of 5 in 0-2

3030+

SatUnsat

GONO GO

Apply direct fire adjustmentusing the commander’s

5 stationary targets 10 rounds 3 of 5 in 0-2

3030+

SatUnsat

GONO GO

Table 3, Adjustment of Fire on Stationary and Moving Targets.

Tables 4 through 8 are sustainment gunnery ta-bles. Sustainment tables are designed to reinforce,evaluate, and drill precision and battlesight skillsdemonstrated during crew qualification and en-sure these skills do not perish. Sustainment gun-nery enables commanders to meet existingtraining requirements, i.e., nuclear, biological, andchemical (NBC) gunnery, and allows commandersand master gunners to mold training to correctdeficiencies identified during gunnery densityanalysis.

Sustainment gunnery takes crews that successfullycomplete basic gunnery and equips them with theskills necessary to fire full caliber ammunition andcomplete crew qualification. A unit should not im-plement sustainment gunnery prior to conductinggunnery density analysis and identifying strengthsand weaknesses.

Sustainment tables can and should be modified tosuit unit’s training needs as identified in gunnerydensity analysis. Any modification done shouldmaintain the intent of the table. If the intent of thetable would be changed, then modification shouldbe avoided. An alternative would be alternatetraining to provide the training needed.

Evaluation Procedures andStandards

Sustainment gunnery tables include crewmemberand crew evaluation. Each table specifies who is

evaluated, and lists the standards necessary tocomplete the table successfully. Allcrews/crewmembers are evaluated in accordancewith the listed standards, and crews/crew mem-bers are critiqued after each evolution to discussperformance. Qualified LAV-25 crew evaluators(LCEs) should conduct tables, and the same LCEshould conduct the critiques and remediation, ifrequired.

The LCE must time each table in accordance withthe outlined procedures. The LCE evaluates thetables in accordance with the standards outlined inthe table.

Each table is evaluated as a GO or a NO GO. Thecriteria to receive a GO varies, but is outlined inthe table.

Ammunition. Most of sustainment gunnery isconducted using the visual aiming device (VAD)as the subcaliber device, allowing the evaluator tojudge whether the gunner is using proper proce-dures. It is highly critical that the evaluator prop-erly zero the VAD prior to evaluation. (See chap.7 for zeroing procedures). On table 7, the M16A2firing 5.56mm tracer is used as the subcaliber de-vice. Using the M16 on any table other than table7 will destroy the validity of that table due to thenature of the sighting system. The flat trajectoryof the 5.56mm makes it impossible to accuratelyevaluate aiming techniques other than battlesighton scaled (reduced) ranges.

Appendix F

Sustainment Gunnery Tables

(This page intentionally left blank.)

F-2 LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment

Table 4. Range Determination Exercise

Table 4 begins the sustainment phase of the gun-nery training program. Table 4 is a range determi-nation exercise designed to evaluate thecrewmember’s ability to determine range to tar-gets at various distances and under various condi-tions with the aided and unaided eye. The focus ofthe table is to evaluate the crewmember’s abilityto determine—

If lightly armored targets are within battle-sight range.If rocket propelled grenade (RPG) teams arewithin effective range.Range accurately in a timely manner.

Table 4 is divided into three phases that should beconducted concurrently. There is no requirementfor a multipurpose range complex (MPRC); table4 can be operated in any area with the availablerange to place targets at the tasks’ prescribedranges. Crewmembers must achieve a GO on all 3phases to receive a GO on table 4.

Phase I Phase I evaluates each crewmember’s ability todetermine, with the unaided eye, whether a lightlyarmored target is within battlesight range andwhether an RPG-7 team is within its’ effectiverange. This phase aids the crew members in deter-mining which engagement method to use andreinforces target priority in multiple personnelcarrier (PC)/RPG engagements.

General Instructions to Crewmemberson Task, Conditions, and Standards

Task. Select an engagement method bydetermining if a lightly armored target is withinbattlesight range, and determine if an RPG team iswithin effective range.

Conditions. With the unaided eye, given an am-munition, using full-scale threat targets presentedat various ranges in accordance with the chart be-low, accomplish each of the table’s tasks.

AMMUNITION BATTLESIGHT RANGEAPDS-T 0-1400 metersHEI-T 0-950 meters

RPG-7 effective range: 300-500 meters

Standards. Each task must be accomplishedwithin 5 seconds of receiving the appropriateammunition/weapon by the evaluator in order toreceive a GO for that task. Each crewmembermust receive a GO on 8 of the 10 tasks to receivea GO on phase I.

Tasks1 through 5: Given one lightly armored target pertask, determine within 5 seconds each if the targetis within battlesight range for the selectedammunition.

6 through 10: Given one RPG team per task, de-termine within 5 seconds each if the target iswithin its effective range.

ConductEvaluator will inform the crewmember which am-munition or weapon he is to base his decisions onprior to each task.

Targets will be full-scale targets placed at actualrange. Number of targets within battlesight rangefor tasks 1 through 5 is at the discretion of thecommander. At least two of the tasks will be usedfor each ammunition’s respective battlesightrange.

Scoring ProceduresPhase I time begins when the evaluator gives thecrewmember the weapon/ammunition used, andtime ends when the crewmember announceswhich engagement method is used (i.e., battlesightor precision) or whether the RPG team is withinits effective range.

Phase II evaluates the crewmember’s ability to de-termine range to various targets with the aid ofbinoculars using the mil-relation rule. This phasereinforces skills required by the vehicle com-mander when determining range.

LAV -25 Gunnery and Employment F-3

General Instructions to Crewmemberson Task, Conditions, and Standards

Task. Determine the range to various targets.

Conditions. Given half- and full-scale threat tar-gets, using binoculars from a stationary vehicle,determine range to targets.

Standards. Determine range within 200 metersand within 10 seconds to receive a GO on eachtask. Crewmember must receive a GO on 8 of the10 tasks in order to receive a go on phase II.

Tasks1 through 5. Given one lightly armored target pertask, determine range within 200 meters and 10seconds for each target.

6 through 10. Given one infantry target per task,determine range within 200 meters and 10 sec-onds for each target.

ConductAll targets will be placed in a manner so that tar-get reference points (TRPs) can be designated ad-jacent to the targets. Evaluator will directcrewmember to determine range to target adja-cent to selected TRP.

Lightly armored targets may be half-scale andplaced at ranges from 400-1000 meters (actualrange) to simulate a range from 800-2,000 meters.

Infantry targets will be full-scale and placed at ac-tual range from 300-800 meters.

Scoring ProceduresPhase II time starts when the evaluator informsthe crewmember of the TRP adjacent to the tar-get, and time ends when the crewmember an-nounces the range.

Phase III evaluates the crewmember’s ability, act-ing as gunner, to determine range to various tar-gets using the reticle of the M36 day and thermalsight.

Note: Targets will require thermalization inaccordance with FM 25-7.

This phase reinforces skills required by the gunnerwhen ranging targets for precision gunnery.General Instructions to Crewmemberson Task, Conditions, and Standards

Task. Determine range to various targets.

Conditions. On a half-scale range, using theM36 sight from a stationary and moving vehicle,determine the range to targets.

Standards. Determine range to each targetwithin 100 meters within 10 seconds to receive aGO on each task. Crew must achieve a GO on 4 ofthe 5 tasks to receive a GO for phase III.

TasksDetermine range to a BMP 700-1,000 metersfrom a stationary vehicle.

Determine range to a BMP 1400-1,600 metersfrom a stationary vehicle.

Determine range to a BRDM 600-800 metersfrom a moving vehicle.

Determine range to a BTR 1,000-1,200 metersfrom a stationary vehicle.

Determine range to a truck 1,000-1,200 metersfrom a moving vehicle.

Repeat all tasks during reduced visibility with thethermal night sight.

ConductPhase III may be conducted on a half-scale range.

All targets are presented individually.

The evaluator, acting as vehicle commander, maylay the gun on target, and issue a fire command.

F-4 LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment

Scoring ProceduresPhase III time starts when the vehicle commander(evaluator) lays the gunner on target and gives the

fire command, and time ends when the gunner an-nounces the range.

LAV -25 Gunnery and Employment F-5

(This page intentionally left blank.)

F-6 LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment

Table 5. Target Acquisition Exercise

Table 5 is a target acquisition exercise designed toevaluate the crew’s ability to acquire and identifysingle and multiple vehicles and infantry threattargets from both a stationary and a moving vehi-cle. Table 5 reinforces acquisition skills requiredby the crewmembers, and drills the crewmembersin target search techniques.

General Instructions to CrewmembersTask, Conditions, and Standards

Task. Acquire and identify single and multiplevehicles and infantry targets.

Conditions. From a stationary and moving vehi-cle, using available optics and search techniques.

Standards. Each task must be accomplishedwithin 10 seconds of full target exposure. In or-der to receive a GO on each task, the crew mustacquire and identify all targets in the task withinthe time limit. The crew must receive a GO on 8of the 10 tasks to receive a GO on table 5.

ConductTable 5 can be conducted on a 1/2-scale range atthe commander’s discretion.

All targets must be accurate in scale andappearance.

Frontal or flank targets may be used at the com-mander’s discretion.

Table 5 can be modified to suit unit training needsidentified in training analysis.

TasksSee table diagram.

Table is repeated during reduced visibility.

Scoring ProceduresTime starts for all tasks when the target(s) arefully exposed, and time ends when the vehiclecommander/gunner completes the fire command.

LAV -25 Gunnery and Employment F-7

F-8 LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment

TASK/LAV-25 CONDITION TARGET CONDITION TIME GO NO GOAcquire single target from astationary LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 1400-1700 meters 10 seconds

Acquire multiple targetsfrom a stationary LAV-25.

Stationary BTR, 600-800 metersRPG team, 300-500 meters

10 seconds

Acquire single target from amoving LAV-25.

Stationary BTR, 600-1000 meters 10 seconds

Acquire multiple targetsfrom a moving LAV-25.

2 stationary BTRs, 1000-1400 meters 10 seconds

Acquire multiple targetsfrom a stationary LAV-25.

Dismounted troops, 500-700 metersRPG team, 300-500 meters

10 seconds

Acquire single target from amoving LAV-25.

Stationary truck, 500-700 meters 10 seconds

Acquire multiple targetsfrom a stationary LAV-25.

2 stationary BMPs, 1400-1700 meters 10 seconds

Acquire single target from amoving LAV-25.

RPG team, 500-700 meters 10 seconds

Acquire multiple targetsfrom a moving LAV-25.

Stationary BTR, 800-1000 metersStationary BMP, 800-1000 meters

10 seconds

Acquire single target from astationary LAV-25.

Dismounted troops, 700-1000 meters 10 seconds

Table 5 Target Acquisition Exercise.

Table 6. Precision Gunnery—ScaledRange

Table 6 is a scaled, precision gunnery range de-signed to evaluate the crew’s ability to function asa unit, and the gunner’s ability to use precisionaiming procedures on threat targets at variousranges. Crew duties are evaluated on table 6 assatisfactory or unsatisfactory.

General Instructions to Crewmemberson Task, Conditions, and Standards

Task. Engage single and multiple vehicle targets.

Conditions. Given one shot per target with avisual aiming device (VAD), from a stationary ve-hicle, using precision gunnery techniques.

Standards. To achieve a GO on a task, the crewmust hit all targets in that task and receive a“SAT” on crew duties within the established time.To receive a “SAT,” the vehicle commander mustproperly lay the gunner on target and issue an ap-propriate fire command. To achieve a GO on table6, the crew must receive a GO on 8 of the 10tasks.

ConductTable 6 will be conducted on a scaled range withappropriately scaled targets.

Evaluators will zero each target to the stout boardwith 1/2-inch markers prior to evaluating anycrews.

If lifters are not used to present the targets, theevaluator must ensure that placards are placed ad-jacent to each engagement and the evaluationmust also identify the engagement to the crew byplacard number. If the engagement includes amoving target, the evaluator will tell the crew

which target is simulated to be moving. The crewwill not receive any training in tracking; they willbe drilled on the proper lead angle used when fir-ing at moving targets.

Moving targets will be represented on the stoutboard by the evaluator placing the mark 5 milsahead of the target for armor piercing (AP) and10 mils ahead of the target for high explosive(HE). This will evaluate the crew’s ability to usethe standard leads for the appropriate ammuni-tions since it is impossible to zero a moving targetto the stout board.

Evaluator must ensure that any targets within bat-tlesight range are presented as dangerous or leastdangerous targets (i.e., presented as flank or reartargets).

TasksRepeat table under reduced visibility and limitedvisibility conditions using thermal night sight.

Scoring ProceduresTime starts for all tasks when either the target(s)is fully exposed or the evaluator identifies the en-gagement to the crew by stating the placard num-ber. Time ends when the vehicle commanderannounces CEASE FIRE.

Markers placed on the stout board should be nogreater than 1/2-inch in diameter, and laser strikeswhere 50 percent of the laser is outside themarker are evaluated as misses.

Allowable VariationsReduced visibility firing of the table can be ac-complished during the day as long as the nightsight is used.

If moving targets are not available, stationaryfrontal targets may be substituted.

LAV -25 Gunnery and Employment F-9

F-10 LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment

TASK TARGET CONDITION AMMUNITION TIME CREW DUTIESSAT UNSAT

Engage Multiple Targets 2 Stationary BMPs, 1400 meters 2 RDS lasers 20 seconds

Engage Single Target 1 Moving BRDM, 1100 meters 1 RDS laser 15 seconds

Engage Multiple Targets 1 Moving BMP, 1200 meters

1 Stationary BTR, 1000 meters

2 RDS lasers 20 seconds

Engage Single Target 1 Stationary BTRs, 1500 meters 1 RDS laser 15 seconds

Engage Multiple Targets 2 Stationary BRDMs, 1300 meters 2 RDS lasers 20 seconds

Engage Single Target 1 Moving BMP, 1500 meters 1 RDS laser 15 seconds

Engage Multiple Targets 1 Stationary BMP, 1600 meters

1 Stationary BTR, 1600 meters

2 RDS lasers 20 seconds

Engage Multiple Targets 1 Stationary BRDM, 1000 meters

1 Stationary BMP, 1200 meters

2 RDS lasers 20 seconds

Engage Multiple Targets 2 Moving BMPs, 1400 meters 2 RDS lasers 20 seconds

Engage Single Target 1 Stationary BMP, 1700 meters 1 RDS laser 15 seconds

Table 6 Precision Gunnery—Scaled Range.

Table 7. Battlesight Gunnery—ScaledRange

Table 7 is a battlesight gunnery exercise fired on ascaled range designed to evaluate the crew’s abil-ity to function as a unit and the gunner’s ability touse battlesight gunnery aiming and adjusting tech-niques on threat targets within battlesight range.The M16A2, firing 5.56mm tracer, is the subcali-ber device recommended for firing table 7. Crewduties are evaluated on table 7 as satisfactory orunsatisfactory.

General Instructions to Crewmemberson Task, Conditions, Standards

Task. Engage single and multiple vehicle targets.

Conditions. Exercising proper crew duties,given one round sensing and one round to adjustwith the M16A2 for each target, from a stationaryvehicle and using battlesight gunnery techniques.

Standards. To receive a GO on each task, thecrew must hit all targets in that task and receive a“SAT” on crew duties within the established tasktime. To receive a “SAT,” the vehicle commandermust properly lay the gunner on target and issuean appropriate fire command. To achieve a GO ontable 7, the crew must achieve a GO on 8 of the10 tasks.

ConductTable 7 will be conducted on a 1/30- or 1/60-scaled range with appropriately scaled targets.

Scoring is conducted by moving down range aftertable and verifying/pasting shot holes.

Evaluator will zero subcaliber device to battle-sight circle prior to evaluating any crews.

If target lifters are not used, placards will beplaced near each engagement for the crews to useas guides, and the evaluator will identify the en-gagement to the crew by placard number.

Two 16 round magazines will be prepared for thecrew and changed for the crew after task 5.

TasksAll tasks will be repeated during reduced visibilityusing the thermal sight, and the passive nightsight.

Scoring ProceduresTime starts for each engagement when the targetsare fully exposed or the evaluator instructs thecrew on the engagement by giving them a placardnumber. Time stops when the vehicle commanderannounces CEASE FIRE.

Targets are scored by visually inspecting them forshot holes. One hit is required to get credit forthat engagement.

Allowable VariationsReduced visibility firing can be accomplished dur-ing the day as long as the thermal night sight isused.

If moving targets are not available, a stationaryfrontal target may be substituted.

LAV -25 Gunnery and Employment F-11

F-12 LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment

TASK TARGET CONDITION AMMUNITION TIME CREW DUTIESSAT UNSAT

Engage Multiple Targets 2 stationary BMPs, 1400 meters 4 RDS 5.56T 20 seconds

Engage Single Target 1 stationary BMP, 1100 meters 2 RDS 5.56T 10 seconds

Engage Multiple Targets 2 stationary BMPs, 900 meters 4 RDS 5.56T 20 seconds

Engage Single Target 1 stationary BMP, 1000 meters 2 RDS 5.56T 10 seconds

Engage Multiple Targets 2 stationary BMPs, 1300 meters 4 RDS 5.56T 20 seconds

Engage Single Target 1 stationary BMP, 800 meters 2 RDS 5.56T 10 seconds

Engage Multiple Targets 2 stationary BMPs, 1000 meters 4 RDS 5.56T 20 seconds

Engage Multiple Targets 2 stationary BMPs, 1200 meters 4 RDS 5.56T 20 seconds

Engage Multiple Targets 2 stationary BMPs, 1100 meters 4 RDS 5.56T 20 seconds

Engage Single Target 1 stationary BMP, 1000 meters 2 RDS 5.56T 10 seconds

Table 7 Battlesight Gunnery—Scaled Range.

Table 8. NBC Gunnery

Table 8 is an NBC gunnery exercise fired with fullcaliber ammunition, designed to evaluate thecrew’s ability to function in an NBC environment.The table is fired in mission-oriented protectiveposture (MOPP) condition 4 with all vehiclehatches buttoned. Crew duties are not evaluatedon table 8; however, crew duties are critiqued atthe conclusion of the table.

General Instructions to Crewmemberson Task, Conditions, Standards

Task. Engage single and multiple vehicle and in-fantry targets.

Conditions. In MOPP-4, with all hatches but-toned, from both a stationary and a moving vehi-cle, against targets in battlesight range.

Standards. To receive a GO on table 8, thecrew must achieve 70 points or more on 5 of the8 tasks.

ConductTable 8 is fired on a full-scale range with full cali-ber ammunition. Units design table 8 to meet unitNBC requirements using the following guidelines:

Eight firing tasks including targets in battle-sight range.Four offensive and 4 defensive tasks.An even distribution of single and multiplePC and infantry engagements.A simultaneous engagement.

Scoring ProceduresAll tasks are scored using matrices H-3 and H-4.

The time starts for each engagement when the ve-hicle commander issues the alert element of thefire command, and the time stops when the vehi-cle commander announces CEASE FIRE for thefinal time in the engagement.

LAV -25 Gunnery and Employment F-13

(reverse blank)

Tables 9 through 12 are intermediate gunnery ta-bles. Intermediate tables begin single vehicle,crew, full caliber ammunition firing. Skills drilledduring sustainment gunnery are applied when fir-ing full caliber ammunition. The culmination ofthe intermediate tables is crew qualification, table12. The crew is evaluated on its ability to engagesingle and multiple, moving and stationary, vehi-cle and infantry targets, using battlesight and pre-cision gunnery techniques from a moving andstationary LAV-25.

Crew qualification enables crews to naturally pro-gress to advanced gunnery, having mastered theindividual and crew skills necessary to operate asa crew within an LAV-25 section. Successful in-termediate gunnery depends heavily on a strongfoundation of sustainment gunnery and a thor-ough follow up by commanders and master gun-ners to ensure the objectives and intents of thetables are met before progressing.

Evaluation Procedures andStandards

Intermediate gunnery tables evaluate the crew as aunit. Performance of crew duties is noted and cri-tiqued, but does not always affect a crew’s overallrating on all tables. The LAV-25 crew evaluator(LCE) responsible for evaluating the crew issolely responsible for debriefing the crew and pro-viding any necessary corrective action. The inter-mediate tables are structured to allow progressiveevaluation of crew duties. This is accomplished bycritiquing crew duties on tables 9 and 10 withoutweighing the crew’s performance against thecrew’s overall table results. Beginning at table 11,crew duties are integrated into the table results al-lowing crews to naturally progress from firing

subcaliber on scaled ranges to firing full caliber ona multipurpose range complex (MPRC).

Timing Procedures

Acquisition Time. Acquisition time is the timethe crew uses on each precision gunnery engage-ment to acquire the target. Acquisition time startswhen the target(s) are fully exposed. The timeends when 10 seconds elapses, or the gunner an-nounces IDENTIFIED. If the crew acquires thetarget(s) within the 10 seconds, they receive a GOon acquisition. If they do not acquire the tar-get(s), they receive a NO GO on acquisition. Thisnotation is not intended to penalize the crew; butis designed for the evaluator to recognize trends,and to identify areas of strength and weaknesswithin each crew during the conduct of fire.

Exposure Time. Exposure time is defined asthe time the firing vehicle is exposed to the threat(target[s]). Exposure time always starts when thetarget(s) is fully exposed and always ends whenthe target(s) are destroyed. Exposure time mustbe recorded for each task that is fired, and foreach target that is presented. Exposure time maybe recorded by the LCE or the tower operatorwhen using computerized targeting. The determi-nation of which method to use to record exposuretime will be made after consideration of a numberof factors. These factors include, but are not lim-ited to: type of engagement; ability of tower op-erators; visibility; target array; and availability ofassets (personnel/equipment). Regardless ofmethod used, it must be consistent throughout thefiring evolution. Often, the decision is based onconsistency alone. The ability of numerous LCEsto maintain consistent recording is sometimeslimited.

Appendix G

Intermediate Gunnery Tables

Target Exposure Time. Target exposure timeis the time the target is programmed to be ex-posed to the firing vehicle. This time will alwaysbe sufficient for the crew to acquire the target anddestroy it while meeting the minimum engagementcriteria. Exposure time will vary from target totarget depending on the matrix used for scoring.Master gunners must remember to add target lifttime into target exposure time.

Precision and Battlesight Engagements.Exposure time for all engagements starts whenthe targets are fully exposed. When this conditionis met, the firing vehicle is considered exposed tothe threat, and the timing for the engagement (ex-posure time) starts. Time for the engagementstops when all targets are killed or target expo-sure time has expired.

Offensive/Defensive Engagements. Sinceall engagements start from either the hull-down(partially exposed) or the exposed position, thereare no special rules concerning timing for offen-sive or defensive engagements.

Multiple Engagements. Multiple engagementsare engagements with more than one target, andthey are to be engaged either sequentially or withthe same weapon. The timer must maintain a stop(kill) time for each target. The timer notes expo-sure (kill) time for each target and this time isused for scoring. It is important to note that expo-sure time for both targets starts when both thetargets are fully exposed. When the firing vehicleis engaging the first target, time is running on thesecond target. The only exception is during a mul-tiple battlesight engagement. In this case, the timefor the second target starts when the first target isdestroyed.

Simultaneous Engagements. Simultaneousengagements (e.g., M242 and M240E1) are en-gagements with more than one target, and the tar-gets are to be engaged at the same time withdifferent weapons. Simultaneous engagements arescored with point calculation worksheets(PCW’s). Timing procedures for simultaneous en-gagements are the same as multiple precision en-gagements. When the crew is engaging the firsttarget, time is running on the second target.

Standards

Coaxial Machine Gun/Pintle-Mounted Ma-chine Gun Engagements.

Area Engagements. Full credit is given when thecrew has suppressed the target area in accordancewith the area target engagement technique. TheLCE will announce SUPPRESSION to the crewwhen the conditions of the engagement have beenmet.

Point Engagements. Full credit is given when atarget hit is achieved on 1 of 2 or 1 of 3 infantryremoted target system (IRETS).

25mm Engagements. Full credit is given, regard-less of ammunition or method of engagement,when target receives three hits.

Scoring ProceduresScoring matrices and PCWs are used to determinethe level of proficiency during intermediate gun-nery. Scoring matrices are used to evaluate preci-sion gunnery and PCWs are used to evaluatebattlesight gunnery. The scoring matrices incorpo-rate target threat at varying ranges in relation toexposure time. The PCWs incorporate targetthreat based capabilities at specific ranges in rela-tion to the exposure time and conditions affectingthe threat gunner. Each task lists the appropriatescoring method to use. The timer records times,and figures the crew’s score per task in accor-dance with the following procedures:

Scoring Matrices (Single Engagements)

The timer—

Records exposure (kill) time.Reads across the column from the exposuretime and notes the score.Subtracts crew cuts assessed during the task.Circles GO for acquisition unless the crewfailed to acquire the target within 10 secondsof target exposure.

The result is the crew’s final score for the task.

G-2 MCWP 3-14.1

Scoring Matrices (Multiple TargetEngagements)

The timer—

Record the exposure time for each target inthe engagement.Uses second exposure (kill) time and readsacross to the “kill two” column and notes thescore, if both targets were killed. Then, thetimer uses the first exposure time, and readsacross to the “kill one” target column and,notes the score. Uses the higher score (thecrew is given the benefit of the doubt).Uses the exposure time for the target andreads across to the “kill one” target column,noting score, if one target is killed.Uses either score from (b) or (c) (whicheveris appropriate) and subtracts crew cuts as-sessed during the task.Circles GO for acquisition unless the crewfailed to acquire the target within 10 secondsof target exposure.

The result is the crew’s final score for the task.

PCWs (Single Target Engagements)

The timer—

Notes exposure (kill) time, target type, tar-get range, and conditions effecting the threatgunner.Uses the appropriate worksheet, based onthe factors above, and reads across for thescore for the exposure time.Subtracts crew cuts assessed during the task.

The result is the crew’s final score for the task.

PCWs (Multiple Engagements)

The timer—

Notes exposure (kill) times for target types,target ranges, and conditions affecting thethreat gunners.

Uses the appropriate worksheets, based onthe factors above, to determine score foreach target as in single target engagements.Records the average by adding the twoscores and dividing by two.Subtracts crew cuts assessed during the task.

The result is the crew’s final score for the task.

PCWs (Simultaneous Engagements)

The timer—

Notes the exposure (kill) time when both tar-gets were killed, the target types, targetranges, and conditions effecting the threatgunners. Uses the appropriate worksheets, based onthe above factors, to determine the score foreach target. Note that the same exposuretime will be used for both targets.Adds the two scores together and obtains anaverage by dividing by two.Subtracts crew cuts assessed during the task.

The result is the crew’s final score for the task.

Ammunition. For the conduct of intermediategunnery—

APDS-T/TPDS-T ammunition is usedagainst BMP targets.HEI-T/TP-T ammunition is used against allother vehicle targets.7.62mm ammunition is used against all infan-try type targets.

Commander’s Engagement. The commanderwill fire one engagement per Intermediate gunnerytable (day or night) based on the training analysis.

Allowable Variations. Each table specifies thevariations specifically allowed for that table.However, for tables 9 through 11, altering tablesfor training requirements or range deficiencies isalways acceptable but the intent of the tablesshould never be altered.

LAV-25- Gunnery and Employment G-3

(This page intentionally left blank.)

G-4 MCWP 3-14.1

Table 9. Full Caliber Battlesight

Table 9 is a full caliber battlesight table, fired on afull scale range, designed to reinforce battlesightengagement techniques. Battlesight aiming proce-dures drilled during sustainment gunnery, Table 7,are combined with direct fire adjustment tech-niques in preparation for crew qualification. Crewduties are evaluated and critiqued after each firingevolution.

General Instruction to Crewmemberson Task, Conditions, and Standards

Task. Engage single and multiple vehicle typetargets.

Conditions. From a stationary and moving vehi-cle, given “most dangerous” threat targets, en-gage using proper battlesight techniques.

Standards. Using the appropriate PCW to scoretasks, crews must successfully complete 8 of the10 tasks with 70 points or more to achieve a GOon table 9. Crew duties are evaluated and cri-tiqued but they do not affect the crew’s overallrating.

ConductTargets should represent accurate frontal threatmost dangerous targets.

All defensive engagements should be fired froman exposed position to reinforce task condition.

TasksTable 9 consists of 10 tasks, the first 5 of whichshould be fired during the day and the remaining 5fired at night.

Scoring ProceduresUse specified PCW per task. Refer to appendix Mfor use of PCWs.

Allowable VariationsIf ammunition constraints do not allow firing thetable as specified, use available ammunition andchange target type and range to conform to am-munition used.

If range facilities do not permit firing the table asspecified, modify as necessary.

LAV-25- Gunnery and Employment G-5

G-6 MCWP 3-14.1

TASK/ENGAGEMENTCONDITIONS

TARGET CONDITIONS AMMUNITION PCW

Employ battlesight gunnery against a

single target, moving LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 1000M-1200M 9 rounds TPDS-T One condition

Employ battlesight gunnery against a

single target, stationary LAV-25.

Stationary BTR, 800M-1200M 9 rounds TP-T Normal

Employ battlesight gunnery against mul-

tiple targets, moving LAV-25.

2 stationary BMPs, 1200M-1400M 18 rounds TPDS-T Normal

Employ battlesight gunnery against si-

multaneous targets, stationary LAV-25.

RPG team, 300M-500M

Stationary BTR, 700M-900M

50 rounds 7.62

9 rounds TP-T

Normal

Employ battlesight gunnery against mul-

tiple targets, moving LAV-25.

Stationary BTR, 700M-900M

Stationary BMP, 1000M-1300M

9 rounds TP-T

9 rounds TPDS-T

One condition

Employ battlesight gunnery against a

single target, stationary LAV-25.

Stationary BTR, 600M-800M 9 rounds TP-T Normal

Employ battlesight gunnery against a

single target, moving LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 1200M-1400M 9 rounds tpds-t One condition

Employ battlesight gunnery against mul-

tiple targets, stationary LAV-25.

2 Stationary BTRs, 800M-1000M 18 rounds TP-T Normal

Employ battlesight gunnery against mul-

tiple targets, moving LAV-25.

Stationary BTR, 700M-900M

Stationary BMP, 800M-1100M

9 rounds TP-T

9 rounds TPDS-T

One condition

Employ battlesight gunnery against mul-

tiple targets, stationary LAV-25.

2 Stationary BMPs, 1100M-1300M 18 rounds TPDS-T Normal

Ammunition requirements: 76* rounds TPDS-T; 67* rounds TP-T; 50 rounds 7.62mm

or 135 rounds of any 25mm; 50 rounds 7.62mm.

* Denotes rounds included for lost rounds due to changing feeds.

Table 9 Full Caliber Battlesight.

Table 10. Full Caliber Precision

Table 10 is a full caliber precision gunnery table,fired on a full scale range, and it evaluates thecrew’s ability to use precision gunnery techniques.Precision gunnery aiming procedures drilled dur-ing sustainment gunnery, table 6, are combinedwith direct fire adjustment techniques to preparefor crew qualification. Crew duties are evaluatedand critiqued but they do not affect the crew’soverall rating.

General Instructions to Crewmemberson Task, Conditions, and Standards

Task. Engage single and multiple vehicle and in-fantry targets.

Conditions. From a stationary and moving vehi-cle, given stationary and moving targets outsideof battlesight range, engage using proper preci-sion gunnery techniques.

Note: Precision engagements are allotted sixrounds. The only exception is when either the tar-get or the firing vehicle is moving, in which casenine rounds are allotted.

Standards. Using the appropriate matrix toscore tasks, crews must successfully complete 8

of the 10 tasks with 70 points or more to achievea GO on table 10. Crew duties are evaluated andcritiqued, but they do not affect the crew’s overallrating.

ConductTargets should represent accurate threat targets.

All Defensive engagements are fired from an ex-posed position.

TasksTable 10 consists of 10 tasks, the first 5 should befired during the day and the remaining 5 at night.

Scoring ProceduresUse the specified matrix per task.

Allowable VariationsIf ammunition constraints do not allow firing thetable as specified, use available ammunition andchange target type and range to conform to am-munition used (ensuring targets remain outsidethe ammunition’s battlesight range).

If range facilities do not allow firing the table asspecified, modify scenario as necessary.

LAV-25- Gunnery and Employment G-7

G-8 MCWP 3-14.1

TASK/ENGAGEMENTCONDITIONS

TARGET CONDITIONS AMMUNITION ACQUISITIONGO NO GO

MATRIX

Employ precision gunnery against

a single target, moving LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 1500M-1700M 9 rounds TPDS-T GO NO GO 9-1

Employ precision gunnery against

a single target, stationary LAV-25.

Moving BTR, 1100M-1300M 9 rounds TP-T GO NO GO 9-1

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, moving LAV-25.

Stationary jeep, 1300m-1500m

Dismounted troops, 500M-700M

9 rounds TP-T

100 rounds 7.62

GO NO GO 9-2

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, stationary

LAV-25.

Moving BMP, 1400M-1600M

Dismounted troops, 700M-900M

9 rounds TPDS-T

100 rounds 7.62

GO NO GO 9-2

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, moving LAV-25.

Moving jeep, 900M-1100M

Stationary BMP, 1500M-1700M

9 rounds TP-T

9 rounds TPDS-T

GO NO GO 9-2

Employ precision gunnery against

a single target, stationary LAV-25.

Moving BTR, 1000M-1200M 9 rounds TP-T GO NO GO 9-1

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, moving LAV-25.

Stationary BTR, 900M-1000M

Moving BMP, 1400M-1600M

9 rounds TP-T

9 rounds TPDS-T

GO NO GO 9-2

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, stationary

LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 1500M-1700M

Dismounted troops, 500M-700M

9 rounds TPDS-T

100 rounds 7.62

GO NO GO 9-2

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, moving LAV-25.

Stationary BTR, 1100M-1300M

Stationary BMP, 1400M-1600M

9 rounds TP-T

9 rounds TPDS-T

GO NO GO 9-2

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, stationary

LAV-25.

2 stationary BTRS,

1300M-1500M

18 rounds TP-T GO NO GO 9-2

Ammunition requirements: 59* rounds TPDS-T; 76* rounds TP-T; 300 rounds 7.62mm

or 126 rounds of any 25mm; 300 rounds 7.62mm.

* Denotes rounds included for lost rounds due to changing feeds.

Table 10 Full Caliber Precision.

Table 11. Full Caliber Combined—Prequalification

Table 11 is a full caliber combinedprecision/battlesight gunnery table, fired on a fullscale range, that serves as the 25mm prequalifica-tion table. Table 11 evaluates the crew’s ability toengage targets placed in a realistic threat array us-ing battlesight and precision methods of engage-ment. Tables 9 and 10 are combined in this tablefor prequalification in preparation for crew quali-fication. Crew duties are evaluated and critiquedbut they do not affect the crew’s overall rating.

General Instructions to Crewmemberson Task, Conditions, and Standards

Task. Engage single and multiple vehicle and in-fantry targets.

Conditions. From a stationary and moving vehi-cle, given stationary and moving vehicle and in-fantry targets, engage using proper battlesight andprecision techniques.

Standards. Using the appropriate matrix andPCW to score tasks, crews must successfullycomplete 7 of the 10 tasks with 70 points or moreto achieve a GO on table 11. Crew cuts are as-sessed on table 11.

ConductTargets should represent accurate threat targets.

All engagements should be fired from an exposedposition. Defensive engagements should not startfrom full defilade.

TasksTable 11 consists of 10 tasks, the first 5 should befired during the day, and the remaining 5 fired atnight.

ScoringUse specified matrix or PCW per task.

Refer to appendix M for use of PCWs andmatrices.

Allowable VariationsIf ammunition constraints do not allow firing thetable as specified, use the available ammunitionand modify the target type and range to corre-spond with available ammunition and method ofengagement used.

If range facilities do not allow firing the table asspecified, modify tasks as necessary.

LAV-25- Gunnery and Employment G-9

G-10 MCWP 3-14.1

TASK/ENGAGMENTCONDITIONS

TARGET CONDITIONS AMMUNITION ACQUISITIONGO NO GO

MATRIX

Employ precision gunnery against

single target, moving LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 1500M-1700M 6 rounds TPDS-T GO NO GO 9-1

Employ battlesight gunnery against

multiple targets, stationary LAV-25.

Stationary BTR, 700M-900M

Stationary BMP, 1200M-1400M

9 rounds TP-T

9 rounds TPDS-T

NA NA PCW

normal

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, moving LAV-25.

Moving BTR, 900M-1000M

Stationary BMP, 1500M-1700M

9 rounds TP-T

6 rounds TPDS-T

GO NO GO 9-2

Employ battlesight gunnery against

simultaneous targets, stationary

LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 1200M-1400M

RPG team, 300M-500M

9 rounds TPDS-T

50 rounds 7.62

NA NA PCW

one

condition

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, moving LAV-25.

Moving Jeep, 1300M-1500M

Dismounted troops, 500M-700M

9 rounds TP-T

100 rounds 7.62

GO NO GO 9-2

Employ battlesight gunnery against

a single target, stationary LAV-25.

Stationary BTR, 600M-800M 9 rounds TP-T NA NA PCW

normal

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, moving LAV-25.

Moving BMP, 1400M-1600M

Dismounted Troops, 500M-700M

9 rounds TPDS-T

100 rounds 7.62

GO NO GO 9-2

Employ battlesight gunnery against

multiple targets, stationary LAV-25.

2 stationary BMPs,

1000M-1300M

18 rounds TPDS-T NA NA PCW

normal

Employ precision gunnery against

a single target, stationary LAV-25.

Stationary BTR, 1000M-1200M 6 rounds TP-T GO NO GO 9-1

Employ battlesight gunnery against

multiple targets, moving LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 700M-1000M

Stationary BTR, 800M-1000M

9 rounds TPDS-T

9 rounds TP-T

NA NA PCW

one

condition

Ammunition requirements: 71* rounds TPDS-T; 55* rounds TP-T; 250 rounds 7.62mm

or 127 rounds of any 25mm; 250 rounds 7.62mm.

* Denotes rounds included for lost rounds due to changing feeds.

Table 11 Full Caliber Combined—Prequalification.

Table 12. Crew Qualification

Table 12 is a marksmanship based, single vehicle,crew qualification table. Table 12 evaluates thecrew’s ability to engage single and multiple, sta-tionary and moving, vehicle and infantry targetsplaced in a realistic threat array, using the propermethod of engagement.

PrerequisiteEach member of the crew must have passed theLGST within 3 months of firing table 12.

Each crew must have fired table 11 before firingtable 12.

Each crew must have fired table 8, NBC gunnery,within 6 months of firing table 12.

RequirementThe crew must fire all tasks, day and night, to ob-tain an overall qualified rating.

General Instructions to Crewmemberson Task, Conditions, and Standards

Task. Engage single and multiple vehicle and in-fantry targets.

Conditions. From a stationary and moving vehi-cle, given stationary and moving vehicle and in-fantry targets, engage using proper battlesight andprecision engagement techniques.

Standards. Using the appropriate matrix orPCW to score tasks, crews must successfullycomplete 7 of the 10 tasks with 70 points or moreto obtain an overall qualified rating on table 12.Crew duties are evaluated and scored in accor-dance with paragraph 8103. Crew cuts are as-sessed on table 12. Crew ratings are determinedusing the following standards:

Distinguished—7 of 10 tasks with at least70 points and a combined score of at least900 points.

Superior—7 of 10 tasks with at least 70points and a combined score between 800and 899 points.Qualified—7 of 10 tasks with at least 70points and a combined score between 700and 799 points.Unqualified—4 of 10 tasks with less than70 points, or less than 700 points combined.

ConductTargets should accurately represent threat targets.

All engagements should be fired from an exposedposition. Battlesight engagements should be firedfrom an exposed position. Defensive engagementsshould not start from full defilade.

TasksTable 12 consists of 10 tasks, the first 5 should befired during the day and the remaining 5 at night.

ScoringUse specified matrix or PCW per task.

Refer to appendix M for use of PCWs andmatrices.

Refer to paragraph 8401 for timing procedures.

Allowable VariationsAmmunition availability will dictate which qualifi-cation table to use. Use the TP-T/TPDS-T mix ta-ble whenever possible.

If moving targets are not available, substitute afull scale frontal target within the same rangeband, and require the firing vehicle to move dur-ing the engagement.

No tasks may be shifted from night to day, or dayto night with only one exception. In areas wherenight firing time is limited due to range con-straints, i.e., the range closes at 2,200, up to 2night tasks may be moved to the day portion aslong as they are conducted using the thermalsight.

LAV-25- Gunnery and Employment G-11

Refires for QualificationCrews refire only those tasks that they failed toscore at least 70 points.

Commanders may authorize the refiring of onlythe tasks necessary for a qualified rating.

700 points is the maximum a refiring crew canachieve, regardless of score after initial attempt atqualification.

AlibisAll alibi engagements will be refired. Unit com-manders may authorize an alibi for the followingconditions:

Target or range malfunction.Unsafe conditions not related to the firingcrew.Weapon malfunction not attributed to crewerror. This determination is based on thecrew’s ability to complete prefire checks inaccordance with TM 08594A 10/1B, and ob-servations by the firing vehicles LCE.

AmmunitionMaster gunners must add rounds to accommodatecrew’s changing ammunition when using dual am-munitions, depending on the order of the taskswithin the table.

G-12 MCWP 3-14.1

LAV-25- Gunnery and Employment G-13

TASK/ENGAGEMENTCONDITIONS

TARGET CONDITIONS AMMUNITION ACQUISITIONGO NO GO

MATRIX

Employ precision gunnery against

single target, stationary LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 1500M-1700M 6 rounds TPDS-T GO NO GO 9-1

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, moving LAV-25.

Moving BRDM, 1200M-1400M

RPG team, 500M-700M

9 rounds TP-T

50 rounds TPDS-T

NA NA 9-2l

Employ battlesight gunnery against

multiple targets, stationary LAV-25.

Stationary BTR, 700M-1000M

Stationary BMP, 700M-100M

9 rounds TP-T

9 rounds TPDS-T

GO NO GO PCW

normal

Employ battlesight gunnery against

simultaneous targets, moving

LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 1000M-1300M

RPG team, 300M-500M

9 rounds TPDS-T

50 rounds 7.62

NA NA PCW

one

condition

Employ battlesight gunnery against

multiple targets, moving LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 1000M-1300M

Stationary BTR, 700M-1000M

9 rounds TPDS-T

9 rounds TP-T

GO NO GO PCWonecondition

Employ precision gunnery against

a single target, stationary LAV-25.

Stationary jeep, 1300M-1500M 6 rounds TP-T NA NA 9-1

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, stationary LAV-25.

Moving BMP, 1500M-1700M

Dismounted troops, 700M-900M

9 rounds TPDS-T

100 rounds 7.62

GO NO GO 9-2

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, moving LAV-25.

Moving BMPs, 1500M-1700M

Stationary BMP, 1400-1600

18 rounds TPDS-T NA NA 9-2

Employ battlesight gunnery against

simultaneous targets, moving

LAV-25.

Stationary BRDM, 500M-700M

RPG team, 300M-500M

9 rounds TP-T

50 rounds 7.62

GO NO GO PCW

one

condition

Employ battlesight gunnery against

multiple targets, stationary LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 1000M-1300M

Stationary BTR, 700M-1000M

9 rounds TPDS-T

9 rounds TP-T

NA NA PCW

normal

Ammunition requirements: 71* rounds TPDS-T; 55* rounds TP-T; 250 rounds 7.62mm

or 127 rounds of any 25mm; 250 rounds 7.62mm.

* Denotes rounds included for lost rounds due to changing feeds.

Table 12 TP-T/TPDS Mix.

G-14 MCWP 3-14.1

Table 12 TP-T Only.

TASK/ENGAGEMENTCONDITIONS

TARGET CONDITIONS AMMUNITION ACQUISITIONGO NO GO

MATRIX

Employ precision gunnery against

single target, stationary LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 1500M-1700M 6 rounds TPDS-T GO NO GO 9-1

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, moving LAV-25.

Moving BRDM, 1200M-1400M

RPG team, 500M-700M

9 rounds TP-T

50 rounds TPDS-T

NA NA 9-2l

Employ battlesight gunnery against

multiple targets, stationary LAV-25.

Stationary BTR, 700M-1000M

Stationary BMP, 700M-100M

18 rounds TP-T GO NO GO PCW

normal

Employ battlesight gunnery against

simultaneous targets, moving

LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 700M-1000M

RPG team, 300M-500M

9 rounds TPDS-T

50 rounds 7.62

NA NA PCW

one

condition

Employ battlesight gunnery against

multiple targets, moving LAV-25.

2 stationary BRDMs 700M-1000M 18 rounds TP-T GO NO GO PCWonecondition

Employ precision gunnery against

a single target, stationary LAV-25.

Stationary jeep, 1300M-1500M 6 rounds TP-T NA NA 9-1

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, stationary LAV-25.

Moving BMP, 1300M-1500M

Dismounted troops, 700M-900M

9 rounds TP-T

100 rounds 7.62

GO NO GO 9-2

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, moving LAV-25.

Moving jeep, 1000M-1200M

Stationary BTR, 1300-1500

18 rounds TP-T NA NA 9-2

Employ battlesight gunnery against

simultaneous targets, moving

LAV-25.

Stationary BRDM, 500M-700M

RPG team, 300M-500M

9 rounds TP-T

50 rounds 7.62

GO NO GO PCW

one

condition

Employ battlesight gunnery against

multiple targets, stationary LAV-25.

Stationary BTR, 600M-900M

Stationary BTR, 700M-1000M

18 rounds TP-T NA NA PCW

normal

Ammunition requirements: 120 rounds TP-T; 250 rounds 7.62mm.

LAV-25- Gunnery and Employment G-15

TABLE 12 TPDS-T Only.

TASK/ENGAGEMENTCONDITIONS

TARGET CONDITIONS AMMUNITION ACQUISITIONGO NO GO

MATRIX

Employ precision gunnery against

single target, stationary LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 1500M-1700M 6 rounds TPDS-T GO NO GO 9-1

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, moving LAV-25.

Moving BMP, 1500M-1700M

RPG team, 500M-700M

9 rounds TP-T

50 rounds TPDS-T

NA NA 9-2l

Employ battlesight gunnery against

multiple targets, stationary LAV-25.2 stationary BMPs,1100M-1400M

18 rounds TP-T GO NO GO PCW

normal

Employ battlesight gunnery against

simultaneous targets, moving

LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 700M-1000M

RPG team, 300M-500M

9 rounds TPDS-T

50 rounds 7.62

NA NA PCW

one

condition

Employ battlesight gunnery against

multiple targets, moving LAV-25.

2 stationary BMPs 1100M-1400M 18 rounds TP-T GO NO GO PCWonecondition

Employ precision gunnery against

a single target, stationary LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 1400M-1600M 6 rounds TP-T NA NA 9-1

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, stationary LAV-25.

Moving BMP, 1400M-1700M

Dismounted troops, 700M-900M

9 rounds TP-T

100 rounds 7.62

GO NO GO 9-2

Employ precision gunnery against

multiple targets, moving LAV-25.

Moving BMP, 1500M-1700M

Stationary BMP, 1500-1700

18 rounds TP-T NA NA 9-2

Employ battlesight gunnery against

simultaneous targets, moving

LAV-25.

Stationary BMP, 1000M-1300M

RPG team, 300M-500M

9 rounds TP-T

50 rounds 7.62

GO NO GO PCW

one

condition

Employ battlesight gunnery against

multiple targets, stationary LAV-25.

2 stationary BMPs,

1000M-1300M

18 rounds TP-T NA NA PCW

normal

Ammunition requirements: 120 rounds TPDS-T; 250 rounds 7.62mm.

(reverse blank)

The scout section gunnery tables (13 and 14) areused to train and evaluate LAV-25 equippedscout sections. These gunnery tables test thescout section’s ability to conduct reconnaissanceand security missions, and evaluate the sectionleader’s ability to control scout section fires whileengaging stationary and moving targets presentedin realistic tactical arrays. The evaluation shouldfocus on the scout section’s primary mission ofinformation collection and reporting procedures.The scout section’s ability to use combat re-sources, direct and indirect fire, while remainingundetected, should also be evaluated.

Using the information in this appendix as a guide,the commander designs his own gunnery tables,based on the resources available and the unit’straining requirements; the individual and collectivetasks required. Providing flexibility to the com-manders ensures that each unit receives the train-ing required to effectively train the scout sections.The tables are divided into tactical and gunneryportions that may or may not be conductedtogether.

Individual and CollectiveRequirements

When designing the tactical portion of the tables,the commander selects a number of combat criti-cal tasks, i.e., tactical tasks, from the individualtraining standards (ITS) list and the collective tasklist from the Marine Corps Combat ReadinessEvaluation System (MCCRES). These tasks arearranged in a mission type format where the sec-tion is assigned the tasks as part of a scout pla-toon. Performance of these tactical tasksconstitute fifty percent of the scout section’soverall score.

A standard list of fire control tasks is required toensure that the scout section leader is satisfyingthe ITSs for gunnery, and that the dismountedelement leader satisfies the same standards forcontrolling dismounted element fires.

At a minimum, the scout section must perform allITS fire control tasks, mounted and dismounted.Use separate checklists for each firing task pro-grammed into the scenario. Each task is evalu-ated. The gunnery tasks constitute thirty percentof the scout section’s total overall score. The re-maining twenty percent of the section’s score isgunnery hit rate which is evaluated with the targetdestruction matrix, table H-2.

Mounted Tasks At a minimum, the following tasks will be evalu-ated in the mounted portion of the tables:

0313.3.7—Load the M257 Smoke GrenadeLauncher.0313.3.8—Unload the M257 Smoke Gre-nade Launcher.0313.3.24—Fire the M257 Smoke GrenadeLauncher.0313.3.26—Establish Firing Positions for theLAV-25.0369.5.8—Control LAV Weapons Fires.0369.5.9—Establish Battle Positions.0300.1.4—Adjust Indirect Fire.

The checklists for these tasks can be found in ap-pendix L. Others are found in applicable ITSorders.

Appendix H

Advanced Gunnery Tables

Dismounted Tasks The dismounted tasks will be selected by the unitbased on the unit’s training program and ITS re-quirements. The unit is required to make thechecklists for the evaluation of these tasks.

Evaluation Procedures andStandards

The following standards and evaluation proce-dures apply to tables 13 and 14. The evaluationprocedures allow sections to train and practiceskills normally performed in combat. Evaluatorsuse after action reviews to critique sections oncompletion of the tables. Crew duties are notevaluated on tables 13 and 14.

StandardsThe section must achieve, at a minimum, a GO on70 percent of the tactical tasks on tables 13 and14, an equivalent of 350 points.

The section must achieve, at a minimum, a GO on70 percent of the gunnery tasks on tables 13 and14, an equivalent of 210 points.

The section must achieve, at a minimum, 140points on target hit rate on tables 13 and 14.

Course time is dictated by terrain, weather, anddistance between engagements. Tactical tasksshould be conducted at training areas, and onlycombined with the gunnery portion if live firerange areas are extensive enough to allow tacticalmaneuvering. Commanders may integrate the tac-tical and gunnery tasks to maximize training,however, avoid combining them if the tacticaltasks would be degraded. Regardless, the unitmust ensure that the gunnery tasks are performedin a tactical vice administrative manner. Reportingprocedures and tactical movement proceduresshould be practiced.

Evaluators utilize the appropriate checklists in ap-pendix L to evaluate gunnery procedures and theunit-generated checklists to evaluate tactical pro-cedures. A separate checklist is required for eachtask the section performs.

Maximum engagement times are listed in tableH-1. These times correspond to the actual per-formance time for the direct fire portion of thegunnery tasks. Master gunners will have to pro-gram target exposure and situation developmenttimes based on the number of targets, range to thetargets and skill desired, use of performancechecklists, and table H-1.

H-2 MCWP 3-14.1

20 25 30 35 30 35 45 50 45 50 60 65

25 30 40 45 40 45 55 60 55 60 65 70

25 30 40 45 40 45 50 55 50 55 60 65

TIM

E

KILL 2 3 4 5 6 7+NBC NBC NBC NBC NBC NBC

NBC NBC NBC NBC NBC NBC

NBC NBC NBC NBC NBC NBC

0-1000 Meter engagement matrix

1000-1600 Meter engagement matrix

Combined engagement matrix

Table H-1. Maximum Engagement Times.

Procedures Scout sections must perform the firing taskswithin the allotted engagement times in accor-dance with table H-1.

Engagement time starts when the first section ve-hicle is exposed to the threat, however, target ex-posure times should allow the section to report,determine the best course of action, and developthe situation. Master gunners should program sce-narios, depending on gunnery task, to account forthese actions.

Engagement stop times are determined by the fol-lowing conditions:

The section leader announces “CEASEFIRE”.All targets are destroyed.All section vehicles return to defilade for thefinal time.

Table 12 addresses alibi criteria. No other alibicriteria is used.

Scoring Procedures Each table uses a 1000 point system for the threeareas of tactics and gunnery. The breakdown ofscoring is explained as follows.

Tactics are worth 50 percent or a total of 500points. Evaluators use the unit-generated per-formance checklists for evaluation. Tasks may beof equal weight, or commanders may assign dif-ferent values to each task based on unitrequirements.

Gunnery tasks are worth 30 percent or a total of300 points. Evaluators use the performancechecklists provided in appendix L for mountedtasks, and unit-generated checklists for dis-mounted tasks. The number of checklists will varydepending on how many firing tasks areprogrammed.

Use the formula in figure H-1 for determining to-tal tactical and gunnery points, or, at the com-mander’s option, point values can be assigned for

each individual task based on mission essentialtask list importance.

Gunnery hit rate is worth 20 percent or a total of200 points. To determine the number of gunnerypoints awarded, use the target destruction matrix,table H-2.

RatingsSections are rated by the following standards.

Distinguished. Combined score of 900points of higher, which includes at least 350tactical, 210 gunnery task and 140 gunneryhit points at a minimum.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment H-3

Example: The section was assigned 11 gun-nery tasks, mounted and dismounted. The sec-tion passed nine tasks. The section waspresented 25 targets overall, mounted and dis-mounted, they destroyed 22. The section wasassigned 12 tactics tasks, they passed 10.

1. Divide the total number of tasks passed bythe total number of tasks.

9/11 = 0.82

2. Multiply the result by 300 (total possiblegunnery points) to get the section’s gunneryscore.

0.82 x 300 = 246 points

3. Use table H-4 to get the gunnery hit ratescore.

22 of 25 targets = 176 points

4. Follow steps 1 and 2 in the same manner toarrive at the tactics task score.

10/12 = 0.83 0.83 x 500 = 415 points

5. Add the gunnery score, the gunnery hit ratescore, and the tactics task score to get the sec-tions overall score.

246 + 176 + 415 = 837 points

Figure H-1. Evaluation Scoring Formula.

Superior. Combined score between800-899 points, which includes 350 210 gunnery task and 140 gunnery hit pointsat a minimum.Qualified. Combined score between700-799 points, which includes 350 tactical,210 gunnery task and 140 gunnery hit pointsat a minimum.Unqualified. Combined score less than 700points, or less than 350 tactical, 210 gunnerytask or 140 gunnery hit points.

Targets

reconnaissance and security missions. Master gun-ners should program target scenarios in accor-dance with the required firing task and FM 17-98to ensure realistic arrays are presented to the sec-tion. There is no minimum or maximum numberof targets allowed, however, there must be suffi-cient targets to allow the crews sufficient ammu-nition to upload the weapons systems, and toperform all the required mounted gunnery tasks.There must be enough targets to allow the dis-mounted element to complete their assigned tasks.

Target signature devices should be used when ap-propriate to the gunnery task.

H-4 MCWP 3-14.1

Target arrays should be consistent with the typeof threat forces that a section normally encoun-ters. FM 17-98 describes these forces in detail for

tactical,

Table 13. Scout Section Training Course

The scout section training course is used to trainand evaluate scout section tactical and gunneryskills in preparation for table 14. Table 13 gun-nery portion may be conducted using subcaliberor full caliber ammunition at the commander’sdiscretion. The gunnery portion must evaluate thegunnery tasks outlined in appendix L. The tacticalportion must be designed to evaluate the com-mander selected tasks. It is not required to com-bine the tactical and gunnery tasks whendesigning the scenario. Perform the gunnery taskswith the tactical tasks if it’s possible to do sowithout degrading the tactical task.

Prerequisite to Firing Table 13 Each crew in the section must have successfullyqualified on table 12 within 6 months of firing ta-ble 13. Due to personnel turnover considerations,it is acceptable that three of the four vehicle com-manders and gunners meet this requirement.

Each individual in the scout section must havepassed the LAV-25 gunnery skills test (LGST)within 6 months of firing table 13.

General Instructions to Crewmemberson Task, Conditions, and Standards

Task. Conduct a reconnaissance and/or securitymission, and acquire, report, and employ accuratedirect and indirect fire to engage targets in a tacti-cal array.

Conditions. As part of a platoon, the sectionuses reconnaissance, and engagement techniquesagainst threat targets.

Standards. Engagement time standards arelisted table H-3 and hit rate is evaluated with tableH-4. Evaluation of tactical and gunnery tasks isaccomplished with checklists.

Conduct of the Range Depending on the availability of resources, ma-neuver areas and range time, the commander may

decide to fire the gunnery portion of table 13 us-ing subcaliber munitions. The tactical phase of ta-ble 13 should precede the gunnery phase of table13, and should be conducted in a realistic environ-ment for the scenario. Table 13 must have a day(13A) and night (13B) phase of fire. The com-manders decide which tactical and gunnery tasksto evaluate during the hours of darkness; how-ever, when planning the night gunnery phase, thesection must be presented enough targets to allowsufficient ammunition to upload the weaponssystems.

The section always acts as part of a platoon,whether other sections are present. A platooncommander/evaluator should be appointed to re-ceive reports, and provide the guidance that willdrive the scenario. The platoon com-mander/evaluator ensures that the section followsthe designed scenario by guiding the sectionthrough the tactical and the gunnery phases as thesection reports.

Tactical Phase. The commander/evaluatormust present the section a mission type order thatwill require the section to accomplish thecommander-selected tactical tasks and employ thedismounted element effectively. Evaluators shouldbe located with both the mounted and dismountedelements and should have the performance check-lists on hand for evaluation.

Gunnery Phase. The commander/evaluatormust present the section a mission type order thatwill require the section to maintain a tactical pos-ture throughout this phase. The scenario for firemust be designed to allow the section to accom-plish the required gunnery tasks, mounted and dis-mounted. The master gunner must plan targetpresentation to correspond with the scenario sothat the section leader is aware of which gunnerytask he is to perform.

An after action review for the entire section is re-quired after each phase of the table. All evaluatorsshould be present so that all aspects of the sec-tions performance are debriefed.

Although the scout section will be performing tac-tical tasks during the conduct of the gunnery

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment H-5

phase, only the specific gunnery tasks are evalu-ated. Tactical tasks are evaluated during the tacti-cal phase of the table, however, the tactical taskswill be reviewed and critiqued during the gunneryphase of the table.

The key to successful conduct of table 13 is theplatoon commander/evaluator who must have theability to lead the scout section through the sce-nario without confusion so the evaluators with thesection can grade the section.

H-6 MCWP 3-14.1

Table 14. Scout Section Qualification

The scout section qualification is used to evaluatethe scout section’s tactical and gunnery profi-ciency in a realistic tactical and live fire scenario. Prerequisite to Firing Table 14Each scout section must have achieved a passingscore on table 13 within 3 months of firing table14.

Each crewmember must have successfully com-pleted the LGST within 3 months of firing table14.

General Instructions to Crewmemberson Task, Conditions, and Standards

Task. Conduct a reconnaissance and/or securitymission, and acquire, report, and employ accuratedirect and indirect fire to engage targets in a tacti-cal array.

Conditions. As part of a platoon, the scout sec-tion uses reconnaissance, and engagement tech-niques against threat targets.

Standards. Engagement time standards arelisted table H-3 and hit rate is evaluated with tableH-4. Evaluation of tactical and gunnery tasks isaccomplished with checklists.

Conduct of the Range Table 14 is similar to table 13. The gunnery por-tion of table 14 is fired using full caliber muni-tions. The tactical phase of table 14 shouldprecede the gunnery phase of table 14, and shouldbe conducted in a realistic environment for thescenario. Table 14 must have a day (14A) andnight (14B) phase of fire. The commander optswhich tactical and gunnery tasks to evaluate dur-ing the hours of darkness, however, when plan-ning the night gunnery phase, the section must bepresented enough targets to allow sufficient am-munition to upload the weapons systems.

The section always acts as part of a platoon,whether other sections are present or not. A pla-toon commander/evaluator should be appointedto receive reports, and provide the guidance thatwill drive the scenario. The platoon com-mander/evaluator will ensure that the section fol-lows the designed scenario by guiding the sectionthrough the tactical and gunnery phases as thesection reports.

The tactical and gunnery phases of table 14 areconducted and evaluated in the same manner astable 13. The only differences between tables 13and 14 should be the actual scenario used, and ta-ble 14 is always fired with full caliber am-munition.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment H-7

H-8 MCWP 3-14.1

10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30

5 100 91 83 77 71 67 62 59 55 52 50 48 45 43 42 40 38 37 36 34 33

T 6 120 109 100 92 86 80 75 71 66 63 60 57 54 52 50 48 46 44 42 41 40

A 7 140 127 117 107 100 94 87 82 78 74 70 66 63 61 58 56 54 52 50 48 46

R 8 160 145 134 123 114 107 100 94 89 84 80 76 73 70 66 64 62 59 57 55 53

G 9 180 163 l51 138 129 120 113 106 100 95 90 86 82 78 75 72 69 66 64 62 60

E 10 200 181 168 153 143 133 125 117 111 105 100 95 94 87 83 80 77 74 71 69 66

T 11 200 184 169 157 142 138 129 122 116 110 105 100 96 92 88 85 81 79 76 73

S 12 200 184 171 160 150 144 133 126 120 114109 104 100 96 92 89 86 83 80

13 200 186 173 163 153 144 137 130 124 118 113 108 104 100 96 93 90 88

D 14 200 187 185 165 156 147 140 133 127 122 117 112 108 104 100 97 93

E 15 200 188 176 167 158 150 143 136 130 125 120 115 111 107 103 100

S 16 200 188 183 168 160 152 145 139 133 128 123 119 114 110 107

T 17 200 189 179 170 167 150 148 142 136 131 126 121 117 113

R 18 200 189 180 171 164 157 150 144 138 133 129 124 120

O 19 200 190 181 173 165 158 152 146 144 139 131 127

Y 20 200 190 182 174 167 160 154 148 143 138 133

E 21 200 191 183 175 168 162 156 150 145 140

D 22 200 191 183 176 169 163 157 152 147

23 200 192 184 177 170 164 159 153

24 200 192 185 178 171 167 160

25 200 192 185 179 172 167

26 200 193 186 179 173

27 200 193 186 180

28 200 193 187

29 200 193

30 200

Targets Presented

Table H-2. Target Destruction Matrix.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment H-9

TIME COLUMN A COLUMN B COLUMN C

151617181920212223242526272829303132333435363738394041424344454647

100 94

888276706458524640342822161040

NBC

10094888276706458524640342822161040

100 94

888276706458524640342822161040

NBC

10094888276706458524640342822161040

100 94

888276706458524640342822161040

NBC

10094888276706458524640342822161040

Scoring Matrix H-3

H-10 MCWP 3-14.1

Scoring Matrix H-4

TIME SECONDS

KILL 1TARGET

KILL 2TARGETS

KILL 1NBC

TARGETS

KILL 2NBC

TARGETS2526

27

28

29

30

31

32

33

34

35

36

37

38

39

40

41

42

43

44

45

46

47

5047

44

41

38

35

32

29

26

23

20

17

14

11

8

5

2

0

10094

88

82

76

70

64

58

52

46

40

34

28

22

16

10

4

0

50

47

44

41

38

35

32

29

26

23

20

17

14

11

8

5

2

0

100

94

88

82

76

70

64

58

52

46

40

34

28

22

16

10

4

0

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment H-11

H-12 MCWP 3-14.1

Ammunition is a valuable training resource thatrequires detailed planning and coordination toensure the sound management of a finite asset.Ammunition planning involves forecasting re-quirements and allocating sufficient ammunitionto meet those requirements.

Unit ammunition allocations may change for manyreasons. The type and amount of ammunitionavailable is especially critical to maintainingLAV-25 gunnery proficiency levels. Units must beflexible enough to plan around fluctuating unitammunition allocations to accomplish trainingobjectives.

Forecasting

The first step in ammunition forecasting is deter-mining what ammunition is available for training.Normally, the unit S-3 officer controls ammuni-tion allocation available for training. The S-4 isresponsible for managing the ammunition ac-counts. The number of rounds available for eachtype of ammunition can be obtained from the S-4ammunition chief.

In the second step, the available ammunition iscompared to the amount required for the trainingplan and reconciled. The frequency of gunnerytraining varies from unit to unit based on trainingcycles and available training facilities. Regardless,ammunition is allotted periodically to meet theneeds of the training plan.

After forecasting requirements, ammunition isthen allocated toward specific training evolu-tions.

Allocating

Ammunition should be allocated first toward crewqualification. Consideration must be made for ex-tra ammunition for personnel who fail to meetminimum requirements on their gunnery tables.Advanced tables may be modified later to provideammunition for the critical training events. Allo-cate available TPDS-T to the crew qualificationtable first. Although the crew qualification tablecan be fired with any ammunition, if mixed-typeammunition is available, it should be used.

After ammunition for firing the crew qualificationtable has been set aside, allocation can be madefor the remaining full caliber tables. Use table I-1as a guideline.

Planning Considerations

Critical Training EventsExample: If NBC gunnery is designated a criticaltraining event in a particular table, then ammuni-tion should be allocated to firing that table first.

Unit Strengths and Weaknesses

Appendix I

Ammunition Forecasting and Allocating

If previous gunnery training has revealed that theunit is strong on battlesight gunnery but weak onprecision gunnery, then ammunition should prob-ably be dedicated to firing the precision tablesfirst.

Advanced GunneryAdvanced gunnery training can be accomplishedin a number of ways. The small amounts of 25mmammunition required allow this table to be consid-ered last. Units can also roll back unexpended am-munition for use in advanced gunnery.

Other Training EventsAfter allocating ammunition for advanced gun-nery, the unit can allocate ammunition for addi-tional training events, such as live fire exercisesand cross-training.

Allocation of Other AmmunitionUsually, distributing smaller caliber ammunition iseasier than distributing 25mm ammunition. Usetable I-1 to determine ammunition allocation for

the remaining training events. Ammunition alloca-tion is based on the criticality of training.

Use Available Ammunition WiselyIf ammunition is available for use, use it. Prioritizeyour order of distribution. Expending all availableammunition during training will ensure completeand effective use of this scarce asset. However,do not allow training units to frivolously expendremaining ammunition at the conclusion of afiring. If ammunition is efficiently used and recy-cled, the unit can more effectively plan forcontingencies.

Plan for ContingenciesThe unit’s ammunition supply may fluctuate dueto situations beyond their control. Training muststill be accomplished. Planning for contingenciesincludes the ability to adjust ammunition alloca-tions based on criticality of the task and to effec-tively use rolled-back ammunition. Units that dothis can accomplish all training goals. The unitmust keep its ammunition plan flexible and fluid.

I-2 MCWP 3-14.1

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment I-3

TABLE AMMUNITION

NUMBEROF

ROUNDSCHANGEOVER* ZERO TOTAL**

1 Laser N/A N/A N/A N/A

2 Laser N/A N/A N/A N/A

3 5.56 tracer or

22 tracer120 N/A 20 140

4 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

5 N/A N/A N/A N/A N/A

6 Laser N/A N/A N/A N/A

7 5.56 traceror

22 tracer64 N/A 20 84

8 25mm (any)7.62mm

72250

N/AN/A

10100

82350

9 25mm (any)-or mix of-

25mm (TP-T)25mm (TPDS-T)

7.62mm

135

637250

N/A

44

N/A

10

01050

145

6786

100

10 25mm (any)-or mix of-

25mm (TP-T)25mm (TPDS-T)

7.62mm

126

7254

300

N/A

45

N/A

10

01050

136

7669

350

11 25mm (any)-or mix of-

25mm (TP-T)25mm (TPDS-T)

7.62mm

127

5166

250

N/A

45

N/A

10

01050

137

5581

300

12 25mm (any)-or mix of-

25mm (TP-T)25mm (TPDS-T)

7.62mm

120

5169

250

N/A

34

N/A

10

01050

130

5483

300

13 7.62mm 400 N/A 50 450

14 25mm (any)7.62mm

100250

N/AN/A

1050

110300

*Number of rounds added to table ammunition to reflect lost rounds fromammunition change. Also, change over values will fluctuate based on orderof tasks in table.

**All totals are based on one iteration for one firing vehicle. All totals includefiring day and night portion of table.

Table I-1. Ammunition Requirements.

(reverse blank)

Immediate and remedial actions provide crewmembers with routine ways to return a misfired orjammed weapon to a firing status as soon as pos-sible. Immediate action procedures are based onexisting procedures used to return a jammed ormisfired weapon to a firing status. Remedial ac-tion procedures are based on data collected fromthe weapon manufacturer and provide generalguidance on returning a malfunctioning weapon toa firing status. Immediate action procedures aredesigned to be implemented as the routine forcrew members, whereas remedial action proce-dures augment immediate procedures in malfunc-tion clearing.

Immediate Action

Immediate action is the routine action taken bythe gunner to quickly bring a stopped weaponback to a firing status. Though a standard proce-dure exists, the crew may be instinctively aware ofwhy there is a stoppage. For example, if a lowammunition condition already exists, the crewwould know that the gun would be interruptedwhen ammunition selection changed, and hence,know to reset the low ammunition override whenstoppage occurred. In other cases, the gunnermay hear the bolt going into MISFIRE, automati-cally reset the misfire, and cycle the bolt to SEAR.If the crew can determine the cause of the stop-page instinctively, they should correct the prob-lem and continue the mission. When a crew isinvolved in an engagement and doesn’t know thecause of the stoppage, they have a routine actionthey can execute to minimize confusion. FigureJ-1 shows immediate action in flowchart form.

After a weapon stops firing, announce MISFIREand look at the bolt position indicator (BPI) andthe control display assembly (CDA).

If BPI or CDA indicates a jam, the gunner shouldannounce JAM and proceed to remedial action.

Note: In a powered-up and normally functioningweapon, the CDA indicates a jam in the followingmanner: SEAR light is off, and the MISFIRE in-dicator is not flashing.

If BPI or CDA do not indicate JAM, check the—

Low ammunition indicator—if lit, activatelow ammunition override switch, and at-tempt to fire.Misfire indicator—if flashing, depress MIS-FIRE reset button, select SINGLE S HOTrate of fire, cycle back to SEAR, and attemptto fire.Weapon’s power indicator—if flashing, telldriver to check hatch, or if oriented over therear of the vehicle, tell scout leader to secureoverhead troop hatches. When the lightglows solid green again, attempt to fire.Weapon arm switch—if set in SAFE posi-tion, move it to ARM position, and attemptto fire.

Remedial Action

Remedial action is the action taken by the crew—beyond immediate actions—to clear a stoppage inthe weapons system. Clearing procedures varywith the stoppage, but the rule of thumb is to dowhatever it takes to bring the weapon back to afiring status without injuring personnel or equip-ment. Remedial action procedures help establish asystematic approach to clearing the M242.

Appendix J

Immediate and Remedial Actions

Remedial action procedures cover four differenttypes of stoppages, but weapons can stop func-tioning an unlimited number of ways. These fourprocedures group stoppages based on commonlyencountered problems.

Remedial action procedures include the fol-lowing:

Ensure that all safeties are exercised and thesystem is powered down.

Identify the problem area. Check to see ifthe—

Bolt position indicator is in FEED.Bolt position indicator is in RAM orEXTRACT.Bolt position indicator is in MISFIRE.Round(s) are cross-indexed.

Clear the stoppage using the procedures forthat problem.

Bolt Position Indicator is in FEED

J-2 MCWP 3-14.1

Weapon (M242) does not fire/stops firing

Gunner announces "Misfire"

Check BPI to ensure in misfire position

First round misfire

Ensure manual safety on fire

Wait 5 min press misfire reset

Rate of fire to single shot

Cycle weapon to sear

Rate of fire to 200 continue mission

M242 HotGo to remedial action

Go to remedial action

Keep gun pointed down range

Notify crew of cookoff danger

Power down turret

Lock turret

Turn master switch off

Evacuate for 30 min.

Go to remedial action

Weapon in sear

Go to remedial action

Pre-fire checks complete

Complete pre-fire checks

Attempt to fireCheck CDA

Weapons light flashing

Ensure hatches secure

Low ammo condition

Press low ammo override

Weapon sear light off

Turn weapons arm/ safe switch to arm

Attempt to fire

YES NONO

YES

NONO

YES

NO

YES

NO

YES

NO

Figure J-1. Immediate Action.

When the bolt position indicator indicates that theweapon has stopped in the partially fed position, afeed jam exists. The characteristics of a feed jamare: Weapon is between SEAR and RAM; feedercannot be removed; ammunition selected cannotbe downloaded; bolt is fully to the rear; one cas-ing is in front of the bolt; and one live round is inthe rotor.

The objective in clearing this type of jam is to po-sition the weapon to enable work on the feeder.Ideally, get the weapon back to SEAR. If it can’tbe moved to SEAR, move it to RAM. Then, re-move, clear, and inspect the feeder for damage.

To return to a firing status—

1. Attempt to manually cycle the weapon toSEAR. When mechanical problems exist, there isno physical jam, and the weapon can be cycledmanually to SEAR, download normally, and in-spect in accordance with TM 08672A-20&P/1,Gun, Automatic: 25-MM, M242.

2. Download the deselected ammunition be-cause the feed select solenoid is already in the ap-propriate position for downloading this am-munition.

3. Download the selected ammunition. Pullboth feed stop knobs out and change feeds on thefeed select solenoid.

4. Disconnect the vertical drive shaft from thefeeder. This removes the receiver from the equa-tion. The bolt is fully to the rear, so no clearingaction is necessary for the receiver. With thefeeder isolated, cycle the feeder and receiver toSEAR.

5. Remove the feeder, perform manual cyclecheck, and check feeder for damage.

Download ammunition only if necessary. Onlyperform steps necessary to clear the weapon.

Bolt Position Indicator is in RAM orEXTRACT

When the bolt position indicator is in RAM or EX-TRACT, the feeder has already fed the ammuni-tion to the bolt, and the rotor is centered over thebolt, having completed its movement for the cy-cle. The characteristics of this type of jam are:Rotor is centered over the bolt; the bolt is midwayof its cycle (forward or back); and the feeder canbe removed. The objective is to remove thefeeder, clear the jam, and perform an inspection inaccordance with TM 08672A-20&P/1. Attempt-ing to manually cycle the weapon will usually in-crease the severity of the jam. If enough friction isexerted by the jam to engage the receiver clutchassembly, then manual cycling usually will not beeffective.

To return to a firing status—

1. Download the deselected ammunition be-cause the feed select solenoid is already in the ap-propriate position for downloading this ammu-nition.

2. Download the selected ammunition. Pullboth feed stop knobs out and change feeds on thefeed select solenoid.

3 Disconnect the vertical drive shaft from thefeeder. This removes the receiver from the proc-ess. The bolt is fully to the rear, so no clearing ac-tion is necessary for the receiver. With the feederisolated, cycle the feeder and receiver to SEAR.

4. Remove the feeder, perform manual cyclecheck, and check feeder for damage.

Bolt Position Indicator is in MISFIRE

When the bolt position indicator is in MISFIRE,the weapon usually stops due to a mechanical/electrical problem vice a jam. If power is inter-rupted or the microswitch sensor harness assem-bly in the bolt position indicator is unserviceable,the weapon can stop in MISFIRE. If the power is

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment J-3

interrupted, the logic of the weapon does not rec-ognize that the weapon is in MISFIRE, and willnot return the weapon to SEAR under power. Ifthe harness assembly is bad and the MISFIRElight is flashing, the weapon should be cycled toSEAR using normal procedures. If a round wasfired and the weapon cannot be cycled underpower, there may not be enough force from themanual hand crank to remove the bolt from thebreech. The characteristics of this type of mal-function are: The MISFIRE reset button is notflashing; no physical jam exists; bolt and track areforward, locked in the breech; and the feeder canbe removed.

To return to a firing status—

1. Attempt to cycle manually forward to SEAR.

2. Download the deselected ammunition be-cause the feed select solenoid is already in the ap-propriate position for downloading this ammu-nition.

3. Download selected ammunition. Pull bothfeed stop knobs out and change feeds on the feedselect solenoid.

4. Disconnect the vertical drive shaft from thefeeder. This removes the receiver from the proc-ess. The bolt is already fully to the rear, so noclearing action is necessary for the receiver. Withthe feeder isolated, cycle the feeder to SEAR.

5. Remove the feeder.

6. Ensure the pushrod extension is protrudinginto the receiver well.

7. Rotate the bolt clockwise while cycling thereceiver to SEAR, using a crescent wrench on theflat surfaces of the bolt.

Cross-Indexed Round(s)

When a round is cross-indexed, one end of theround has been grabbed by a different tooth of thefeed sprocket than the other end. This happens

because one end of the link catches on the linkstripper, causing one end of the round to skewwhen entering the feeder. When this type of jam isidentified, and there was no attempt to manuallycycle the feeder, the jam is easily cleared.

To return to a firing status—

1. Download the deselected ammunition.

2. Remove link chute and separate expendedlinks.

3. Remove the feed chute and separate linkedammunition as close to the feeder as possible.

4. Remove the feeder if it is not in FEED, be-cause this jam is easier to clear with the feederremoved.

5. Disconnect the vertical drive shaft if thefeeder cannot be removed.

6. Elevate the weapon and clear as many linksas possible with a screwdriver. Most links shouldbe removable.

7. Insert screwdriver ahead of the round in thefeeder, and pry backwards until the base of theround clears the link stripper.

8. Pull the round straight back out of thefeeder, using a pair of channel lock pliers.

9. Clear the remaining rounds from the feeder.

It should be noted that there are other methods aswell to clear cross-indexed rounds.

Common Malfunctions and Corrective Actions

Many common malfunctions may be encounteredwhen operating the weapons system during imme-diate or remedial actions. In either case, take thecorrective action and continue the mission.

Failure to Feed Select

J-4 MCWP 3-14.1

Feed selection can take place only when theweapon is in SEAR and both feed shaft stops arefully seated. A failure to feed select is usuallycaused by a mechanical misalignment of the feedergears. Misalignment is indicated when one or bothof the feed shaft stops are not fully seated.

To correct, seat the raised feed shaft stop usingthe 14mm ratchet on appropriate feed sprocketextension, turning it until the stop seats.

Weapon Continually Stops Past SEARin FEED

If the sear retractor is engaged while the weaponis firing, the weapon will not stop in SEAR, butinstead, stop past SEAR in FEED. This happensbecause the final motion of the chain is stopped bythe sear itself, and with the retractor engaged, the

sear is moved from the path of the chain, and willnot catch the master link.

To correct, disengage the sear retractor (flushwith the weapon) and manually cycle weapon toSEAR.

Weapon Cycles but BPI Does NotCycle

If the vertical drive shaft is not engaged when theweapon is fired, the receiver will cycle, but thefeeder will remain in SEAR. No damage is done tothe weapon but rounds are not fed to the bolt.

To correct, put the feeder and receiver in SEARand insert the vertical drive shaft.

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment J-5

(reverse blank)

All weapons in the Marine Corps inventory em-ploy weapons conditions to show the state of firereadiness and safety. Weapons handling proce-dures provide a consistent and standardized wayfor a Marine to handle, operate, and employ theweapon safely. A weapon’s readiness/safety statusis described by one of four conditions. The stepsin the loading and unloading process take theweapon through four specific conditions of readi-ness for live fire.

M242 25mm Main Gun

Condition 1 - (Battle Carry)

Battle Carry AP. AP ammunition is selected onthe 25mm gun feeder, the ghost round has beencycled in AP, the manual safety is on FIRE, andthe electric safety is engaged.

Battle Carry HE. HE ammunition is selected onthe 25mm gun feeder, the ghost round has beencycled in HE, the manual safety is on FIRE, andthe electric safety is engaged.

Condition 2 Rounds are loaded into the 25mm gun feeder, theghost round is cycled, and the electric and manualsafeties are engaged.

Condition 3Rounds are loaded into the 25mm gun feeder, theghost round has not been cycled, and the electricand manual safeties are engaged.

Condition 4 Rounds are loaded into both ready boxes just pasttheir respective forwarders.

M240C 7.62mm Coax MachineGun

Condition 1 - (Battle Carry) Rounds are loaded onto the feed tray, the coverassembly is closed, the bolt is to the rear, themanual safety is on FIRE, and the electric safetyis engaged.

Condition 2 Does not apply to the M240 series machine gun.

Condition 3Rounds are loaded onto the feed tray, the coverassembly is closed, the bolt is forward, the manualsafety is on FIRE, and the electric safety isengaged.

Condition 4Rounds are loaded into the ready box and feedchute. The weapon is clear; the bolt is forward,and the manual safety is on FIRE.

M240E1 7.62mm Pintle-Mounted

Condition 1 - (Battle Carry) Rounds are loaded onto the feed tray, the coverassembly is closed, the bolt is to the rear, and thesafety is on SAFE.

Appendix K

Weapons Conditions

Condition 2 Does not apply to the M240 series machine gun.

Condition 3Rounds are loaded onto the feed tray, the coverassembly is closed, the bolt is forward, and thesafety is on FIRE.

Condition 4 The ammo box is attached to the flex mount. Theweapon is clear; the bolt is forward, and the safetyis on FIRE.

K-2 MCWP 3-14.1

Element: Scout SectionTask: Load the M257 Smoke Grenade Launcher (0313.3.7).Conditions: Given an LAV-25, 8 L8A1/A3 Smoke Grenades, and technical manuals.Standard: The Marine must properly load all 8 L8A1/A3 Smoke Grenades and exercise proper safetyprecautions.Performance Steps: GO NO GO1. Turn all vehicle and turret power off. _____ _____2. Lock the turret. _____ _____3. Turn grenade launcher switches off. _____ _____4. Insert grenades into M257 grenade launcher. _____ _____

______________

Element: Scout SectionTask: Unload the M257 Smoke Grenade Launcher (0313.3.8).Conditions: Given an LAV-25, 8 L8A1/A3 Smoke Grenades and technical manuals.Standard: The Marine must properly unload all 8 L8A1/A3 Smoke Grenades and exercise proper safetyprecautions.Performance Steps: GO NO GO1. Turn all vehicle and turret power off. _____ _____2. Lock the turret. _____ _____3. Turn grenade launcher switches off. _____ _____4. Remove grenades from M257. _____ _____5. Stow grenades. _____ _____

______________

Element: Scout SectionTask: Fire the M257 Smoke Grenade Launcher (0313.3.24).Conditions: Given an LAV-25 loaded with 8 L8A1/A3 Smoke Grenades, technical manuals, a targetthreat area, and a fire command.Standard: The Marine must fire the M257 Smoke Grenades in accordance with TM 08594A-10/1B.Performance Steps: GO NO GO1. Orient the turret in the direction where the smoke is needed. _____ _____2. Announce GRENADE LAUNCHER. _____ _____3. Secure hatches. _____ _____4. Turn weapon power circuit breaker on. _____ _____5. Turn grenade launcher switch(es) on. _____ _____6. Announce FIRE. _____ _____7. Fire the grenade launcher(s). _____ _____8. Announce GRENADE LAUNCHED. _____ _____9. Perform misfire procedures (as required). _____ _____

Appendix L

Advanced Gunnery Recommended Performance Checklists

Element: Scout SectionTask: Establish Firing Positions for the LAV-25 (0313.3.26).Conditions: Given an LAV-25 and crew in a tactical environment.Standard: The Marine must establish and improve firing positions. Each vehicle in the section mustprepare a range card within 15 minutes from the time the vehicle moves into position. The range cardmust be explicit enough so that another LAV-25 crew could use it to effectively engage targets from thatposition. The section leader must prepare a section sketch.Performance Steps: GO NO GO1. Select primary firing position. _____ _____2. Select alternate firing position. _____ _____3. Select supplementary firing position. _____ _____4. Supervise establishment of positions. _____ _____5. Prepare a range card (and duplicate). _____ _____6. Prepare a section sketch (and duplicate). _____ _____

______________

Element: Scout SectionTask: Control LAV-25 Weapon Fires (0369.5.8).Conditions: As an LAV-25 section leader, given an LAV-25 section and a situation in which a tar-get(s) must be engaged using platoon fire.Standard: The Marine must direct and control the fires of the section using established target referencepoints (TRPs), sectors of fire, engagement areas, or phase lines. He must issue verbal fire commands orestablish temporary TRPs to orient section vehicles on targets, and ensure timely and accurate delivery offires to the targets. Performance Steps: GO NO GO1. Assess the situation. _____ _____2. Determine fire patterns. _____ _____3. Select technique of fire. _____ _____4. Issue clear and concise fire commands. _____ _____5. Terminate engagement. _____ _____

L-2 MCWP 3-14.1

Element: Scout SectionTask: Establish Battle Positions (0369.5.9).Conditions: As an LAV-25 section leader, given an LAV-25 section, an area of operation, and an en-emy situation.Standard: The Marine must establish battle positions, incorporating local security, positioning vehiclesand weapons to meet potential avenues of approach and coordination with adjacent units as required.Performance Steps: GO NO GO1. Determine the avenues of approach to the position. _____ _____2. Ensure local security is positioned. _____ _____3. Direct positioning of vehicles and weapons. _____ _____4. Camouflage positions completely. _____ _____5. Ensure alternate covered positions are prepared for all weapons. _____ _____6. Reconnoiter supplementary battle positions and covered or

concealed routes to the positions. _____ _____7. Coordinate with adjacent units. _____ _____8. Establish wire communications, if situation permits. _____ _____9. Set up chemical alarms. _____ _____10. Consolidate range cards or sector sketches. _____ _____11. Forward a prepared fire plan to the unit commander. _____ _____12. Emplace obstacles. _____ _____13. Prepare a plan for a rapid withdrawal from the positions. _____ _____14. Rehearse withdrawal and movement to alternate battle

positions, if time permits. _____ _____

______________

Element: Scout SectionTask: Adjust Indirect Fire (0300.1.14).Conditions: Given a target or targets, binoculars, radio, call signs, map compass, coordinate scale, anfire direction center (FDC), and an indirect fire weapon prepared to fire in response to the call for fire.Standard: The Marine must transmit the initial call for fire within 1 minute after the target is identified.He must transmit subsequent corrections to the FDC within 20 seconds after impact of adjusting rounds.He must be able to fire for effect within four rounds.Performance Steps: GO NO GO1. Locate target. _____ _____2. Determine magnetic direction to target. _____ _____3. Prepare and transmit call for fire. _____ _____4. Adjust rounds onto target. _____ _____5. Assess target damage and report to FDC. _____ _____6. Terminate mission. _____ _____

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment L-3

(reverse blank)

Appendix M

Point Calculation Worksheets

BMP-2, NORMAL

METERS 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800

TIME(seconds) POINTS

11 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10012 90 93 94 95 96 96 97 100 100 100 10013 80 85 88 90 92 92 93 97 100 100 10014 70 78 82 85 87 87 89 93 97 100 10015 64 70 76 80 83 83 85 89 93 97 9716 58 64 70 75 79 79 81 85 89 93 9317 52 58 64 70 74 74 78 81 85 89 8918 46 52 58 64 70 70 74 78 81 85 8519 40 46 52 58 64 64 70 74 78 81 8120 34 40 46 52 55 58 64 70 74 78 7821 28 34 40 46 52 52 58 64 70 74 7422 22 28 34 40 46 46 52 58 64 70 7023 16 22 28 34 40 40 46 52 58 64 6424 10 16 72 28 34 34 40 46 52 58 5825 4 10 16 22 28 28 34 40 46 52 5226 0 4 10 16 22 22 28 34 40 46 4627 0 4 10 16 16 22 26 34 40 4028 0 4 10 10 16 22 20 34 3429 0 4 4 10 16 22 28 2830 0 0 4 10 16 22 2231 0 4 10 16 1632 0 4 10 1033 0 4 434 0 0

M-2 MCWP 3-14.1

BMP-2, ONE CONDITION

METERS 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800

TIME(seconds) POINTS

11 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10012 95 96 96 96 97 97 98 98 100 100 10013 90 92 93 93 94 94 95 95 98 100 10014 85 87 89 90 91 92 93 93 95 98 10015 80 83 85 87 88 89 90 91 93 95 10016 75 79 81 83 85 86 88 88 91 93 9817 70 74 78 80 82 84 85 86 88 91 9518 64 70 74 77 79 81 83 84 86 88 9319 58 64 70 73 76 78 80 82 84 86 9120 52 58 64 70 73 75 78 79 82 84 8821 46 52 58 64 70 73 75 77 79 82 8622 40 46 52 58 64 70 73 75 77 79 8423 34 40 46 52 58 64 70 72 75 77 8224 28 34 40 46 52 58 64 70 72 75 7925 22 28 34 40 46 52 58 64 70 72 7726 16 22 28 34 40 46 52 58 64 70 7527 10 16 22 28 34 40 46 52 58 64 7228 4 10 16 22 28 34 40 46 52 58 7029 0 4 10 16 22 28 34 40 46 52 6430 0 4 10 16 22 28 34 40 46 5831 0 4 10 16 22 28 34 40 5232 0 4 10 16 22 28 34 4633 0 4 10 16 22 28 4034 0 4 10 16 22 3435 0 4 10 16 2836 0 4 10 2237 0 4 1638 0 1039 440 0

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment M-3

BMP-2, TWO CONDITIONS

METERS 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800

TIME(seconds) POINTS

11 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10012 96 97 97 98 98 98 99 99 99 99 9913 93 94 94 95 95 96 97 97 97 97 9714 90 91 92 93 93 94 95 95 96 96 9615 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 93 94 94 9416 83 85 86 88 88 90 91 92 92 92 9317 80 82 84 85 86 88 89 90 90 91 9118 77 79 81 83 84 86 87 88 89 89 9019 73 76 78 80 82 84 85 86 87 88 8820 70 73 75 78 79 82 83 84 85 86 8721 64 70 73 75 77 80 81 83 84 84 8522 58 64 70 73 75 78 80 81 82 83 8423 52 58 64 70 72 76 78 79 80 81 8224 46 52 55 64 70 74 76 77 79 80 8125 40 46 52 58 64 72 74 75 77 78 7926 34 40 46 52 58 70 72 74 75 76 7827 28 34 40 46 52 64 70 72 73 75 7628 22 28 34 40 46 58 64 70 72 73 7529 16 22 28 34 40 52 50 64 70 72 7330 10 16 22 28 34 46 52 58 64 70 7231 4 10 16 22 28 40 46 52 58 64 7032 0 4 10 16 22 34 40 46 52 58 6433 0 4 10 16 28 34 40 46 52 5834 0 4 10 22 28 34 40 46 5235 0 4 16 22 28 34 40 4636 0 10 16 22 28 34 4037 4 10 16 22 28 3438 0 4 10 16 22 2839 0 4 10 16 2240 0 4 10 1641 0 4 1042 0 443 0

M-4 MCWP 3-14.1

BTR-70, NORMAL

METERS 600 700 800 900 10001100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800

TIME(seconds) POINTS

10 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10011 93 93 93 94 95 96 96 96 97 97 98 98 9812 85 85 85 88 90 92 92 93 94 94 95 95 9613 78 78 78 82 85 87 89 90 91 92 93 93 9414 70 70 70 76 80 83 85 87 as 89 90 91 9215 68 68 68 70 75 79 81 83 85 86 88 88 9016 66 66 66 68 70 74 77 50 82 84 85 86 8817 64 64 64 66 68 70 74 77 79 81 83 84 8618 62 62 62 64 66 68 70 73 76 78 80 82 8419 60 60 60 62 64 66 68 70 73 75 78 79 8220 58 58 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 73 75 77 8021 56 56 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 73 75 7822 54 54 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 7623 52 52 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 7424 50 50 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 7225 48 48 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 7026 46 46 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 6827 44 44 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 6628 42 42 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 6429 40 40 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 6230 38 38 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 6031 36 36 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 5832 34 34 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 5633 32 32 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 5434 30 30 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 5235 28 28 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 5036 26 26 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 4837 24 24 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 4638 22 22 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 4439 20 20 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 4240 18 18 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 4041 16 16 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 3842 14 14 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 3643 12 12 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 3444 10 10 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 3245 8 8 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 3046 6 6 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 2847 4 4 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 2648 2 2 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 24

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment M-5

BTR-70, NORMAL (continued)

METERS 600 700 800 900 10001100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800

TIME(seconds) POINTS

49 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 2250 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2051 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 1852 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 1653 0 2 4 6 8 10 1454 0 2 4 6 8 1255 0 2 4 6 1056 0 2 4 857 0 2 658 0 459 260 0

M-6 MCWP 3-14.1

BTR-70, ONE CONDITION

METERS 600 700 800 900 1000 1100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800

TIME(seconds) POINTS

10 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10011 95 96 96 96 96 97 97 98 100 100 100 100 100

12 90 92 92 92 93 94 94 95 100 100 100 100 100

13 85 87 87 89 90 91 92 93 98 100 100 100 100

14 80 83 83 85 87 88 89 90 95 98 100 100 100

15 75 79 79 81 83 85 86 88 93 95 98 100 100

16 70 74 74 77 80 82 84 85 90 93 95 98 100

17 68 70 70 74 77 79 81 83 88 90 93 95 100

18 66 68 68 70 73 76 78 80 85 88 90 93 98

19 64 66 66 68 70 73 75 78 83 85 88 90 95

20 62 64 64 66 68 70 73 75 80 83 85 88 93

21 60 62 62 64 66 68 70 73 78 80 83 85 90

22 58 60 60 62 64 66 68 70 75 78 80 83 88

23 56 58 58 60 62 64 66 68 73 75 78 80 85

24 54 56 56 58 60 62 64 66 70 73 75 78 83

25 52 54 54 56 58 60 62 64 68 70 73 75 80

26 50 52 52 54 56 58 60 62 66 68 70 73 78

27 48 50 50 52 54 56 58 60 64 66 68 70 75

28 46 48 48 50 52 54 56 58 62 64 66 68 73

29 44 46 46 48 50 52 54 56 60 62 64 66 70

30 42 44 44 46 48 50 52 54 58 60 62 64 68

31 40 42 42 44 46 48 50 52 56 58 60 62 66

32 38 40 40 42 44 46 48 50 54 56 58 60 64

33 36 38 38 40 42 44 46 48 52 54 56 58 62

34 34 36 36 38 40 42 44 46 50 52 54 56 60

35 32 34 34 36 38 40 42 44 48 50 52 54 58

36 30 32 32 34 36 38 40 42 46 48 50 52 56

37 28 30 30 32 34 36 38 40 44 46 48 50 54

38 26 28 28 30 32 34 36 38 42 44 46 48 52

39 24 26 26 28 30 32 34 36 40 42 44 46 50

40 22 24 24 26 28 30 32 34 38 40 42 44 48

20 22 22 24 26 28 30 32 36 38 40 42 46

42 18 20 20 22 24 26 28 30 34 36 38 40 44

43 16 18 18 20 22 24 26 28 32 34 36 38 42

44 14 16 16 18 20 22 24 26 30 32 34 36 40

45 12 14 14 16 18 20 22 24 28 30 32 34 38

46 10 12 12 14 16 18 20 22 26 28 30 32 36

47 8 10 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 26 28 30 34

48 6 8 8 10 12 14 16 18 22 24 26 28 32

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment M-7

BTR-70, ONE CONDITION (continued)

METERS 600 700 800 900 10001100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800

TIME(seconds) POINTS

49 4 6 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 22 24 26 3050 2 4 4 6 8 10 12 14 18 20 22 24 2851 0 2 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 22 2652 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 14 16 18 20 2453 0 2 4 6 8 12 14 16 18 2254 0 2 4 6 10 12 14 16 2055 0 2 4 8 10 12 14 1856 0 2 6 8 10 12 1657 0 4 6 8 10 1458 2 4 6 8 1259 0 2 4 6 1060 0 2 4 861 0 2 662 0 463 264 0

M-8 MCWP 3-14.1

BTR-70, TWO CONDITIONS

METERS 600 700 800 900 10001100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800TIME

(seconds) POINTS10 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10011 96 97 97 97 98 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10012 93 94 94 94 95 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10013 90 91 91 92 93 98 100 100 100 100 100 100 10014 87 88 88 89 90 95 98 100 100 100 100 100 10015 83 85 85 86 88 93 95 98 100 100 100 100 10016 80 82 82 84 85 90 93 95 100 100 100 100 10017 77 79 79 81 83 88 90 93 98 100 100 100 10018 73 76 76 78 80 85 88 90 95 98 100 100 10019 70 73 73 75 78 83 85 88 93 95 98 100 10020 68 70 70 73 75 80 83 85 90 93 95 100 10021 66 68 68 70 73 78 80 83 88 90 93 98 10022 64 66 66 68 70 75 78 80 85 88 90 95 9823 62 64 64 66 68 73 75 78 83 85 88 93 9524 60 62 62 64 66 70 73 75 80 83 85 90 9325 58 60 60 62 64 68 70 73 78 50 83 88 9026 56 58 58 60 62 66 68 70 75 78 80 85 8827 54 56 56 58 60 64 66 68 73 75 78 83 8528 52 54 54 56 58 62 64 66 70 73 75 80 8329 50 52 52 54 56 60 62 64 68 70 73 78 8030 48 50 50 52 54 58 60 62 66 68 70 75 7831 46 48 48 50 52 56 58 60 64 66 50 73 7532 44 46 46 48 50 54 56 58 62 64 66 70 7333 42 44 44 46 48 52 54 56 60 62 64 68 7034 40 42 42 44 46 50 52 54 58 60 62 66 6835 38 40 40 42 44 48 50 52 56 58 60 64 6636 36 38 38 40 42 46 48 50 54 56 58 62 6437 34 36 36 38 40 44 46 48 52 54 56 60 6238 32 34 34 36 38 42 44 46 50 52 54 58 6039 30 32 32 34 36 40 42 44 48 50 52 56 5840 28 30 30 32 34 38 40 42 46 48 50 54 5641 26 28 28 30 32 36 38 40 44 46 48 52 5442 24 26 26 28 30 34 36 38 42 44 46 50 5243 22 24 24 26 28 32 34 36 40 42 44 48 5044 20 22 22 24 26 30 32 34 38 40 42 46 4845 18 20 20 22 24 28 30 32 36 38 40 44 4646 16 18 18 20 22 26 28 30 34 36 38 47 4447 14 16 16 18 20 24 26 28 32 34 36 40 42

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment M-9

48 12 14 14 16 18 22 24 26 30 32 34 38 40

M-10 MCWP 3-14.1

BTR-70, TWO CONDITIONS (continued)

METERS 600 700 800 900 10001100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800

TIME(seconds) POINTS

49 10 12 12 14 16 20 22 24 28 30 32 36 3850 8 10 10 12 14 18 20 22 26 28 30 34 3651 6 8 8 10 12 16 15 20 24 26 28 32 3452 4 6 6 8 10 14 16 18 22 24 26 30 3253 2 4 4 6 8 12 14 16 20 22 24 28 3054 0 2 2 4 6 10 12 14 18 20 22 26 2855 0 0 2 4 8 10 12 16 18 20 24 2656 0 2 4 8 10 14 16 15 22 2457 0 4 6 8 12 14 16 20 2258 2 4 6 10 12 14 15 2059 0 2 4 8 10 12 16 1860 0 2 6 8 10 14 1661 0 4 6 8 12 1462 0 2 4 6 10 1263 0 2 4 1064 0 2 665 0 4 666 2 467 0 268 0

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment M-11

BRDM, NORMALMETERS 600 700 800 900 10001100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800

TIME(seconds) POINTS

9 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10010 94 94 94 95 96 96 96 97 97 98 98 100 10011 88 88 88 90 92 92 93 94 94 95 95 98 10012 82 82 82 85 87 89 90 91 92 93 93 95 10013 76 76 76 80 83 85 87 88 89 90 91 93 9814 70 70 70 75 79 81 83 85 86 88 88 91 9515 68 68 68 70 74 77 80 82 84 85 86 88 9316 66 66 66 68 70 74 77 79 81 83 84 86 9117 64 64 64 66 68 70 73 76 78 80 82 84 8818 62 62 62 64 66 68 70 73 75 78 79 82 8619 60 60 60 62 64 66 68 70 73 75 77 79 8420 55 55 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 73 75 77 8221 56 56 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 75 7922 54 54 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 72 7723 52 52 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 70 7524 50 50 50 52 56 58 60 62 64 66 68 7225 48 48 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 66 7026 46 46 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 64 6827 44 44 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 62 6628 42 42 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 60 6429 40 40 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 58 6230 38 38 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 56 6031 36 36 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 54 5532 34 34 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 52 5633 32 32 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 50 5434 30 30 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 48 5235 28 28 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 46 5036 26 26 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 44 4837 24 24 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 42 4638 22 22 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 40 4439 20 20 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 38 4240 15 18 15 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 36 4041 16 16. 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 34 3842 14 14 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 32 3643 12 12 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 30 3444 10 10 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 24 26 28 3245 8 8 8 10 12 14 16 15 20 22 24 26 3046 6 6 6 8 10 12 14 16 15 20 22 24 28

M-12 MCWP 3-14.1

47 4 4 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 22 26BRDM, NORMAL (continued)

METERS 600 700 800 900 10001100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800

TIME(seconds) POINTS

48 2 2 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 2449 0 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 2250 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 2051 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 1852 0 2 4 6 8 10 12 1653 0 2 4 6 8 10 1454 0 2 4 6 8 1255 0 2 4 6 1056 0 2 4 857 0 2 658 0 459 260 0

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment M-13

BRDM, ONE CONDITION

METERS 600 700 800 900 10001100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800

TIME(seconds) POINTS

9 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10010 96 96 96 96 97 97 98 98 98 99 99 99 9911 92 92 92 93 94 94 95 95 96 97 97 97 9712 87 89 89 90 91 92 93 93 94 95 95 96 9613 83 85 85 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 93 94 9414 79 81 81 83 85 86 88 68 90 91 92 92 9315 74 77 77 80 82 84 85 86 88 89 90 90 9116 70 74 74 77 79 81 83 84 86 87 88 89 9017 68 70 70 73 76 78 80 82 84 85 86 87 8818 66 68 68 70 73 75 78 79 82 83 84 85 8719 64 66 66 68 70 73 75 77 80 81 83 84 8520 62 64 64 66 68 70 73 75 78 80 81 82 8421 60 62 62 64 66 68 70 72 76 78 79 80 8222 58 60 60 62 64 66 68 70 74 76 77 79 8123 56 58 58 60 62 64 66 68 72 74 75 77 7924 54 56 56 58 60 62 64 66 70 72 74 75 7825 52 54 54 56 58 60 62 64 68 70 72 73 7626 50 52 52 54 56 58 60 62 66 68 70 72 7527 48 50 50 52 54 56 58 60 64 66 68 70 7328 46 48 48 50 52 54 56 58 62 64 66 68 7229 44 46 46 48 50 52 54 56 60 62 64 66 7030 42 44 44 46 48 50 52 54 58 40 62 64 6831 40 42 42 44 46 48 50 52 56 58 60 62 6632 38 40 40 42 44 46 48 50 54 56 58 60 6433 36 38 38 40 42 44 46 48 52 54 56 50 6234 34 36 36 38 40 42 44 46 50 52 54 56 6035 32 34 34 36 38 40 42 44 48 50 52 54 5836 30 32 36 38 40 42 46 52 56 32 34 48 5037 28 30 30 32 34 36 38 40 44 46 48 50 5438 26 28 28 30 32 34 36 38 42 44 46 48 5239 24 26 26 28 30 32 34 36 40 42 44 46 5040 22 24 24 26 28 30 32 34 38 40 42 44 4841 20 22 22 24 26 28 30 32 36 38 40 42 4642 18 20 20 22 24 26 28 30 34 36 38 40 4443 16 18 18 20 22 24 26 28 32 34 36 38 4244 14 15 16 15 20 22 24 26 30 32 34 36 4045 12 14 14 16 18 20 22 24 28 30 32 34 3846 10 12 12 14 16 18 20 22 26 28 30 32 3647 8 10 10 12 14 16 18 20 24 26 28 30 34

M-14 MCWP 3-14.1

BRDM, ONE CONDITION (continued)

METERS 600 700 800 900 10001100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800

TIME(seconds) POINTS

48 6 8 8 10 12 14 16 18 22 24 26 28 3249 4 6 6 8 10 12 14 16 20 22 24 26 3050 2 4 4 6 8 10 12 14 18 20 22 24 2851 0 2 2 4 6 8 10 12 16 18 20 22 2652 0 0 2 4 6 8 10 14 16 18 20 2453 0 2 4 6 8 12 14 16 18 2254 0 2 4 6 10 12 14 16 2055 0 2 4 8 10 12 14 1856 0 2 6 8 10 12 1657 0 4 6 8 10 1458 2 4 6 8 1259 0 2 4 6 1060 0 2 4 861 0 2 662 0 463 264 0

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment M-15

BRDM, TWO CONDITIONS

METERS 600 700 800 900 10001100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800

TIME(seconds) POINTS

9 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 10010 97 97 97 98 98 98 99 99 99 99 100 100 10011 94 94 94 95 95 96 97 97 97 97 99 100 10012 91 92 92 93 93 94 95 95 96 96 97 100 10013 88 89 89 90 91 92 93 93 94 94 96 99 10014 85 86 86 88 88 90 91 92 92 93 94 97 9915 82 84 84 85 86 88 89 90 91 91 93 96 9716 79 81 81 83 84 86 87 88 89 90 91 94 9617 76 78 78 80 82 84 85 86 88 88 90 93 9418 73 75 75 78 79 82 83 84 86 87 88 91 9319 70 73 73 75 77 80 81 83 84 85 87 90 9120 68 70 70 73 75 78 80 81 83 84 85 88 9021 66 68 68 70 72 76 78 79 81 82 84 87 8822 64 66 66 68 70 74 76 77 80 81 82 85 8723 62 64 64 66 68 72 74 75 78 79 81 84 8524 60 62 62 64 66 70 72 74 76 78 79 82 8425 58 60 60 62 64 68 70 72 75 76 78 81 8226 56 58 58 60 62 66 68 70 73 75 76 79 8127 54 56 56 58 60 64 66 68 72 73 75 78 7928 52 54 54 56 55 62 64 66 70 72 73 76 7829 50 52 52 54 56 60 62 64 68 70 72 75 7630 48 50 50 52 54 58 60 62 66 68 70 73 7531 46 48 48 50 52 56 58 60 64 66 68 72 7332 44 46 46 48 50 54 56 58 62 64 66 70 7233 42 44 44 46 48 52 54 56 60 62 64 68 7034 40 42 42 44 46 50 52 54 58 60 62 66 6835 38 40 40 42 44 48 50 52 56 58 60 64 6636 36 38 38 40 42 46 48 50 54 56 58 62 6437 34 36 36 38 40 44 46 48 52 54 56 60 6238 32 34 34 36 38 42 44 46 50 52 54 58 6039 30 32 32 34 36 40 42 44 46 50 52 56 5840 28 30 30 32 34 38 40 42 46 48 50 54 5641 26 28 28 30 32 36 38 40 44 46 48 52 5442 24 26 26 28 30 34 36 38 42 44 46 50 5243 22 24 24 26 28 32 34 36 40 42 44 48 5044 20 22 22 24 26 30 32 34 38 40 42 46 4845 18 20 20 22 24 28 30 32 36 38 40 44 4646 16 18 18 20 22 26 28 30 34 36 38 42 44

M-16 MCWP 3-14.1

47 14 16 16 18 20 24 26 28 32 34 36 40 42

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment M-17

BRDM, TWO CONDITIONS (continued)

METERS 600 700 800 900 10001100 1200 1300 1400 1500 1600 1700 1800

TIME(seconds) POINTS

48 12 14 14 16 18 22 24 26 30 32 34 38 4049 10 12 12 14 16r. 20 22 24 28 30 32 36 3850 8 10 10 12 14 18 20 22 26 28 30 34 3651 6 8 8 10 12 16 18 20 24 26 28 32 3452 4 6 6 8 10 14 16 18 22 24 26 30 3253 2 4 4 6 8 12 14 16 20 22 24 28 3054 0 2 2 4 6 10 12 14 18 20 22 26 2855 0 0 2 4 8 10 12 16 18 20 24 2656 0 2 6 8 10 14 16 18 22 2457 0 4 6 8 12 14 16 20 2258 2 4 6 10 12 14 18 2059 0 2 4 8 10 12 16 1860 0 2 6 8 10 14 1661 0 4 6 8 12 1462 2 4 6 10 1263 0 2 4 8 1064 0 2 6 865 0 4 666 2 467 0 268 0

M-18 MCWP 3-14.1

SQUAD/RPG, NORMAL

METERS 300 400 500 600 700 800

TIME(seconds) POINTS

10 100 100 100 100 100 10011 90 93 93 93 94 9412 80 85 85 85 88 8813 70 78 78 78 82 8214 66 70 70 70 76 7615 62 66 66 66 70 7016 58 62 62 62 66 6617 54 58 58 58 62 6218 50 54 54 54 58 5819 46 50 50 50 54 5420 42 46 46 46 50 5021 38 42 42 42 46 4622 34 38 38 38 42 4223 30 34 34 34 38 3824 26 30 30 30 34 3425 22 26 26 26 30 3026 18 22 22 22 26 2627 14 18 18 18 22 2228 10 14 14 14 18 1829 6 10 10 10 14 1430 2 6 6 6 10 1031 0 2 2 2 6 632 0 0 0 2 233 0 0

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment M-19

SQUAD/RPG, ONE CONDITION

METERS 300 400 500 600 700 800

TIME(seconds) POINTS

10 100 100 100 100 100 10011 94 94 95 95 96 9612 88 88 90 90 92 9213 82 82 85 85 87 87

14 76 76 80 80 83 8315 70 70 75 75 79 7916 66 66 70 70 74 7417 62 62 66 66 70 7018 55 58 62 62 66 6619 54 54 58 55 62 6220 50 50 54 54 50 5821 46 46 50 50 54 5422 42 42 46 46 50 5023 38 38 42 42 46 4624 34 34 38 38 42 4225 30 30 34 34 38 3826 26 26 30 30 34 3427 22 22 26 26 30 3028 15 18 22 22 26 2629 14 14 15 18 22 2230 10 10 14 14 18 1831 6 6 10 10 14 1432 2 2 6 6 10 1033 0 0 2 2 6 634 0 0 2 235 0 0

M-20 MCWP 3-14.1

AP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . armor piercingAPC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . armored personnel carrierAPDS-T . . . . . . . . armor-piercing discarding sabot

with tracerAPFSDS-T . . . . . . . . . armor piercing fin-stabilized

discarding sabot with tracerAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Army regulationARTEP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Army Training and Evaluation pro-gram ATGM . . . . . . . . . . . . antitank guided missileAZ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . azimuth

BOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . burst on targetBPI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . bolt position indicator

CDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . control display assembly

DC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . direct currentDODAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Department of Defense

ammunition codeDSE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . direct support elementDX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . direct exchange

EAS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . end of active serviceEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . elevationEO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . electro-opticalEOD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . explosive ordnance disposal

FDC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fire direction centerFEBA . . . . . . . . . . . forward edge of the battle areaFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . field manualFMFM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Fleet Marine Force manualFO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . forward observerFPF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . final protective fireFRAGO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fragmentary orderFT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . firing table

GTA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . graphic training aids

HE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . high explosive

HEAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . high explosive antitankHEI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . high explosive incendiaryHEI-T . . . . . high explosive incendiary with tracer

IAW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . in accordance withID . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . identificationIRETS . . . . . . . . . . infantry remoted target systemIRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . initial rally pointITS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . individual training standard

LAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . light armored reconnaissanceLAV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . light armored vehicleLAV-25 . . . . . . . . . . . . light armored vehicle-25mmLAV-AT . . . . . . . . . light armored vehicle-antitankLCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LAV-25 crew evaluatorLD . . . . . . . . line of departure (ground operations)LF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . landing forceLGST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LAV-25 gunnery skills testLOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . line of sightLP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . listening postLRF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . laser rangefinder

MCCRES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marine Corps Combat Readiness Evaluation SystemMCRP . . . . . . Marine Corps reference publicationMCWP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Marine Corps warfightingpublicationMETL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mission-essential task listMETT-T . . . . . . . . . . . mission, enemy, terrain and

weather, troops and support available, time available

MILES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . multiple integrated laserengagement system

MOPP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . mission-oriented protectivepostureMOS . . . . . . . . . . . . military occupational specialtyMPRC . . . . . . . . . . . . . multipurpose range complex

Appendix N

Glossary

Section I. Acronyms and Abbreviations

MPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . meters per secondMTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . master training planNATO . . . . . . North Atlantic Treaty OrganizationNBC . . . . . . . . . . nuclear, biological, and chemicalNCO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . noncommissioned officerNCOIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . noncommissioned officer

in chargeNSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . national stock numberNTSC . . . . . . . . Naval Training System Command

OIC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . officer in chargeOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . observation postOPFOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . opposing forceORP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . objective rally point

PC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . personnel carrierPCW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . point calculation worksheetPDA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . power display assemblyPGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . precision gunnery systemPL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . phase linePMCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . preventive maintenance

checks and services

RF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . radio frequencyRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rally pointRPG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . rocket propelled grenadeRSO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . range safety officer

SALUTE . . . . . . . . . . . size, activity, location, unit,time, equipment

SF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . standard formatSNCO . . . . . . . . . . senior noncommissioned officerSOP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . standing operating procedureSRTP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . short range training plan

TAVSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . training and audio visual supportcenterTB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . technical bulletinTC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . training circularT/E . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . table of equipmentTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . technical manualTOT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . tracer on targetTOW . . . . . tube launched, optically tracked, wire

command link guided missileTPDS-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target practice discarding

sabot with tracerTP-T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target practice with tracerTRP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . target reference pointTSC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . training support center

UTM . . . . . . . . . . . . . universal transverse mercator

VAD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . visual aiming deviceVC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . vehicle commander

N-2 MCWP 3-14.1

WORM . . . . . . . . . . . . . width over range times mils

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment N-3

Section II. Definitions

(reverse blank)

air defense—All defensive measures designed todestroy attacking enemy aircraft or missiles in theEarth’s envelope of atmosphere, or to nullify orreduce the effectiveness of such attack. (Joint Pub1-02)

battlesight gunnery—The rapid engagement oftargets based on range estimations within certainunderstood battlesight range bands.

distribution of fire—Either a planned pattern ofprojectiles about a point, or a planned spread offire to cover a desired frontage or depth. (JointPub 1-02)

engagement area—An area along an enemy ave-nue of approach where the commander intends tocontain and destroy an enemy force with themassed fires of all available weapons. (MCRP5-2A)

fire control—The control of all operations inconnection with the application of fire on a target.(Joint Pub 1-02)

phase line—A line utilized for control and coor-dination of military operations, usually a terrainfeature extending across the zone of action. (JointPub 1-02)

precision gunnery—The method of engagementin which a deliberate range to target is estimatedand applied, then corrections made to further en-gage the target.

range determination—The process of determin-ing the distance between two points.

sabot—Lightweight carrier in which a subcaliberprojectile is centered to permit firing the projectilein the larger caliber weapon. The carrier fills thebore of the weapon from which the projectile isfired; it is normally discarded a short distancefrom the muzzle. (Joint Pub 1-02)

sector of fire—A defined area which is requiredto be covered by the fire of individual or crewserved weapons, or the weapons of a unit. (JointPub 1-02)

standing operating procedure—A set of in-structions covering those features of operationswhich lend themselves to a definite or standard-ized procedure without loss of effectiveness. Theprocedure is applicable unless ordered otherwise.(Joint Pub 1-02)

target reference point—An easily recognizablepoint on the ground (either natural or man-made)used to initiate, distribute, and control fires. Tar-get reference points are designated by maneuverleaders to define unit or individual sectors of fire.They are designated using standard target symbolsand numbers issued by maneuver commanders.(MCRP 5-2A)

N-4 MCWP 3-14.1

Joint Publication (Joint Pub)

1-02 DOD Dictionary of Military and Associated Terms

Army Publications

Army Regulation (AR)

385-63 Policies and Procedures for Firing Ammunition for Training, TargetPractice, and Combat

Army Training and Evaluation Program (ARTEP)

17-57-10-MTP Mission Training Plan for the Scout Platoon

Army Training Circular (TC)

25-8 Training Ranges

Field Manual (FM)

1-402 Aviator’s Recognition Guide

Firing Table (FT)

25-A-2 Firing Tables for Cannon, 25mm Gun: M242 on Infantry Fighting Vehicle, M2 and Cavalry Fighting Vehicle, M3; Firing Cartridge, APDS-T, M791; Cartridge, HIE-T, M792 and Cartridge, TP-T, M793

Technical Bulletin (TB)

9-1300-385 Munitions, Suspended or Restricted

Technical Manuals (TMs)

Appendix OReferences and Related Publications

9-1005-313-10 Operator’s Manual for Machine Gun, 7.62mm, M240, M240C, M240E1

9-6920-363-12&P Operator’s and Organizational Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools List, Conversion Kit (Caliber .22 Rimfire Adapter) M261 for Rifle, 5.56mm, M16 and M16A1

Navy Publications

Space War Instruction (SPAWARINST)

5.100.12A Navy Laser Radiation Hazards Prevention Program

Naval Training System Command Manual (NTSC)

P-5603 Light Armored Vehicle (LAV-25) Training System Turret Trainer Device 17B19

Marine Corps Publications

Marine Corps Warfighting Publication (MCWP)

3-15.1 Machine Guns and Machine Gun Gunnery

Marine Corps Reference Publications (MCRPs)

3-0A Unit Training Management Guide3-0B How to Conduct Training5-2A Operational Terms and Graphics

Fleet Marine Force Manual (FMFM)

6-5 The Marine Rifle Squad

Technical Manuals (TMs)

08594A-10/1B LAV-25 Turret08594A-10/2 Light Armored Vehicle, LAV-2508672A-20&P/1 Gun Automatic 25MM M242

O-2 MCWP 3-14.1

(reverse blank)

LAV-25 Gunnery and Employment O-3